TECHNICAL MANUAL

STANDARD MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

December 2009
 INDEX
S. Name of Equipment Recommended Unit P.No.
No. For
1 BEDS N ACCESSORIES
1. Semi Fowler Bed Deluxe With Castors and Saline 1
Rod
2. I.C.U. BED (Height Adjustable with S.S. 2
Collapsible Railing)
3. Bedside Locker With Drawer and cabinet 3
4. Over bed table (Height Adjustable) 4
5. Examination Couch 4
6. Stretcher on Trolley 5
7. Soiled Linion Trolley (Stainless steel) 5
8. Doctors Examination Stool (Stainless Steel) 6
9. Double Step Stool 6
10. Single Step Stool 7
11. Emergency Recovery Trolley (Causality Trolley) 7
12. Saline Stand – Full S.S. with castor 8
13. Mosquito Rod full S.S. 8
14. Revolving Stool (Stainless Steel) with Backrest 9
15. Patient Attendant bed 9
16. Wheel Chair 9
17. Major Head end controlled hydraulic pump 10
surgical operation theatre super deluxe fully S.S.
model operation table.
18. Minor Hydraulic operation table orthopedic surgery 10
deluxe model
19. Steel cupboard trowel plain 11
20. Slotted Racks 11
21. Equipment Specifications for I.C.U Beds 11
Mechanical-(Non Electrical Model)
22. Table/Trolley 15-23
 Sorting Table/ Table Utility with SS Top
 Clean up Counter (Wash Station) with
double sink, one middle platform and flash
back
 Clean up counter (wash station) with one
sink, one platform and flash back
 work table/table utility with SS top
 Table trolley with one under shelf
 Gauze cutting machine
 Line fold table
 Preparation and packing table with 2
overhead shelves and 1 drawer
 Closed transport trolley with 2 door
shutters and 3 compartments
 Instrument trays- perforated type with
handle
 Patient Transfer trolley
 Semi flower Bed Deluxe with castors and
saline rod
 Bed side locker
 Stand
 over bed table (Height adjustable)
 Wheel chair

2
  Revolving stool (stainless steel) with
backrest
 Medicine trolley
 Instrument Trolley
 Singh Step Stool

2. CSSD
1. Equipment Specifications for Washer 24
Disinfectors (Medium Capacity)
2. Equipment Specifications for Washer 27
disinfectors (High capacity)
3. Automatic Steam Sterilizer 30
4. Flash Sterilizer 31
5. ETO Sterilizer 32
6. Ultra Sonic Cleaner 33
7. Drying Cabinet 35
8. Sealing Machine : Plain Sealer 35
9. Horizontal high pressure steam sterilizer 36
20"X48" machine
3. ENDO N LAPRO
1. Video Thoracoscope 37
2. Holmium laser generator 39
3. Ultrasonic aspirator 41
4. Specifications for High definition laparoscopy 44
system high definition three chip camera system
5. Equipment Specifications for video enter scope 46
(Single balloon)
6. Equipment Specifications for Video Enter scope 48
(Double balloon)
7. Equipment specifications for video endoscopy 51
complete system
8. Equipment specifications for upper GI endoscope 54
9. Equipment specification for ERCP Scope 56
4. ICU
1. Electric suction Machine Lipo fully stainless steel 59
body
2. Spo2 machine with NIBP (Pulse oxy meter) 59
3. Anesthesia Kit 60
4. syringe infusion pump 60
5. volumetric infusion pump (with Micro and Macro 61
mode of operation)
6. Electric cautery machine 400m 61
7. Central Monitoring System 61
8. Defibrillator with monitoring system 62
9. Electric drilling machine with attachments with 62
reamers flexible
10. Color Multi para monitor 62
11. Ultrasonic Cutting & Coagulation Device 63
12. Cardiopulmonary exercise physiology Test system 66
with Treadmill
13. Stress Test System with TMT 70
14. Sleep Screening Test 72
15. Sleep Lab (Advanced) 74
16. Lung Function Test system 76
17. Lung functions Test system (Advanced) 78

3
 18. Multipara Monitor 82
19. Defibrillator (Bi-Phasic) 83

20. Vital Sign Monitor 84

21. ECG Machine 84
22. Pulse OXI-Meter 85
23. Fumigation Machine 86
24. Suction Machine (Electrical) 86
25. Suction Apparatus (Foot Operating) 87
26. Oxygen concentrator 87
27. BI-PAP 87
28. Specifications for Fetal Monitor 87
5. LABORATORY
1. Blood Gas Auto Analizer 89
2. Spiro meter 89
3. Specification for Blood gas analyzer with 90
coximeter suitable for point of care testing
4. Specification of Hand Tube Sealer (Dielectric tube 91
sealer)
6. NEPHROLOGY
1 Haemodialysis Machine 92
2 Continuous Renal Replacement Therapy (CRRT) 94
Machines
3 Automatic PD Cycler 96
4 Haemodialysis Chair 98
5 Dialyzer Reprocessor 100
6 Water Treatment System for Haemodialysis 102
7 Bed weighing Scale 104
7. UROLOGY
1. Urodynamic System 6 Channel (High END) 106
2. Urodynamic System 6 Channel (Low End) 108
3. Electro Surgical Generator with Argon Beam 111
Coagulation
4. Endovision system with PCNL set 113
5. Extracorporeal shockwave lithotriptor (E.S.W.L.) 116
(High End)
6. Extracorporeal Shockwave Lithotriptor (E.S.W.L.) 118
(Low End)
7. Flexible Cysto-Nephroscope (High end) 120
8. Flexible Cysto-Nephroscope (Low End) 122
9. O.T. Table for Urology 124
10. Uretro-Renoscope (Semi-Rigid) 126

8. OPTHOLMALOGY N ENT
1. Slit Lamp Biomicroscope 128
2. Photoslit Lamp 128
3. Direct Ophthal Moscope 129
4. Indirect Ophthalmoscope 130
5. Auto Refractometer 130
6. Tonometer-Non contact 131
7. Applanation Tonometer 131
8. Keratometer 131
9. Motorized Table 131
10. A scan 132

4
 11. B scan 132
12. Fundus Camera 132
13. Yag Laser 134
14. Humphrey visual field analyser 134
15. Diode laser with LIO facility & slit lamp delivery 135
systerm
16. CRYO unit 135
17. Synaptophore 135
18. Streak retinoscope 136
19. Snellen's Drum 136
20. Ophthalmic refraction unit 137
21. Ocular Thorpe four mirror gonio 138
22. Ocular Thorpe surgical gonioscope 138
23. Kokppe gonio lens set 138
24. Latina SLT gonio lens 138
25. Ocular abraham iridotomy lens 139
26. Ocular swan-jacob autoclaable conoprism 139
27. Goldman perimeter 139
28. Ultrasonic pachymeter 139
29. Phacoemulsifier 140
30. Ophthalmic operating microscope 140
31. Operating microscope with video recording 141
32. wet field bipolar coagulator 141
33. Lennsometer 142
34. surgeon's Chair (Motorized) 142
35. Charts and Cards 142-
1. Teller acuity cards 148
2. Contrast sensitivity Charts
3. Etdrs Charts
4. Ishihara Chat
5. IOL Kit
6. Trial lens set
7. Surgical instruments
9. ENT
1. ENT Head light (for Optimum and Mobile 149
illumination of Medical Examination in ENT)
2. Specifications for Cystoscope Set 149
3. Specifications for stone punch set 149
4. Specifications for Resectoscope set 149
5. Technical specification for Pure Tone Audiometer 150
6. Impedence Audiometer 150
7. Auto Refractometer 150
8. Auto Lensometer with printer 151
9. Keratometer with joystick model 152
10. Ophthalmic chair unit with auto chart projector 152
11. Cateract Set 154
12. Combi video attachment for Tagaki OM 10 Zoom 154
Microscope
13. Specification for high speed electric Drill system 155
10. OT
1. Technical Specifications for Modular OT 157
2. Detailed Technical Specification for Modular 158-
Operation theatre 161
 Qalls & Ceiling Construction

5
  Ceiling Filtration system (Imported)
 Door and frames (Hermetically sealed doors)
 Operation theatre control panel
 Distribution Board
 X-Ray viewing Screens
 Pressure relief dampers
 Operation Theatre Flooring (antistatic
conductive tiles)
 Storage Unit
 Operating list board
 Hatch box
 Scrub Station
 View Window
3. Operation Table Hydraulic 162
4. Operation Theatre Light 163
5. OT Light with LED Technology Surgical light 165
system based on LED technology
6. Operating Microscope 166
7. OT Table 168
8. OT Light 168
9. Boyle's Apparatus 170
10. Operation Theater light Halogen (Seven Bulb) 171
11. Operation Theater Light Halogen Twin (Seven 171
Bulb+ Four Bulb)
12. Universal Halogen Spot Light 172

11. PAEDTRACIS
1. Infant Incubator Servo Control 173
2. Neonatal Intensive care incubator 175
3. Transport Incubator with Ventilator 177
4. Ventilators Neonatal 179
5. Open care system for neonates 182
6. Neonatal phototherapy unit- CFL 184
7. Neonatal Phototherapy Unit –tube lights 186
8. Fibre optic phototherapy lamp 188
9. Double surface phototherapy unit – tube lights 189
10. Equipment specifications for electronic weighing 191
balance for newborns
11. Paediatric laproscope set with accessories 192
12. Video endoscope system upper GI pediatric 195
Surgery
13. Pediatric Surgery OT Table 198
14. Ultrasonic aspirator for pediatric surgery 200
15. Pediatric Systoscope/ Resectoscope 8-10F 202
16. paediatric bronchoscope 204
17. paedratric oesophagoscope 206
18. warming devices –adult and peadiatric 207
19. neonatal resusitation cart 207
20. neonatal resuscitation unit 208

12. RADIOLOGY
1. IITV System 211
2. usg machine 212

6
 3. colour doppler 214
4. 500mA X-ray Machine 218
5. 300mA X-ray Machine 219
6. 100mA X-ray Machine 220
7. 60mA X-ray Machine 221

13. VENTILLATOR
1. Ventilator-High End (ICU) 223
2. Transport Monitor 225
3. Anesthesia Machine Trolley 227
4. Ventilator Technical Specification Adult – 228
Paediatric Infatn ventilators
5. Anaesthesia Ventilator 230
6. Transport Ventilator 230
7. Portable ICU Ventilator ICU 231

7
 EQUIPMENT BEDS N ACCESSORIES- 1
1. SEMI FOWLER BED DELUXE WITH CASTORS AND SALINE ROD

1. Overall Size: - 2195 mm L X 910 mm W X 590 mm H (Approx.).

2. Suitable for Mattress Size: - 1980 mm L X 910 mm W (Approx.).

Construction: -

3. The Bed frame should be made up of 60mm X 30mm Rectangular CRCA

18G tube, with four sleeves of diameter 40 mm & 3 mm thick, 75 mm long
welded at four corners.

4. CRCA rectangular tubes 25 mm X 25 mm X 18 G should be welded to the

main frame to support backrest frame.

5. Backrest should be made up of 25.4 mm diameter X 16G CRCA tube and

18G sheet & should be adjusted by screw mechanism with stainless steel
folding handle.

6. Stainless steel bows of 31.75 mm diameter pipe and equal height of 280
mm fixed with colored metal panel on both sides with embossing.

7. Fix panel should be made up of 18G CRCA sheet double press bend on
four sides and uniformly embossed holes from 25mm to 15mm dia and
embossing depth of 4mm in four rows distance between holes should be
125mm.

8. Panel is supported by a box stiffener of 100 mm width along the length

duly spot-welded.

9. Panel should be supported on three no’s 25 mm X 25mm X 3 mm thick

angle and 30mm x 60mm x 50mm L, five no’s pipe welded to main frame.

10. Off set Leg’s should be made up of 31.75 mm diameter and 535 mm long
pipe welded to 37 mm X 37 mm X 3 mm thick X 150 mm long angle, outer
side of angle should have 25 mm X 45deg chamfer.

11. 125 mm Dia heavy-duty castors should be provided two with brakes.

12. Four-flush I.V. Rod locations with S.S. Saline Rod of 12 mm & arrangement
to hold mosquito curtain poles.

1
 Finish:
13. All components should be pretreated in separate eight-tank process for
better finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection.

14. Process includes Hot Degreasing, Derusting, Activation, Phosphating &

No’s of Water rinses as per IS 3618 - 1966 class ‘C’ type and then
pretreated materials is coated with epoxym powder with film thickness of
60 microns (approx.) and then oven baked at 180 degree centigrade

2 I. C. U. Bed (height adjustable with S.S. Collapsible railing): -

Overall Size: - 2270 mm L X 960 mm W X590 mm (Approx.) Suitable for Mattress
Size: - 1980 mm L X 910 mm W (Approx.)

Construction: Bed frame should be made up of 60 mm x 30 mm x 16G CRCArectangular

tube with four sleeves of 40 mm diameter x 3 mm thick & 100 mm long welded at four
corners with rubber buffers of 150 mm diameter. Four-flush I.V. Rod locations. Four
sections top should be made up of 18G CRCA sheet double press bend on four sides and
uniformly embossed holes from 25mm to 15mm diameter and embossing depth of 4mm
in four rows and distance between holes should be 125mm apart. Backrest and leg end
section should be welded to 25.4 mm diameter x 16G CRCA pipe, Fix section should be
made up of 25 mm X 25 mm X 18G CRCA tube and 25 mm X 5 mm M. S. Flat welded to
main frame. Knee frame should be made up of 50 mm X 25 mm X 16G and 25 mm X 25
mm X 18G tube welded to 25 mm X 5 mm thick flat. Backrest and knee section can be
adjusted by two separate screw mechanism with stainless steel folding handle. Base
frame should be of 60 mm x 30 mm x 16G CRCA rectangular tube fitted with four no’s
125 mm dia x 37 mm width Rexellow make heavy duty swiveling castors, two with
brake. Height adjustment, Trendelnberg & reverse Trendelnberg by two separate
screws & lever mechanism with stainless steel folding handles. Stainless steel bows of
31.75 mm diameter pipe of equal height of 280 mm bent at four places with horizontal
support of 19mm x 19mm x 1mm thick square pipe. The bows should be fitted with
embossed metal panel of size 450mm x 200mm. Four-flush I. V. Rod locations with
Telescopic Saline Rod of Stainless Steel outer tube of 19 mm diameter and wall
thickness of 2.5 mm having knob to lock 12 mm diameter stainless steel Rod which slide
in outer tube. Double hook of 8 mm diameter stainless steel Rod welded to 12 mm
diameter Rod. Full-length Collapsible type stainless steel railings on both sides should
be provided and material should be of stainless steel 25.4 mm diameter. Three

2
horizontal telescopic type tubes housed in 25.4 mm x 25.4 mm x 18G CRCA square tube.
Arrangement to hold mosquito curtain poles.

Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate eight-tank process for better
finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes Hot Degreasing,
Derusting, Activation, Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as per IS 3618 - 1966 class ‘C’
type and thenpretreated materials is coated with epoxy powder with film thickness of
60 microns (approx.) and then oven baked at 180 degree centigrade.

3 Bedside Lockers with Drawer and Cabinet: -

Overall Dimensions: - 395 mm W X 365 mm D X 800 mm H (Approx.)

Construction: - Main cabinet should be made of 1 mm thick “C” shaped one-piece box.
Cabinet should have one drawer at top & a box at bottom and open space in between
drawer & box. Door should be made up of 1.2 mm thick CRCA sheet pivoted at top &
bottom by 4 mm diameter pin. Door & drawer should have magnetic latch of 75mm long
chrome plated brass handle .Top of cabinet should be made up of Stainless steel sheet
304 grades and thickness 24 G. Three sides of the top are raised by 10mm; front side
bend downward and four sides of both tops are bend & pressed 1800 to avoid sharp
edges, supported by 15 mm ply. The main cabinet should be fitted with 50 mm diameter
4 No’s Ball Casters.

Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate eight-tank process for better
finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes Hot Degreasing,
Derusting, Activation, Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as per IS 3618 - 1966 class ‘C’
type and then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy powder with film thickness of
60 microns(approx.) and then oven baked at 180 degree centigrade.

4. Over Bed Table (Height Adjustable): -

Overall Apron. Size: Stainless Steel Top 760 mm L x 360 mm W 50mm x 25mm MS
tubular telescopic stem with geared S.S. Handle for height adjustment from 75 mm to
1050 mm. MS rectangular tubular base is mounted on four castors of 50 mm dia.

Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate eight-tank process for better
finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes Hot Degreasing,

3
Derusting, Activation, Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as per IS 3618 - 1966 class ‘C’
type and then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy powder with film thickness of
60 microns (approx.) and then oven baked at 180 degree centigrade.

5. Examination Couch.
Overall Size: 1830 mm L x 575 mm W x850 mm H (Approx.)

Construction: Front frame should be made out of 50 mm x 25 mm rectangular tube of

1.2 mm thick with 5 vertical supports and 2 horizontal supports to form four
compartments with doors. All doors,one drawer and a sliding pad should have 75 mm
long stainless steel handles. One drawer and the door below the drawer should be fitted
with godrej m.p. Lock. It should have a sliding step stool below the third compartment.
Second and fourth compartment should have one partition at the center. Top should be
made up of CRCA 1.2 mm thick sheet with all four side raised upward& pressed bend to
1800. It should be provided with 100 mm thick 40 densityfoam covered with rexin and
zip on two sides. Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate eight-tank
process for better finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes Hot
Degreasing, Derusting, Activation, Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as per IS 3618 -
1966 class ‘C’ type and then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy powder with film
thickness of 60 microns (approx.) and then oven baked at 180 degree centigrade.

6. Stretcher On Trolley: -
Overall Dimension: - 2035 mm L X 530mm W X 870 mm H (Approx.)

Construction: - Frame should be made upof 50 mm X 25 mm X 18G CRCA rectangular

tubes; upper horizontal support tube should be made up of 25 mm X 25 mm X 18G tube.
Four no’s 150 mm diameter X 40 mm W heavy duty Swiveling casters bolted to an outer
pipeof 31.75 mm diameter. Detachable stretcher top should be 304 Grade Stainless
Steel sheet having 1 mm thickness and concave surface of depth 25mm, stainless steel
handles of 25.4 mm diameter and four legs of 31.75 mm diameter pipe with rubber
shoes.

Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate eight-tank process for better
finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes Hot Degreasing,
Derusting, Activation, Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as per IS 3618 - 1966 class ‘C’

4
type and then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy powder with film thickness of
60 microns s(approx.) and then oven baked at 180 degree centigrade.

7. Soiled Linion Trolley (Stainlesssteel): -

Linton Bag size: 510mm dia x H 700mmthe bag should be made up of Heavy-duty nylon
cloth. Construction: Two horizontal rings of 500mm dia made up of 20mm x 4mm thick
stainless steel flat with three vertical supports of 25 mm dia x 1.2 mm stainless steel tubes
mounted on 100mm dia rubber castors duly powder coated with PVC caps. Each 8
MULTIPURPOSE STOOL: -

Overall approx size: Top 280mm x 280mmx Ht 445mm

Construction: The top should be made up of 304-grade stainless steel sheet 0.9mm
thick double press bent on four sides. Theedges of the stainless steel sheet should be
folded to 180 degree to avoid the sharp edges. Frame Work: the frame should be made
up of 25mm x 25mm x 1.2mm thick CRCA square tubes for vertical members and the
horizontal members should be made up of 19mm dia x 1.2 thick CRCA tubes. The
stainless steel top should be fixed with the help of pop refits in slush position. The heavy
duly insertable plastic shoes should be provided.

Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate eight-tank process for better
finish good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes hot degreasing,
Derusting, activation,Phosphating & No's of water inses as per IS 3618-1966 class 'C'
type and then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy powder with film thickness of
60 microns(approx) and than oven backed at 180 degree centigrade.

8. Doctors Examination Stool (Stainless Steel):-

Overall Approx size: Top 300 mm Dia with height adjustable 520mm to 670 mm
Construction: Top should be made up of Stainless Steel & edges duly fold. Base should
be made up of five Horizontal supports of 25mm x 50 mm x 1mm thick rectangular
tubes and the vertical members should be made up of 50 mm Dia x 1.2 mm thick
stainless steel Tubes.Height should be adjusted by gas spring mechanism. The round
Stainless Steel Top should be riveted on rin made up of 20mm x 3mm MS flat & the
cross made up of 25 mm x 25mm square tubes.

5
The ring made up of 12.5 mm dia Stainless Steel tube should be fitted on the base to
support the legs. The stool should be fitted with 150mm dia Twin Roller Castor.

9. Double Step Stool : -

280mm/ 510 mm step height and size approx 460 mm L x 300 mm W MS tubular
construction with 18 g CRCA sheet. Steps super imposed by aluminum chucked plate &
legs fitted with rubber feet. Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate
eight tank process for better finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process
includes Hot Degreasing, Derusting, Activation, Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as
per IS 3618 - 1966 class ‘C’ type and then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy
powder with film thickness of 60 microns (approx.) and then oven baked at 180 degree
centigrade.

10. Single Step Stool : -

280mm step height and size approx 460 mm L x 300 mm W MS tubular construction
with 18 g CRCA sheet. Step super imposed by aluminum chucked plate & legs fitted with
rubber feet. Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate eight tank process
for better finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes Hot
Degreasing, Derusting, Activation, Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as per IS 3618 -
1966 class ‘C’ type and then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy powder with film
thickness of 60 microns (approx.) and then oven baked at 180 degree centigrade.

11. Emergency recovery trolley (causality trolley) :

Overall Dimension : 2035 mm l x 630 mmw x 640 TO 810 mm adjustable height

Construction: Frame should be made up of 50 mm x 25 mm CRCA x 18 G rectangular
tube fitted with four no's of 150 mm diameter x 40 mm W heavy duty swiveling castors,
two with brakes, bolted to an outer pipe of 31.75 mm diameter. Height adjustment,
Trendelnberg and reverse Trendelnberg by two separate screw and lever mechanism
with stainless steel folding handles. It should have provision to hold I.V. Rod and both
side swing away type stainless steel railings and rubber buffers on top four corners.
Detachable X-ray permeable stretcher top with manual backrest, which is adjusted on

6
ratchet and sliding arrangement for cassette holder. The trolley should have oxygen
cylinder attachment.

Finish: All components should be pretreated in separated in separate eighttank process

for better finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes Hot
Degreasing, Derusting Activation, Phosphating & No's of water rinses as per IS 3618 -
1966 class 'C' type and then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy powder with film
thickness of minimum 60 microns and then oven backed at 1800 C.

12. Saline stand - full S.S. with castor

Height adjustment from minimum height 1370 mm to maximum height 2435 mm

Construction: Stainless Steel pipe of 31.75 mm diameter x 1.2 mm thick tube welded to 40
mm x 20 mm x 230 mm long five numbers of rectangular S.S. pipe. 12 mm diameter x1300
mm long x 1.5 mm thick stainless steel pipe welded to 8 mm diameter double hook stainless
steel rod. It should have locking sleeve of 75 mm long & threading of 12 mm to give firm
locking to saline rod. The stand should be fitted with 5 numbers nylon castors, two with
brakes. 14 TRAUMACARE CRASH CART Overall approx. size: 740 mm W x 650mm D x
1600 mm H.

Construction: Framework should be made up of 25 mm diameter 1.2 mm thick tube,

100 mm dia. Swiveling castors two with brakes bolted to an outer tube of 25mm x
25mm x 60mm square tube. Trolley should be provided with two modular systems,
each system has three polymer drawers two contain rectangular containers, six
removable bins are provided below the top tray. Trolley should have three S.S. trays at
top, middle and bottom respectively. Trolley should be provided with massage board,
lamp & I.V. Rod, there should be provision f hold a powder coated oxygen cylinder cage
fitted at one side of the trolley.

13. Mosquito Rod – full S.S.

Construction: It should be made up of 12.5 x 1.2 mm thick CRCA tube of 44” Length
with a hook to hold mosquito net. Finish: All components should be pretreated in
separated in separate eighttank process for better finish, good adhesion and corrosion
protection. Process includes Hot Degreasing, Derusting Activation, Phosphating & No's of

7
water rinses as per IS 3618 - 1966 class 'C' type and then pretreated materials is coated with
epoxy powder with film thickness of minimum 60 microns and then oven backed at 1800 C.

14. Revolving Stool (Stainless Steel) With Backrest :-

Overall Approx size: Top 300 mm Dia with height adjustable 510mm to 710 mm

Construction: Top should be made up of Stainless Steel & edges duly fold. Base should
be made up of five Horizontal supports of 25mm x 50 mm x 1mm thick rectangular
tubes and the vertical members should be made up of 50 mm Dia x 1.2 mm thick
stainless steel Tubes. In which the square treated screw of 25 mm dia and nut should be
fitted. The nut should have grease pocket to hold the grease. The round Stainless Steel
Top should be riveted on rin made up of 20mm x 3mm MS flat & the cross made up of
25 mm x 25mm square tubes. It should be fitted with stainless steel back support. The
ring made up of 12.5 mm dia Stainless Steel tube should be fitted on the base to support
the legs. The stool should be fitted with heavy duty Rubber at the base.

15. Patient Attendant bed

Overall approx size L1830mm x W 560mm x H 470mm frame 50mm x 25 mm CRCA

rectangular tube two I.V. location Finish:

All components should be pretreated in separate eight-tank process for better finish,
good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes Hot Degreasing, Derusting,
Activation, Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as per IS 3618 - 1966 class ‘C’ type and
then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy powder with film thickness of 60
microns (approx.) and then oven baked at 180 degree centigrade.
16. Wheel Chair
Specification
Overall Width: 24” or 61cms
Foldable width: 11 ½” or 29.5cms
Width of Seat: 17 1/24” or 44cms
Depth of seat: 16” or 41cms
Height of seat from floor: 18” or 47cms
Overall length: 42” or 107cms

8
Dimensions +- ½” or 12mm

New foldable wheelchair for use at home and in hospital or rehabilitation centers, for
use on any smooth surface only. Double ball bearings ensure smooth rolling swinging
detachable adjustable footrests positive lock toggle brakes. Strong construction for
convenient handling Electro statically applied powder coating

17. Major Head end controlled hydraulic pump surgical operation

Theatre super deluxe fully s.s. model operation table.
Designed for successful surgery table can work in different position like Flex-
reflexreverse trendelnberg-chair and side controlled and Lateral tilt position etc.
Permeable table top for radiograph. Cassette tray for x-ray lateral Cassette tray for x-ray
A.P.

18. Minor Hydraulic Operation Table Orthopedic Surgery Deluxe

Model
With ss quality top of radiolucent, claded base, side railing of ss foot railing pipes
of ss, all clamp (block) of gunmetal chrome plated nylon castors rolls, detachable
headrest, detachable leg top with arm rest made of ss 2nos, screen rod made of ss 1nos,
wristlet made of ss with belt 2nos, shoulder support made of aluminum with ss rack
2nos, with mattress pad 2nos, handle 1no, with mattress and kidney bridge Orthopedic
assembly: Hip assembly with locking device for traction of SS 304 pipes, humorous,
radius ulna assembly, tibia assembly, femur close nailing assembly, device for open
reduction lower end femur, spine assembly, device for hand, forearm and arm surgery,
arthroscopy clamp, stand for assembly, frame for open reduction elbow, radiolucent 5th
part, mattress for all assembly part, Dimension 182cmx51cm Hydraulic displacement
Minimum height of top 81cm Hydraulic displacement Maximum height of top 104cms

19. Steel Cupboard Storwel Plain

Overall outside dimensions Height 1980mm x Width 915mm x depth485mm

Provides maximum storage with 4 adjustable shelves that can store just about anything
you can even install an instadex filing systems for efficient filing. Prime quality cold
rolled, close-annealed steel is treated with unique seven stop anti-corrosion process for
extra durability the multi bend seamless construction ensures rigidity and prevents

9
pests from entering. Automatic airless electrostatic painting using alkyd amino pain
provides a smooth, scratch resistant surface.

20. Slotted Racks

Overall size minimum height 6feet width 3feet Prime quality cold rolled, close-
annealed steel is treated with unique seven stop anti-corrosion process for extra
durability the multi bend seamless construction ensures rigidity and prevents pests
from entering. Automatic airless electrostatic painting using alkyd amino pain provides
a smooth, scratch resistant surface.

21. Equipment Specifications for I.C.U Beds Mechanical– (Non

Electrical) Model
1 Description of Function

1.1 ICU Beds are required in the Intensive Care for comfort of the patient and
to facilitate comfortable transfer to and fro emergency/OT/Wards etc. It
is also required to carry out point of care procedures including
radiological procedures at the bedside.

2 Operational Requirements

2.1 The system should be mechanically operable and adjustable for heights,
trendelenburg etc. It should also be having radiotransluscent top for
carrying out X-Ray at the bedside

2.2 Demonstration of the system is a must

3 Technical Specifications

3.1 Bed top:- bed should consist of four sections namely : head section, fixed
section , center section and leg section. It shall satisfy the following
requirements

a. head section should be capable of being raised upto the angle of

75-80 degree from the horizontal. Top of the section should be
fitted with x-ray permeable 6 to 8 mm sheet standard X-ray cassets
holding tray adjustment by separate screw mechanism with thrust
bearing and proper lubrication.

b. One part should be fixed.

c. The centre section should be capable of being raised or lowered

independently to an angle of 35 - 40 degrees from horizontal

10
 adjustment by separate screw mechanism with thrust bearing and
proper lubrication.

d. The leg section should be capable of being lowered or raised

independently by ratchet system.

e. Bed’s up& down motion with patient load should be light and must
be fitted with high tension spring support system. Adjustment by
separate screw mechanism with thrust bearing and proper
lubrication.

f. The bed top shall be capable of giving trendelenberg 8-12 degree

and reverse Trendelenberg 7- 9 Degree position . Adjustment by
separate screw mechanism with bearing & proper lubrication.

3.2 Section made of CRCA sheet at least 1.25 mm thick , uniformly perforated
full fowler position except head section. The outer tube dia of top section
of backrest and leg rest shall be at least 1.6 mm x 25.4 mm dia.

3.3 Castor wheels of 4- 6 inches with two foot operated locking mechanism.

3.4 Oxygen cylinder carrying facility under the base frame and urinal bottle
holder.

3.5 The mattress shall be ISI 1741 1960 extra hard with grooves covered with
Rexene (Bhorl Polynova). Thickness of Rexene not less than 0.65 mm or
above.

3.6 Stainless steel telescopic saline rod of at least 12 mm dia should be

adjustable in stainless steel tubular socket and shall be locked with knob
inside it with provision at four corners.

3.7 Nuts and bolts ;- all fasteners like nut bolts etc should be supplied in
electrogalvanized condition of protection against industrial atmosphere.

3.8 Slide railing :- both sides of the rail shall be provided with stainless steel
detachable and collapsible full length made of at least 19 mm dia x 1.25
mm thick . stainless steel tubes housed in M.S. rectangular frame. Railing
shall be below the mattress level once collapsed.

3.9 Rectangular Tubes (CRCA) for outer frame at least 60 mm x 1.6 mm thick
and horizontal transverse members at least19mm x 38 mm x 1.6 mm
thick. Four separate screw mechanism shall be used to achieve back rest
adjustment , knee rest adjustment , trendelberg and position and height
adjustment. Back rest horizontal and knee rest horizontal members of at
least 50 mm x 25 mm x 1.6 mm for chariot base frame of at least 60 mm x
30 mm x 1.6 mm thick. Chariot base shall be joined with main frame work
with connecting brackets and screw mechanism. Chariot based frame
shall have rectangular frame to receive castors. It shall be vertical
members of round tube to receive castor wheels and also materials used

11
 at least 50 mm x 6 mm for linkage flat at least 40 mm x 8 mm for long flats
and screw holder flat of at least 32 mm x 5 mm.

3.10 Round Bows:- for bows out members at least 31.75 mm dia x 1.25 mm
thick stainless steel tube 304 quality fitted with laminated panel with
board with help of stainless steel brackets , the thickness of laminated
panel board not less the 18 mm . Bows shall consist of outer tubes in one
piece double bend to achieve bow shape and should be detachable for
easy access to patients.

3.11 Buffer:- Rubber Buffer on all the four corners to provide damper effect.

3.12 Finish :- All the components should be free of rust and should have
received anti corrosion treatment and (white / Cream colour) epoxy
powder coating finish. Thickness of coating should not be less than 50
micron and oven baked at 180 degree to 200 degree Celsius. The finish
should exclude stainless steel parts, some hard ware, rubber PVC , castor
wheel if any.
3.13 Dimensions of bed :
Length : 2250 + 5 mm
Width : 1050 + 5 mm
Adjustable height : 225-840 mm
Mattress Size : appropriate as per bed size

4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables

4.1 I.C.U Bed Mainframe - 01
4.2 Articulated half length tuck away side rails : 02 Nos.
4.3 IV Rods : 02 No.
4.4 Mattress 12 cm Thick : 01 No.

5 Environmental factors

5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS)

5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient

temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient

temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 Standards, Safety and Training

6.1 Should be FDA or CE approved product

6.2 Manufacturer should have ISO certification for quality standards.

6.3 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have the
necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to carry out

12
 preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided in the
service/maintenance manual.

6.4 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and provision of AMC for next 5
years.

7 Documentation to be provided

7.1 Certificate of Calibration and inspection from the factory

7.2 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine

maintenance support as per manufacturer documentation in service /
technical manual.

7.3 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing

7.4 Log book with instruction for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out

7.5 Service manual in English

7.6 User manual in English

7.7 Must submit user list and performance report within last 5 years from
major hospital

22. Table/Trolley

1. SORTING TABLE / TABLE UTILITY WITH SS TOP

1 It should have size approx 1200 x 650 x 900 mm (LxWxH)

2. The top will be of S.S. 304 grade, 16 SWG sheet

3. It will have one under shelf of S.S. 304; 18 SWG sheet

4. Legs frame will be of 40 x 40 mm square pipe, 16SWG

5. It will also have adjustable bullets for legs

6. The corners will be smooth rounded so that there are no sharp

edges

7. The welding will be with TIG argon arc, smooth finished and
polished with mat finish

13
2. CLEAN UP COUNTER (WASH STATION) WITH DOUBLE SINK, ONE
MIDDLE PLATFORM AND FLASH BACK

1. It should have approximate size 2000 x 650 x 900 mm LxWxH

2. Top will be from S.S. 304 grade sheet, 16 SWG

3. The sinks will be made of S.S. 304; 16 SWG with inside ground and
polished

4. The legs will be of S.S. 304 square pipe 40 x 40 mm; 16 SWG and
will also have nylon bullets for adjustment

5. The corners will be rounded and the bottom pitched to the drain

6. A sink of adequate size as per lay out at the site of installation

should be provided along with provision of manual tap for hot and
cold water.

7. Each sink will be provided with a provision for drain.

8. The welding will be with TIG Argon arc, fine polished and finally
with mat finish

3. CLEAN UP COUNTER (WASH STATION) WITH ONE SINK, ONE

PLATFORM AND FLASH BACK

1. It should have approximate size 1500 x 650 x 900 mm LxWxH

2. Top will be from S.S. 304 grade sheet, 16 SWG

3. The sink will be made of S.S. 304; 16 SWG with inside ground and
polished

4. The legs will be of S.S. 304 square pipe 40 x 40 mm; 16 SWG and
will also have nylon bullets for adjustment

5. The corners will be rounded and the bottom pitched to the drain

6. A sink of adequate size as per lay out at the site of installation

should be provided along with provision of manual tap for hot and
cold water.

7. Each sink will be provided with a provision for drain.

8. The welding will be with TIG Argon arc, fine polished and finally
with mat finish

4. WORK TABLE / TABLE UTILITY WITH SS TOP

1. It should have approximate size 1800 x 650 x 900 mm LxWxH

14
 2. The top will be of S.S. 304 grade, 16 SWG sheet

3. It will have one under shelf of S.S. 304; 18 SWG sheet

4. Legs frame will be of 40 x 40 mm square pipe, 16SWG

5. It will also have adjustable bullets for legs

6. The corners will be smooth rounded so that there are no sharp

edges

7. The welding will be with TIG argon arc, smooth finished and
polished with mat finish

5. TABLE TROLLEY WITH ONE UNDER SHELF

1. It should have approximate size 900 x 600 x 850 mm LxWxH

2. The top will be of S.S. 304 grade sheet 18 SWG

3. The top railing at 3 sides and bottom railing at 4 sides will be of

S.S. 304; 8 mm rod

4. It will have one undershelf of S.S. 304; 18 SWG

5. The legs will be of 25 x 25 mm S.S. 304 grade square pipe, 16 SWG

6. The welding will be of argon arc, smooth finished and polished

with mat finish

7. It will also have 5" size castor wheels (4 Nos.); swiveling type - 2
Nos. with brakes and 2 Nos. without brakes

6. GAUZE CUTTING MACHINE

1. Work width: 90cm to 240

2. 6 pairs of knives (Upper one is to crash the thread, Lower one is to

cut-off the thread, as a result there will be no outside threads on
the cutting area. In other words, the edge isclean)

3. Minimum Cutting Tolerance: 5cm.

4. Capacity: 70 to 120 meters per Minute (Speed Adjustable by

Frequency converter)

5. Pneumatic Air Shaft with Measuring Ruler for Winding.

7. LINEN FOLD TABLE

1. It should have approximate size 2000 x 800 x 900 mm LxWxH

15
 2. The top will be of S.S. 304 grade, 16 SWG sheet

3. Legs frame will be of 40 x 40 mm square pipe, 16SWG

4. It will also have adjustable bullets for legs

5. The corners will be smooth rounded so that there are no sharp

edges

6. The welding will be with TIG argon arc, smooth finished and
polished with mat finish

8. PREPARATION AND PACKING TABLE WITH 2 OVERHEAD SHELVES

AND 1 DRAWER

1. It should have approximate size 1800 x 800 x 900 mm LxWxH

2. The top will be of S.S. 304 grade sheet, 16 SWG

3. The legs will be of S.S. 304 square pipe, 40 x 40 mm; 16 SWG and
will also have nylon bullets for adjustment

4. The two overhead shelves as per industry standard with vertical

frame will be mounted on top of the table

5. There will be one drawer on the right hand side 360x400x200 mm

6. Telescopic channels will be provided for drawer

7. The welding will be with TIG Argon arc, fine polished and finally
with mat finish

9. CLOSED TRANSPORT TROLLEY WITH 2 DOOR SHUTTERS AND 3

COMPARTMENTS

1. It should have approximate size 850 x 750 x 1150 mm LxWxH

2. The complete trolley will be made of S.S. 304 grade, 18 SWG sheet

3. It will have 2 door shutters

4. The handle will be of S.S. 304; 1" pipe

5. Railing will be provided on top at three sides

6. The welding will be of argon arc with mat finish

7. It will also have 4" size castor wheels (4 Nos.); swiveling type - 2 Nos.
with brakes and 2 Nos. without brakes

16
10. INSTRUMENT TRAYS - PERFORATED TYPE WITH HANDLE

1. It should have approximate size 375 x 275 x 75 mm LxWxH

2. The trays will be made of S.S. 316 L grade perforated sheet, 18

SWG

3. It will be with 2 Nos. handle

4. All the joints will be TIG welded, seamless finish, fine polished and
finally finished with electro polish

11. PATIENT TRANSFER TROLLEY

1. Should have a Single sectional mattress base made of X-Ray

translucent high pressure laminate

2. Should have the facility to take X Rays from positions along the
entire length of the trolley and from almost all the entire width of
the trolley.

3. Mattress should be made of durable lectrolite material, should be

antistatic, and should be secured with self-adhesive straps.

4. Should have central braking system with steering facility.

5. It should have mannaul step less foot section adjustment.

6. Frame should be made up of epoxy coated.

7. Should have bumpers at all the four corners of the trolley.

8. Should have facility to fix IV rods at all the four corners and middle
of mattress base frame.

9. Should have place for fixing accessories.

10. Should have place for fixing ‘B’ Type Oxygen Cylinder.

11. Should be supplied with standard accessories such as

i. Anti static Hygienic Mattress (80mm) with pull straps, 01

pc

ii. Collapsible Side Rails, 01 pair

iii. I.V. Rod 02 pc

iv. Cylinder Holder for ‘B’ Type Oxygen Cylinder. 01 pc

12. Dimensions

17
 i. Max. Length : 2000-2100 mm

ii. Max. Width : 730-750 mm

iii. Height : 535 – 905 mm

12. BED SIDE LOCKER

1. Length- 444 - 405 mm, width 400 - 405mm. Height- 810 - 820 mm.
the outside diameter of the legs of the locker should be 25.4 mm
and thickness of 1.22 mm. Thickness of top should be 1 mm S.S
sheet of 20 G is bent: edge beaded and superimposed of M.S. top.

2. Top should be double pressed bent and neatly welded in grid at

four corners. It should be superimposed with press bent stainless
steel top. This top should have back and both sides bent upward
for acting as guardrail and the front side should be bent
downward. Top edge of the lockers should be bent and pressed to
180 degree to prevent sharp edge. Legs of the lockers are welded
to then top and the locker cabinet after holding legs right angle to
top and cabinet.

3. Cabinet-Top and sides- the top and sides of the cabinet should be
made from 1 piece of steel sheet. It should be welded with the back
and the bottom, which are also made from press bent sheets.

4. Doors- Door of the cabinets should be made from CRCA Sheet of 1

mm thickness press bent to required size. Door should be pivoted
to the cabinet at top and bottom, flushed with the front of the
cabinet when it is closed. Top and bottom of the pivots should be
acting as the hinges to allow door to swing to maximum to 120
degree.

5. Knob- the door should be riveted with chrome plated brass knob
which should have the latch carn, by turning knob the door can be
locked.

6. The material used should be as follows- Frame work of 25.4 mm

Dia x 1.22 mm thickness ERW steel tubes. Top should be made
from 1 mm thickness CRCA sheet conforming to IS- 513 –D
superimposed stainless steel top is of stainless steel conforming IS-
6911-1972. Shoes made from hard rubber of uniform texture and
chemically inactive to the action of mild acids. The normal height
of the shoe should be 40 mm . shoes should be reinforced with M.S
washers from inside at the time of moulding.

All components should be epoxy coated 50 micron

18
13. I.V. STAND

1. Overall approx. size : height :-136 to 244 cm (with adjustable

height)

2. Main Frame : Strong & Sturdy five legged neatly made base
mounted on five 2.5cm dia swiveling ball castors of good quality
S.S. double hocked I.V. rod & S.S. tube spring loaded.

14. OVER BED TABLE (HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE)

1. Size: Stainless Steel Top 760 mm L x 360 mm W50mm x 25mm

2. MS tubular telescopic stem with geared Stainless Steel handle for

height adjustment from 75 mm to 1050 mm.

3. MS rectangular tubular base is mounted on four castors of 50 mm

diameter.

4. Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate eight-tank

process for better finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection.

5. Process includes

i. Hot Degreasing,

ii. De rusting,

iii. Activation,

iv. Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as per IS 3618 - 1966

class ‘C’ type and then pretreated materials is coated with
epoxy powder with film thickness of 60 microns (approx.)
and then oven baked at 180 degree centigrade.

15. WHEEL CHAIR

1. Overall Width: 24” or 61cms

2. Foldable width: 11 ½” or 29.5cms

3. Width of Seat: 17 1/24” or 44cms

4. Depth of seat: 16” or 41cms

5. Height of seat from floor: 18” or 47cms

6. Overall length: 42” or 107cms

7. Dimensions +- ½” or 12mm

19
 8. Double ball bearings ensure smooth rolling swinging detachable
adjustable footrests positive lock toggle brakes.

9. Strong construction for convenient handling

10. Electro statically applied powder coating

16. REVOLVING STOOL (STAINLESS STEEL) WITH BACKREST

Overall Approx size:

1. Top 300 mm Dia with height adjustable 510mm to 710 mm

Construction:

2. Top should be made up of Stainless Steel & edges duly fold.

3. Base should be made up of five Horizontal supports of 25mm x 50

mm x 1mm thick rectangular tubes and the vertical members
should be made up of 50 mm Dia x 1.2 mm thick stainless steel
Tubes.

4. In the base square treated screw of 25 mm dia and nut should be

fitted.

5. The nut should have grease pocket to hold the grease.

6. The round Stainless Steel Top should be riveted on rin made up of

20mm x 3mm MS flat & the cross made up of 25 mm x 25mm
square tubes.

7. It should be fitted with stainless steel back support.

8. The ring made up of 12.5 mm dia Stainless Steel tube should be

fitted on the base to support the legs.

9. The stool should be fitted with heavy duty Rubber at the base.

17. MEDICINE TROLLEY

1. Overall approx. size: 960 mm (L) x 500 mm (W) x 1545

2. SS tubular frame.

3. Six coloured removable bins and two polystrene lockable storage

units with three drawers have each.

4. The top drawers have containers of different size.

5. Four swivel castors, 125 mm dia., two with brake

20
 6. Complete with corner buffers, powder coated oxygen cylinder
holder, SS IV rod and SS shelves.

18. INSTRUMENT TROLLEY

1. Constructed all from 18/10 stainless steel .

2. Frame from stainless steel tubes

3. Shelves are two (2) from 18/10 stainless steel

4. Mobile on four (4) castors , 10 cm diameter , electrically

conductive

5. Dimensions :

6. Table top 60 x 70 cm

7. Height 85 cm.

19. SINGLE STEP STOOL

280mm step height and size approx 460 mm L x 300 mm W MS tubular

construction with 18 g CRCA sheet. Step super imposed by aluminum chucked
plate & legs fitted with rubber feet.

Finish: All components should be pretreated in separate eight tank process for
better finish, good adhesion and corrosion protection. Process includes Hot
Degreasing, Derusting, Activation, Phosphating & No’s of Water rinses as per IS
3618 - 1966 class ‘C’ type and then pretreated materials is coated with epoxy
powder with film thickness of 60 microns (approx.) and then oven baked at 180
degree centigrade

21
 EQUIPMENT CSSD-2

1. Equipment Specifications for Washer Disinfectors (Medium

Capacity)
1. Description of Function

1.1 Washer/decontaminators are designed to clean instruments and

utensils by removing blood, bone, fat, and other organic debris that can
adhere to crevices, providing a substrate for growth of microorganisms

2. Operational Requirements

2.1 Medium capacity washer disinfector with minimal floor space is

required for CSSD, OT, ICU or Wards

3. Technical Specifications

3.1 Thermo disinfection should achieved by the temperature of up to

93°C and maintaining it for a designed period of time & temperature
which can be modified according to the special need and standards.

3.2 Should equip with two dosing pump of chemical / detergent products
under a complete micro-processor control. Dosage of liquid detergent
should be carried out automatically by means of a pump and can
easily be regulated for agents with varying concentration

3.3 The construction of the body should be high quality polished

Stainless Steel AIAI 304 and the internal chamber should be made up
of acidresistant AISI 316 stainless steel,

3.4 Chamber volume should be more than 100 liters

3.5 The hot and cold water connections should have check valves, back
valves, mud filters and siphonage protection. The Machine should
have its own integrated water heater so that the machine can
function properly in absence of external warm water source

3.6 Water should be taken into the chamber directly to avoid separate
cleaning and disinfection of integrated water tanks.

3.7 High efficiency dryer with filter and pre filter.

3.8 Should have at least three factory preset programs and at least two
user selectable programs. The program should be available for
selection at the touch of a button.

22
 3.9 Control panel should have LED/LCD indications for cycle selection ,
phase indication ,remaining program time indication ,cycle complete
indication, digital temperature reading, and fault indications.

3.10 Should not occupy more than 1 sq meter of floor space.

3.11 Should be provided with minimum 3 rotating wash arms with

removable caps facilitating easy cleaning of the inner surfaces of the
wash arm. Wash arms can be removed without any tools

4. System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables

4.1 System as specified

4.2 Accessories to be quoted separately and will be addes for evaluation

and will be frozen for future additional purchases.

1. Sterilization Basket of app 45 liters capacity.-01

2. Rack for Anesthesia instruments with drying-01

3. Mis instrument & Ophthalmology basket with

approximately 100 liters,60 liters and 30 liters sizes with lid-
03( 1 of each size with Lid)

4. Rubber shoe Rack for 25-30 shoes-01

5. Laboratory sector basket with height 150 and 210 mm

-02( 1 of each size)

6. Dividers in 4 different sizes- 04( 01 in each size)

7. Narrowmesh internal basket of app 70, 35 and 15

liters.with LID -03( 01 of each size with Lid)

8. Independently removable, sliding wash shelves- 04

5. Environmental factors

5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient

temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient

temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6. Power Supply

6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC(Single Phase),/400-440 V (3

Phase)/ 50Hz as appropriate fitted with Indian plug

7. Standards, Safety and Training

23
 7.1 Should be compliant to ISO 13485: Quality systems - Medical devices -
Particular requirements for the application of ISO 9001 applicable to
manufacturers and service providers that perform their own design
activities.

7.2 Shall be certified to be meeting the Electrical Safety requirements

stated in IEC 61010-2-45: Particular requirements for washer
disinfectors used in medical, pharmaceutical, veterinary and
laboratory fields.

7.3 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after warranty

8. Documentation

8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.

8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.

8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine

maintenance support as per manufacturer documentation in service
/ technical manual.

8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.

8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.

8.6 User list to be provided with performance certificate .

24
2. Equipment Specifications for Washer Disinfectors (High
Capacity)

1. Description of Function

1.1 Washer/decontaminators are designed to clean instruments and utensils

by removing blood, bone, fat, and other organic debris that can adhere to
crevices, providing a substrate for growth of microorganisms

2. Operational Requirements

2.1 High capacity washer disinfector with minimal floor space is required
for CSSD.

3. Technical Specifications

3.1 Thermo disinfection should achieved by the temperature of up to 93°C

and maintaining it for a designed period of time & temperature which
can be modified according to the special need and standards.

3.2 Should equip with two dosing pump of chemical / detergent products
under a complete micro-processor control. Dosage of liquid detergent
should be carried out automatically by means of a pump and can easily
be regulated for agents with varying concentration

3.3 The construction of the body should be high quality polished Stainless
Steel AIAI 304 and the internal chamber should be made up of acid-
resistant AISI 316 stainless steel,

3.5 The hot and cold water connections should have check valves, back
valves, mud filters and siphonage protection.

3.6 Water should be taken into the chamber directly to avoid separate
cleaning and disinfection of integrated water tanks.

3.7 High efficiency dryer with a pre-filter and a HEPA filter Class H13/14

3.8 System should provide for setting up practically an unlimited number

of user programs. There should be at least 10 listed programs in line
with proven requirements of items. The programs should be available
for selection at the touch of a button

3.9 TFT / LCD Touch-screen colour control panel and information display
cycle selection , phase indication as text,remaining program time
indication ,cycle complete indication as text and with a green led,
pressure graph,temperature graph,fault indication

3.10 Multi-level access code system with Special codes for: user,
maintenance, authorized person should be there.

25
 3.11 Integrated printer

3.12 Should be able to insert and download User identification and load
tracking data can into full tracking data systems by a bar code reader.

3.13 Should be able to review the operation online, download the process
data into server or PC by using a Flash Memory Card, or a direct
Ethernet line.

3.14 Should not occupy more than 1 sq meter of floor space.

3.15 Should have separate connections for Cold, Warm and Demineralized
water. The Machine should have its own integrated water heater so
that the machine can function properly in absence of external warm
water source

3.16 Should have rails to accomodate up to eight racks for different types of
loads.

3.17 Miscelaneous instruments basket in three sizes- app 100, 60 and

30 liters( 1 each)

3.18 Should be provided with 5 rotating wash arms with removable caps
facilitating easy cleaning of the inner surfaces of the wash arm. Wash
arms can be removed without any tools.

3.19 Should have at least three factory preset programs and at least two
user selectable programs. The program should be available for
selection at the touch of a button.

4. System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables

4.1 System as specified.

4.2 Accessories to be quoted separately and will be addes for evaluation

and will be frozen for future additional purchases.

1. Sterilization Basket of app 45 liters capacity.-01

2. Rack for Anesthesia instruments with drying-01

3. Mis instrument & Ophthalmology basket with approximately

100 liters,60 liters and 30 liters sizes with lid- 03( 1 of each
size with Lid)

4. Rubber shoe Rack for 25-30 shoes-01

5. Laboratory sector basket with height 150 and 210 mm -02( 1 of

each size)

6. Dividers in 4 different sizes- 04( 01 in each size)

26
 7. Narrowmesh internal basket of app 70, 35 and 15 liters.with
LID -03( 01 of each size with Lid)

8. Independently removable, sliding wash shelves- 04

5. Environmental factors

5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient

temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient

temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6. Power Supply

6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC(Single Phase),/400-440 V (3 Phase)/

50Hz as appropriate fitted with Indian plug

7. Standards, Safety and Training

7.1 Should be certified to be meeting Standard performance and design

requirements stated in ISO/DIS 15883-1 Washer-disinfectors - Part 1:
General requirements and in Part 2: Requirements and tests for
surgical instruments, anaesthetic and respiratory equipment,
hollowware, utensils,glassware etc.,

7.2 Shall be certified to be meeting the Electrical Safety requirements

stated in IEC 61010-2-45: Particular requirements for washer
disinfectors used in medical, pharmaceutical, veterinary and laboratory
fields.

7.3 Should be equipped with the highest level - Class C -independent, full
process verification recording system.The critical process values i.e.
temperatures,times, pressures, detergent dosage time, flow & volume,
errors,as well as descriptive cycledata can be independently recorded
by three different means for Quality Assurance System.

7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after

warranty

8. Documentation

8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.

8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.

8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine

Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation
in service/technical manual.

8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number
and costing.

27
 8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

8.6 User list to be provided with performance certificate .

3. Automatic Steam Steriliser

1 1. Rectangular, horizontal, double door, high pressure, high vacuum

fully automatic and microprocessor based autoclave for sterilizing
hospital materials.

2 2. Double, Jacket Autoclave with latest Product Specific Quality

Certification- IS 1/1 International.

3 3. Electrically operated in built compatible electric steam generator

with the unit.

4 4. Temperature adjustable from 121° to 134°C

5 5. Working pressure range from 15 to 32 psi

6. Sterilization cycles: The autoclave residence time should not be les than 60
minutes if the autoclave operates at the working temperature (inner
chamber) of 121°C at a pressure of 15 pounds per square inch (psi) and
should be adjustable as per standards at different temperature and
pressure.

6 7. Capacity: Sterilization capacity should be 30-36 cu ft/cycle.

8. Autoclave should be properly equipped with door safety locks, steam traps,
pressure gauges and safety valves for chamber and jacket.

9. Autoclave should have insulation jacket with glass wool, covered with
aluminum foil.

10. The unit should have integral alarms that ring, flash, or otherwise display
information when temperature set-points are exceeded or fall below.

11. Pressure safety valve, over-temperature limiter, anti-scorch limiter, door

(lid) interlock, overpressure limiter, current fuse.

12. The unit includes a data logger or chart recorder for monitoring operational
history.

13. Integral controls, keypad, and/or display on the panel of the unit. The
control panel must document all cycle information including key transition
points in the cycle, alarms and deviations that may jeopardize the
sterilization process, resulting in inadequate sterilization.

28
 14. The Sterilizer should be supported on a steel stand, appropriately, coated
for corrosion protection.

15. Boiler 36 KW (Certified by competent authority in case required), fitted

with appropriate safety features and having protective cover should be
provided.

16. Electric vacuum pump of appropriate power should be provided.

17. Carriage trolley with at least three SS trays and roller shelves.

18. The firm should provide all piping connections made up of SS required in
the installation and should install the machine at the identified site in the
Hospital.

4. Flash Sterilizer

1. It shall guarantee express sterilization of instruments for Operation

Theatre at 140 degree centigrade for 7 minutes.

2. Chamber capacity shall be 40 Litres.

3. Chamber temperature shall be 140 Degree Centigrade

4. Chamber shall be fabricated from stainless steel 304 with high quality
argon welding.

5. It will have stainless steel 316L racks for easy loading & unloading

6. It will have high vacuum ejector to ensure effective air removal for
excellent steam penetration & efficient post sterilization drying.

7. It shall have inbuilt steam generator fabricated from high quality

stainless steel with water feeding & pressure control

8. Process Interlock as a safety feature to avoid opening of the door when

the process is on

9. Provision of alarm if the door is open during the process.

10. There should be alarm when the water in the chamber is low & there
should be process cut off facility when this happens.

11. Equipment shall be microprocessor based automatic system from add

water to sterilization & dry cycle.

12. Material of construction shall be Stainless steel S.S 304.

13. System shall have attached thermal printer

14. It will have safety features like temperature control, Overheat

protection, Safety valve, Electronic Circuit safety system, Low water

29
 indicator, Sterilization complete indicator, Emergency Exhaust Switch,
Automatic preheating programme.

5. ETO Steriliser
1. The ETO sterilizer should be of 8 Cubic Feet Capacity.
2. The system should work with 100% ETO .
3. ETO Gas should be provided in Cartridges clearly marked “100% ETO”
and should be approved by ‘EPA’, ‘FDA’ and OSHA for safety and quality.
4. Shall be Microprocessor controlled with Digital Printer.
5. Microcomputer shall monitor & control system operations & functions.
6. Sterilizer Should Have A Built In Aerator.
7. Machine should operate at a negative Pressure (of At least Upto
200mm Of Hg) during Operation.
8. Machine Should Operate at Dual Temperature at 37oC and 55oC.
9. Should Operate In 3 Phase: Pre-Conditioning, Exposure, and Aeration.
10. Total Sterilization Cycle Time Not To Exceed 5.75 Hrs for Warm Cycle
And 7.75 Hrs for A Cool Cycle.
11. Should Be Provided With An alphanumeric display and Graphical
Printer.
12. The system should have a soft touch buttons for operations and
programming, flushed to the surface of the system and not rotating
knobs.
13. Video Screen Display to Check Cycle Status.
14. Continuous RH Display on Screen for Humidity level inside the chamber.
15. Built In Local Exhaust For Removal Of Residual ETO.
16. System should have a self-diagnosis for errors.
17. Compressor should be included in case there is no provision for
Compressed Air Line for the equipment.
18. Standard international safety measure such as locking of door (cannot
be opened during operation either by accident or intend by un-
authorized personnel) for occupational and Fire hazards.
19. An independent body should certify system for compliance with
OSHA Regulation for Safety.
20. Installation to include complete Copper Ducting from the CSSD to the
Hospital Building Terrance and to be left 10 Feet beyond in
Atmosphere.
21. The tender has to guarantee supply of GAS at least for a period of
10years. Certificate from at least 20 existing users required for
satisfactory usage and supply of gas.

30
 22. Detailed cost of consumables, such as gas, indicators, sterilization bags,
or any other such items required need to specify clearly.

6. Ultra Sonic Cleaner

1. Construction: External AISI 304 stainless steel and Internal AISI 304 or
AISI 316Ti (20/10)

2. Tank capacity: usable volume of approximately 40 liters. Should allows

fitting of instruments up to 600 mm of length.

3. It should have a large stainless steel basket with 6 rubber outlets, to

connect tubing of any diameter and plastic stands to hold the
instruments.

4. Should have minimum eight ultrasonic transducers with operating

frequency from 28-34 KHz placed underneath the tank for an optimum
spread of ultrasonic across the whole tank volume, for a effective
cleaning of all the instruments in short times

5. Should have minimum eight washing programs, each selectable by a

pushbutton, that can be used to wash canulated instruments and non
canulatde instruments at the same time. 6) Should have Pause
facility for washing programs.

6. Should provide for Water load, water drain and water leveling
operations.

7. RS232 printer output with Printer to keep record of performed washing

cycles

8. Should have alarm and safety features for water level control, cover
closure control, water temperature control, sensor failure control.

9. Cleaning programs parameters should be adjustable as per following::

i. Time : from 1 to 99 minutes

ii. Heating: from 20 deg C to 50 deg C

iii. Water flow: off, linear, pulsed, mixed

iv. Time parameters according to the selected type of flow

10. Automatic water drain after selected number of cycles (from 1 to 99) or
function excluded.

11. The control panel should have the following::

i. LCD alphanumerical display 4 rows x 20 columns

31
 ii. 16 keys control keyboard

iii. Water level (min, max, over) and cover closure light indicators

12. Should be able to work on 230V/50 Hz Electric Power Supply

13. Should be provided with transparent Lid/cover.

7. Drying Cabinet

1 1. Chamber volume approximately 600 litres-1000 litre

0 2. Sound and heat insulated double walls of the cabinet should made of
AIS304 stainless steel.

0 3. Single left hinged door.

2 4. There should be a microprocessor controlled panel. The system should

provide three programs with varying duration with upto five program
stations.

0 5. Should provide for temperature adjustment up to +90 deg C and time

regulation 1to 99 mins or continuous.

1 6. The panel should have Integrated digital thermometer and phase

indicators and program start switch with autometer end after
particular fixes time by operator and CD displayed.

0 7. Power supply- Should operate on three phase supply 400v,3N, 16A

3 8. Heating effect should be greater than 5 KW

4 9. Air discharge volume should be more than 25 Litres per minute.

5 10. System should be complete with high quality air filter, ventilation
connection sleeve,

0 11. Should be vertical system and should occupy not more than 1 sq. meter
of floor space.

1 12. Should have adjustable feet for uneven surfaces.

6 13. Rails to support upto eight wire shelves.

7 14. The following accessories should be supplied with the system:

0 i. 5removable wire shelves.
1 ii. Holder shelf for app 30 long anesthesia hoses
2 iii. 2 hose cassettes for 6+6 hoses

2 15. Price for additional wire shelf for future should be made available.

32
8. Sealing Machine: Plain Sealer
1 1. Smooth easy cleaning surfaces
0 2. Ergonomic handling with anti fatigue movement 3.
1 3. Should have automatic sealing indicator
2 4. Quick sealing time with sealing width of 12mm
3 5. Should be microprocessor controlled and with constant temperature 6.
4 6. Should be provided with roll stand
0 7. It should be a table top system
5 8. Should work on 230V, 50 Hz electric power supply.
6 9. Compact system with app 50cm x 20cm x 40cm (±2cm)

9. Horizontal high pressure steam sterilizer 20”x48” machine

works on the principal of downward displacement of air the most economical

method of obtaining perfect sterilization all the joints are duly argon arc welded which
is leak proof unlinked riveted construction operation is by direct steam heating or
electrically the door of our machine is fitted with a self anti locking safety device which
does not allow the door to open when the chamber is under pressure when the chamber
pressure reaches a safety level door can be open the unit will be mounted on elegantly
painted tubular stand

Description chamber jacket, cover, end ring, door, water tank, heater plate & ring, of
316 quality SS sheet made of SS all pipes joints & valve made of SS/brass working
pressure 34psi working temperature 131deg C. hydraulic test 440V, 3 phase, AC supply,
50 cycle. operating voltage electrical load 18Kw/36KW , sterilization period, 6 to
8minute

33
 EQUIPMENT ENDO N LAPRO -3
1. Equipment Specifications for Video Thoracoscope
1 Description of Function
1.1 A Thoracoscope is a thin, tube-like rigid endoscope instrument
with a light and a lens for viewing.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Thoracoscope with video processing and monitoring is required
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 SPECS OF SCOPE:
1. Direction of view should be zero degree.
2. Minimum of 100 degree (app) of field of view.
3. Range of observation from 5 mm to 90 mm.(app)
4. Angulations of tip not less than 200 deg(Up) and 90 deg
(down)with right to left movement of minimum 100 deg.
(app)
5. Insertion tube outer diameter of less than 8 mm with a
working length of not less than 250 mms.
6. Distal end of less than 8 mm.
7. Instrument channel of more than 2.5 mm
8. Compatible with the video system specified.
3.2 Video processor with light source & Monitor
1. Power supply 200-240 V A/C
2. PAL type video signal. The camera should be 3 chips CCD
with high definition (HD) Output with provision of
recording on hard disk, mini DV: disk or tape.
3. Controls for color adjustment, to enhancement and
balance settings.
4. Controls to freeze images enhance a portion of frozen image
(zoom & post-processing).
5. Patient and physician data input keyboard.
6. Operates on Xenon lamp.
7. Emergency lamp.
8. Compatibility with the gastro scope and colonoscope
duodenoscope and Enteroscope
9. 19” LCD color monitor with XGA resolution.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 1. Rod lens Telescope 0 degree 10mm , Length 31 cm
2. Rod Lens Telescope 30 degree 10mm, Length 31 cm
3. Trocar 6mm with blunt tip flexible cannula and silicone
leaflet valve
4. Trocar 9mm with blunt tip flexible cannula and silicone
leaflet valve
5. Trocar size 11mm with blunt tip flexible cannula and
silicone leaflet valve
6. Trocar size 11mm with blunt tip cannula with thread
7. Manhes dissecting and grasping forceps size 5mm
8. Kelly dissecting and grasping forceps size 5mm

34
 9. Babcock grasping forceps size 5mm
10. Bowel grasper rotating 5mm
11. Scissors rotating with connector pin, spoon blades, double
actionjaw, size 5mm
12. Scissors rotating serrated, curved, conical and double action
jaw size 5mm
13. Micro hook scissors and single action jaw, size 5mm
14. Scissors dismantling rotating serrated, single action jaws
bayonet shaped size 5mm
15. Needle driver Parrat-Jaw straight handle with ratchet
length 33 cm
16. Assistant Needle driver Flamingo Jaw straight handle length
33 cm
17. Manhaes grasping forceps rotating size 5mm atraumatic
single action jaws
18. Suction & irrigation with two way stop cock
19. Bipolar & Monopolar high frequency cord with 5mm plug
20. 3 Chips Camera PAL having Digital Imaging Processor
21. Cold Light fountain Xenon 175 power supply 100-125 /
220-240VAC, 50/60 Hz complete
22. TFT Monitor PAL 19”(inch) maximum resolution
1280x1024
23. Video Cart
24. Fiber Optic cable
25. 0 degree, 30 degree & 60 degree upward & downward
angulated Rongeur forceps 33 cm shaft.
26. 90 degree & 45 degree punch with 30 cm shaft.
27. Clip Applicator 5 mm & 10 mm.
28. Fan Retractor.
29. Endo GI stapler for stapling Bronchi & Vessels.
30. Needle Holder 5 mm & 33 cm long.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA, CE, UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Shall be certified to be meeting safety standard IEC 60601-2-18
part 2 Particular requirements for the safety of endoscopic
equipment.
7.3 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality
Standard.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty

35
 8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
maintenance support as per manufacturer documentation in
service / technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.

2. Equipment Specifications for HOLMIUM LASER GENERATOR

1 Description of Function
1.1 The laser should be capable for use in soft tissue vaporization and
resection, like procedures such as Prostate vaporization and
prostate resection (enucleation
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The laser should also be useful in treatment of Bladder Tumor,
Urethral Strictures or any other soft tissue application
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Laser Type: Solid State Laser System
3.2 Wavelength: 2.0 – 2.25 μm
3.3 Power to tissue: Adjustable upto 80 Watts
3.4 Pilot Beam: To guide the laser
3.5 Beam transmission: Flexible Fibers for use in resection
Vaporization: To pass through Ureteroscopes / Resectoscopes
3.6 Control panel: LCD-display with display of parameters
3.7 Selected and simultaneous display of energy delivered for each
procedure
3.8 Cooling system: Internal closed circuit refrigerant cooling system
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 ACCESSORIES: Side Firing Fibers (for Vaporisation) – 10 Nos.
Resterilisable End Firing Fibers (For soft tissueresection) – 10 Nos.
Fiber Stripper for End Fire Fiber – 1 No.
Fiber Cutter, for all fibers – 1 No.
Laser Safety Glasses & Goggles – 3 Nos. each
Foot Switch
4.2 Following should also be quoted as standard accessory
1. Laser Prostate Resectoscope set including
Outer Sheath- 27 Fr, with 2 Stop Cocks
Resection Sheath- 24 Fr, for the above outer sheath
Telescope – 1 No. With 30 deg direction of view
Visual Obturator – 1 no.
Working Element for Laser probes – 1 No.
2. Tissue Morcellator

36
 Electro Mechanical tissue morcellator with changeable
blades for use in morcellation and removal of tissue
postprostate enucleation. Should include morcelloscope
complete set, control box, handpiece, 2 sets of blades,
suction device and cleaning brushes.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0-50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 Thu unit shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature of
20-30 deg C and relative humidity of less than 70%
5.3 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240 VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Resettable overcurrent breaker shall be fitted for protection
6.3 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI
Specifications.( Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)
6.4 Suitable UPS with maintenance free batteries for minimum one-
hour backup should be supplied with the system.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality
Standard.
7.2 Should be compliant with IEC 61010-1:(or any international
equivalent eg EN/UL 61010) covering safety requirements for
electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use
7.3 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.4 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
7.5 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
maintenance support as per manufacturer documentation in
service / technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.
8.6 Compliance Report to be submitted in a tabulated and point wise
manner clearly mentioning the page/para number of original
catalogue/data sheet. Any point ,if not substantiated with
authenticated catalogue/manual, will not be considered.

37
3. Equipment Specifications for ULTRASONIC ASPIRATOR
1 Description of Function
1.1 Ultrasonic aspirators use mechanical ultrasonic vibration and an
irrigation/suction system to fragment and remove soft tissue and
high-watercontent growths from various parts of the body.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The system should be quoted with the paediatric as well as adult
handpieces.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Surgical aspirator should be based on magneto-restriction or
piezoelectric technology.
3.2 The hand piece must be cool if required to prevent overheating by
coaxial flow of water.
3.3 The hand pieces should be autoclavable and without need to
dismantle for autoclaving.
3.4 The vacuum pump should provide preferable the suction of >
600mm of Hg.
3.5 It should incorporate an Electro-surgical unit fitted on ultrasonic
hand piece for coagultion and cutting function.
3.6 The console unit should house control panel storage for
footswitch, electrical cords and self-contained suction apparatus.
3.7 The unit should include all necessary control preferably color-
coded, which may include amplitude, irrigation, aspiration and
tissue select mode.
3.8 It should have safety features like optical signal for failed hand
pieces and signal for failed unit.
3.9 It should have on and off button.
3.10 It should have integral suction with vacuum pressure of-20 to -90
Kpa. in continuous low noise and digital display.
3.11 It should preferably have 2 liter capacity container of unbreakable
material with level sensor and anti-overflow system.
3.12 Hand piece should be light, preferable 20 KHz and amplitude
should be >130 micrometers
3.13 The hand piece should be able to accommodate selection of tips for
wide range of applications. It should have inbuilt water cooling
system &also should be able to differentiate tissue barriers with
tactile feedback. It should be sterilizable by autoclave and ethylene
oxide. Both curved & straight hand piece should be available.
3.14 The internal diameter of tips should range form 1.0 to 2.0mm.
3.15 The irrigation pump should be inbuilt in the unit, the irrigation
output 0- 65ml/min.
3.16 All hand-pieces/ instruments should be detachable.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 ACCESSORIES:
1. Trolley with suction canister.
2. Ultrasonic probe-curved, 2 each of variable length with
extra laproscopic probes 23 KHz and 35 KHz.
3. Assembly kit for aspirator- 1

38
 4. Aspirator with 2 liters suction bottle with disposable
secretion bag-1
5. Infusion bottle holder-1
6. Double foot switch-1
7. Cleaning brush for instrument lumen-2
8. Instrument connection cables- 2
9. Suction / irrigation tubing (5meter each), silicon twin tube-
2.
10. Double set of cable and tubing clips- 10sets.
11. Metal puncture tube - 2
12. Sterilizing cassette with silicon mat and textile filter-2.
4.2 CONSUMABLES:
1. Textile filters for sterilizing cassette-10 pieces.
2. Suction/ Irrigation tubing (5 meter each) - 10 pieces.
3. Cable and tube clips - 5X 10 pieces.
4. Suction and Irrigation tubing, silicon twin tube (4.5 meters
each) – 5 pieces
5. Disposable secretion bags 2 liters- 2 pieces.
6. Connection nipple, suction tube / secretion reservoir - 5
pieces.
7. Internal flushing tube - 5 pieces.
8. Protective cover-4 pieces.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0-50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 Thu unit shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature of
20-30 deg C and relative humidity of less than 70%
5.3 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240 VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Resettable overcurrent breaker shall be fitted for protection
6.3 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI
Specifications.( Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50Hz)
6.4 Suitable UPS with maintenance free batteries for minimum one-
hour backup should be supplied with the system.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality
Standard.
7.2 Should be compliant with IEC 61010-1:(or any international
equivalent eg EN/UL 61010) covering safety requirements for
electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use
7.3 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.4 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
7.5 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
8 Documentation

39
 8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
maintenance support as per manufacturer documentation in
service / technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.
8.6 Compliance Report to be submitted in a tabulated and point wise
manner clearly mentioning the page/para number of original
catalogue/data sheet.Any point ,if not substantiated with
authenticated catalogue/manual, will not be considered.

4. Specifications for High Definition Laparoscopy System High

Definition Three Chip Camera System
1. Camera console 220 v with universal coupler & Autoclavable
camera head
2. Pure Digital signal with high definition video(1280*1024 native
resolution)
3. Resolution-2000 horizontal lines
4. 8 specialty settings
5. Integrated Flexible Scope filter
6. Signal to Noise ratio-70 db
7. Progressive scan technology both on camera head & console
8. Brightness Control on console & camera head
9. Aperture Control on console
10. Inbuilt 16 step digital Image Enhancer on console
11. Digital zoom & white balance on camera head
12. Integrated Gain/shutter/Enhancement with brightness control
13. Two peripheral control on camera head
Video Output
1. 2 DVI output
2. 2 SVHS & 1 RGB out put
3. One Composite out put
Automatic Light source
1. 220 V,300 W. Xenon Bulb(with one spare bulb)
2. Elliptical Bulb technology
3. Bulb Working life 5800hrs
4. Digital Bulb life counter on light source
5. Automatic /Manual Light Adjustment
6. Stand By Mode
7. Universal Jaw Assembly to adapt any make of fiber optic cable
without adapter.
Fiber optic Cable
6.5mm*7.5 feet Snap Fit cable

40
Monitor
19’’ Flat Panel Monitor Colour
Insufflator
40Liter of high flow
Microprocessor controlled unit
Soft Approach Pressure control for safe recovery of abdominal pressure
Gas heating
LCD based central display monitor with multilingual text & graphics AV
warning signal
Laparoscopes, Fully Autoclavable with working length 300mm
Wide angled distortion free view
Universal adaptor for other light sources
Yellow Glass index for optimum evenness of focus & contrast
0 degree, 10mm
30 degree, 10 mm
0 degree , 5mm
Flexible video telescope
Specifications
Laparoscopic hand instruments (reusable) with 310mm working length,
take apart locking / unlocking mechanism, rotable with interchangeable
handle with monoploar diathermy attachment ( Except trocars and veress
needle)
Vass needle 12 cm length
Varss needle 15 cm length
Carbon-di-oxide gas tubing
Trocars sleeves 11 mm
Reducer 11/5 mm44442
Trocars sleeves 5.5 mm 4
Trocars (pyramidal tip) 10 mm 4
Trocars (pyramidal tip) 5 mm 4
Trocars washer 5 mm 100
Trocars washer mm 50
Laproscopic biopsy forceps 5 mm,
Maryland dissector 5mm with unipolar diathermy22
Maryland dissector 5mm, high performance with bipolarcutting2
Atraumatic graspers, 5mm 2
Metzenbaum scissors (5cm) with unipolar diathermy
Metzenbaum scissors (5cm) high performance with bipolarcutting22
Fan retractors 5 mm 2
Laproscopic cautery lead 4
Suction irrigation device with two way valve 2
L shaped hook electrode 5mm
L shaped hook 5mm , high performance with bipolar cutting2
Laproscopic bowel grasper 5mm, length 33-36 cm
Laproscopic spoon forceps 10mm length 33- 36 cm22
Needle holder 5mm, 33 cm long 4
Laproscopic suction cannuala, 10 mm
Laparoscopic suction cannula 5 mm22
Clip applicator 10 mm Large, Medium, Small Clips

41
 Gall bladder extraction 5mm Large, Medium, Small Clips
Hassan cannula
Lap Eondotrainer
Port closure needle
Sterilization tray with cover 3 x 1

5. Equipment Specifications for Video Enteroscope (Single balloon)

1 Description of Function
1.1 Single-Balloon Endoscopy System allows ease of insertion and
makes not only diagnosis but also treatment of the entire small
intestine a reality.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Enteroscope should be compatible with the commonly used light
sources.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Direction of View : Forward
Observation Range app: 6~100mm
Field of View min 140 Degrees
Specifications enteroscope:
Distal End Diameter app: 9.5 mm
Flexible Portion Diameter app: 9.2 mm
Bending Capability (Up/Down) 180 Degrees / 180 Degrees
Bending Capability (Left/Right) at least 150 Degrees / 150
Degrees
Forceps Channel Diameter more than 2.5mm
Working Length not less than 2,000mm
Video output to be compatible with the video processor specified.
3.2 Video processor with light source & Monitor
1. Power supply 200-240 V A/C
2. PAL type video signal.
3. Controls for color adjustment, to enhancement and balance
settings.
4. Controls to freeze images, enhance a portion of frozen
image (zoom & post-processing).
5. Patient and physician data input key board..
6. Operates on Xenon lamp.
7. Emergency lamp.
8. Compatibility with the gastro scope and colonoscope
duodenoscopE and Enteroscope
9. 15” LCD colour monitor with XGA resolution.
3.3 Over-tube Specifications :
Outer Diameter app:13.2mm
Inner Diameter app:10.8mm
Distal End Diameter app: 9.8mm
Outer Diameter (Balloon) : 40mm
Working Length app:1,350mm
3.4 Balloon Pump Controller with Remote Switch Specifications
Set Pressure of Balloon app : 5.5kpa+/-2kpa

42
 Maximum Flow Rate of Pump :app: 170ml/10sec
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 1. Biopsy forceps :3 each
2. Foreign body grasper (basket type) 2
3. Polypectomy snare:2
4. Standard tip canula:2 types – 10 ea
5. Sphincterotome for side viewing duodenoscope only (wire
guided, triple lumen) – 10
6. Mechanical lithotripter :5
7. Polypectomy cautery system :1
8. Guide wires 2 types ( 0.025 “F, 0.035 “ in diameterF); length
450 cm, nonkinkable with stripes to detect movement – 5
9. Basket for retieving stones with memory filaments – 5
10. Balloons 11mm diameter and wire guided – 5
11. Single pigtail stents – 7 cm, 10 cm long; 7 F and 10 F
diameter – each 10
12. Stents – straight 7 F and 10F; 7 cm and 10 cm long – each
10 in number
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Shall be certified to be meeting safety standard IEC 60601-2-18
part 2 Particular requirements for the safety of endoscopic
equipment.
7.2 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.3 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.
8.6 User list to be provided with performance certificate.

43
6. Equipment Specifications for Video Enteroscope (Double
balloon)
1 Description of Function
1.1 Double-Balloon Endoscopy System allows ease of insertion and
makes not only diagnosis but also treatment of the entire small
intestine a reality.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Enteroscope should be compatible with the commonly used
light sources.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Direction of View: Forward Observation Range app: 6~100mm
Field of View min 140 Degrees Specifications Enteroscope: Distal
End Diameter app: 9.5 mm Flexible Portion Diameter app: 9.2 mm
Bending Capability (Up/Down) 180 Degrees / 180 Degrees
Bending Capability (Left/Right) at least 150 Degrees / 150
Degrees Forceps Channel Diameter more than 2.5mm
Working Length not less than 2,000mm Video output to be
compatible with the video processor specified.
3.2 Video processor with light source & Monitor
1. Power supply 200-240 V A/C
2. PAL type video signal.
3. Controls for color adjustment, to enhancement and balance
settings.
4. Controls to freeze images, enhance a portion of frozen
image (zoom &post-processing).
5. Patient and physician data input key board..
6. Operates on Xenon lamp.
7. Emergency lamp.
8. Compatibility with the gastro scope and colonoscope
duodenoscopE and Enteroscope
9. 15” LCD colour monitor with XGA resolution.
3.3 Over-tube Specifications :
Outer Diameter app:13.2mm
Inner Diameter app:10.8mm
Distal End Diameter app: 9.8mm
Outer Diameter (Balloon) : 40mm
Working Length app:1,350mm
3.4 Balloon Pump Controller with Remote Switch Specifications
Set Pressure of Balloon app : 5.5kpa+/-2kpa
Maximum Flow Rate of Pump :app: 170ml/10sec
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 1. Biopsy forceps :3 each
2. Foreign body grasper (basket type) 2
3. Polypectomy snare:2
4. Standard tip canula:2 types – 10 ea
5. Sphincterotome for side viewing duodenoscope only (wire
guided, triple lumen) – 10

44
 6. Mechanical lithotripter :5
7. Polypectomy cautery system :1
8. Guide wires 2 types ( 0.025 “F, 0.035 “F in diameter); length
450 cm, nonkinkable
with stripes to detect movement – 5
9. Basket for retieving stones with memory filaments – 5
10. Balloons 11mm diameter and wire guided – 5
11. Double pigtail stents – 7 cm, 10 cm long; 7 F and 10 F
diameter – each 10
12. Stents – straight 7 F and 10F; 7 cm and 10 cm long – each
10 in number
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Shall be certified to be meeting safety standard IEC 60601-2-18
part 2 Particular requirements for the safety of endoscopic
equipment.
7.2 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.3 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.
8.6 User list to be provided with performance certificate.

7. Equipment Specifications for VideoEndoscopy Complete

System
1 Description of Function
1.1 The ERCP scope is a flexible tube, approximately the size of a
finger. It contains a lens and a light source that allows the
endoscopist to view images on a monitor where it is magnified

45
 many times so the endoscopist can see small changes in the
tissues.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The ERCP scope should also contains channels that allow the
endoscopist to take biopsies and introduce or withdraw fluid, air
and instruments and should be supplied with all accessories.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Upper GI Scope (Adult )
1. Direction of view should be zero degree.
2. Minimum of 130 degree of field of view.
3. Range of observation atleast from 5 mm to 90 mm.
4. Angulations of tip up at least 180 degrees and down 90
degrees with right and left movement of at least 100/100
degrees.
5. Insertion tube diameter of less than 10 mm .
6. Distal end diameter of not more than 10.5 mm
7. Instrument channel of more than 2.5 mm
8. Working length of not less than 1000mm
9. Should be compatible with the video system specified
3.2 Upper GI Scope(Pediatrics)
1. Direction of view should be zero degree.
2. Minimum of 130 degree of field of view.
3. Range of observation atleast from 5 mm to 90 mm.
4. Angulations of tip up at least 180 degrees and down 90
degrees with right and left movement of at least 100/100
degrees.
5. Insertion tube diameter of less than 10 mm .
6. Distal end diameter of not more than 10.5 mm
7. Instrument channel of more than 2.5 mm
8. Working length of not less than 1000mm
9. Should be compatible with the video system specified
3.3 Lower GI Scope(Adult)
1. Direction of view should be zero degree.
2. Minimum of 130 degree of field of view.
3. Range of observation at least from 5 mm to 90 mm.
4. Angulations of tip up at least 180 degrees and down 90
degrees with right and left movement of at least 100/100
degrees.
5. Inner diameter optimal
6. Distal end diameter of not more than 10.5 mm
7. Instrument channel of more than 2.5 mm
8. Working length of not less than 2000mm
9. Should be compatible with the video system specified
10. Endotherapy compatible
11. Fully immersible in disinfectant solution
3.4 Lower GI Scope(Pediatric)
1. Direction of view should be zero degree.
2. Minimum of 130 degree of field of view.
3. Range of observation atleast from 5 mm to 90 mm.

46
 4. Angulations of tip up at least 180 degrees and down 90
degrees with right and left movement of at least 100/100
degrees.
5. Inner diameter optimal
6. Distal end diameter of not more than 10.5 mm
7. Instrument channel of more than 2.5 mm
8. Working length of not less than 1500mm
9. Should be compatible with the video system specified
10. Endotherapy compatible
11. Fully immersible in disinfectant solution
3.5 DUODENO VIDEOSCOPE (Side viewing for ERCP)
1. Field of vision more than 100 deg.
2. Direction of view 5deg backward / oblilque
3, Depth of view app 5-50 mm
4. Distal end outer diameter not exceeding 13.5
5. Insertion tube outer diameter not exceeding 13 mm
6. Bending angulation should be at least up 120 deg, down 90
deg, Right 110 deg Left 90 deg
7. Working length not below 1200 mm
8. Instrumental channel not less than 4 mm
9. Compatible with video system specified
3.6 Video processor with light source & Monitor
1. Power supply 200-240 V A/C
2. PAL type video signal.
3. Controls for color adjustment, to enhancement and balance
settings.
4. Controls to freeze images, enhance a portion of frozen
image (zoom &post-processing).
5. Patient and physician data input key board..
6. Operates on Xenon lamp.
7. Emergency lamp.
8. Compatibility with the gastro scope and colonoscope
duodenoscope and Enteroscope
9. 15” LCD colour monitor with XGA resolution.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 1. Biopsy forceps :3 each
2. Foreign body grasper (basket type) 2
3. Polypectomy snare:2
4. Standard tip canula:2 types – 10 ea
5. Sphincterotome for side viewing duodenoscope only (wire
guided triple lumen) – 10
6. Mechanical lithotripter :5
7. Polypectomy cautery system :1
8. Guide wires 2 types ( 0.025 “F, 0.035 F“ in diameter );
length 450 cm, non-kinkable with stripes to detect
movement – 5
9. Basket for retrieving stones with memory filaments – 5
10. Balloons 11mm diameter and wire guided – 5

47
 11. Double pigtail stents – 7 cm, 10 cm long; 7 F and 10 F
diameter – each10
12. Stents – straight 7 F and 10F; 7 cm and 10 cm long – each
10 in number
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Shall be certified to be meeting safety standard IEC 60601-2-18
part 2 Particular requirements for the safety of endoscopic
equipment.
7.2 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.3 Manufacturer should be ISO certfied for quality standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty

48
 8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.

8. Equipment Specifications for Upper GI Endoscope

1 Description of Function
1.1 Gastroscopes are used to view and administer therapy to the
interior of the esophagus and the stomach for diagnosing and
managing upper-GI disorders (e.g., ulcers and other lesions).
Therapeutic GI procedures performed through the scope’s working
channels typically include biopsies, electrosurgery, and laser
surgery.gastroscopes, duodenoscopes, and choledochoscopes—
also called upper-gastrointestinal (GI) endoscopes
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Upper GI Scope compatible with commonly used camera and light
sources is required.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 1. Direction of view should be zero degree.
2. Minimum of 130 degree of field of view.
3. Range of observation atleast from 5 mm to 90 mm.
4. Angulations of tip up at least 180 degrees and down 90
degrees with right and left movement of at least 100/100
degrees.
5. Insertion tube diameter of less than 10 mm .
6. Distal end diameter of not more than 10.5 mm
7. Instrument channel of more than 2.5 mm
8. Working length of not less than 1000mm
9. Should be compatible with the video system specified
10. Video Processor Digital Signal Processing for signal
received from a colour CCD chip. Compact Light weight
(9-10 Kg) and ergonomically designed. Able to display
high resolution & real color imaging. Output
:RGB , Y/C, Composite(with Simultaneous Output
Possibility Colour adjustment : Chroma(Red & Blue Color) control with appx 14
increments Edge/Structure ENH : 4 to 8 levels of switchable settings (for Both edges &
structures) Image Display Size : 3 or 4 different sizes of Image display on monitor
possible for Small /Medium/ procedural ConvenienceFull Height) Users Data Preset
:For individual user’s setting of functions(5 or more users) Scope’s Identification : Data
such as scope’s model and serial number comments, Cumulative uses check period,

49
owner, Customers ID etc. Memorization of : the setting for functions such as Color,
Enhancement, Irish,Selected Setting White balancing etc. retainable when power is
off/on. 11.Xenox Light Source(300 Watts) Automatic Brightness Control : With Servo
Diaphragm Method Internal Memorization battery : For Storing Selected Settings in
Light Source even if the Power is off. Main Lamp : Xenon Short-arc Lamp (300 Watts)
with switching Regulator Mechanism. Main Lamp Life : Appx. 500 hrs on continuos use
Emergency Lamp : Halogen 12V 100 Watts with apprx 100hrs or more life. Power
Supply : 220-240 V Ac,Freq 50/60 Hz,Input Current 3A Weight : Around 15-16 Kg or
less LCD Monitor 14’’ Flat Screen color LCD Monitor(high Resolution)
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 1. Biopsy forceps :3 each
2. Foreign body grasper (basket type) 2
3. Polypectomy snare:2
4. Standard tip canula:2 types – 10 ea
5. Sphincterotome for side viewing duodenoscope only (wire
guided, triple lumen) – 10
6. Mechanical lithotripter :5
7. Polypectomy cautery system :1
8. Guide wires 2 types ( 0.025 “F, 0.035 “ in diameterF); length
450 cm, nonkinkable with stripes to detect movement – 5
9. Basket for retieving stones with memory filaments – 5
10. Balloons 11mm diameter and wire guided – 5
11. Double pigtail stents – 7 cm, 10 cm long; 7 F and 10 F
diameter – each 10
12. Stents – straight 7 F and 10F; 7 cm and 10 cm long – each
10 in number
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply-None
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Shall be certified to be meeting safety standard IEC 60601-2-18
part 2 Particular requirements for the safety of endoscopic
equipment.
7.2 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.3 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality
Standard.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.

50
 8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.

9. Equipment Specifications for ERCP scope

1 Description of Function
1.1 The ERCP scope is a flexible tube, approximately the size of a
finger. It contains a lens and a light source that allows the
endoscopist to view images on a monitor where it is magnified
many times so the endoscopist can see small changes in the
tissues.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The ERCP scope should also contains channels that allow the
endoscopist to take biopsies and introduce or withdraw fluid, air
and instruments and should be supplied with all accessories.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 DUODENO VIDEOSCOPE (Side viewing for ERCP)
1. Field of vision more than 100 deg.
2. Direction of view 5deg backward / oblilque
3, Depth of view app 5-50 mm
4. Distal end outer diameter not exceeding 13.5
5. Insertion tube outer diameter not exceeding 13 mm
6. Bending angulation should be at least up 120 deg, down 90
deg, Right 110 deg Left 90 deg
7. Working length not below 1200 mm
8. Instrumental channel not less than 4 mm
9. Compatible with video system specified
3.2 Video processor with light source & Monitor
1. Power supply 200-240 V A/C
2. PAL type video signal.
3. Controls for color adjustment, to enhancement and balance
settings.
4. Controls to freeze images, enhance a portion of frozen
image (zoom & post-processing).
5. Patient and physician data input key board..
6. Operates on Xenon lamp.
7. Emergency lamp.
8. Compatibility with the gastro scope and colonoscope
duodenoscope and Enteroscope
9. 15” LCD colour monitor with XGA resolution.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 1. Biopsy forceps: 3 each
2. Foreign body grasper (basket type) 2
3. Polypectomy snare:2

51
 4. Standard tip canula:2 types – 10 ea
5. Sphincterotome for side viewing duodenoscope only (wire
guided triple lumen) – 10
6. Mechanical lithotripter :5
7. Polypectomy cautery system :1
8. Guide wires 2 types ( 0.025 “F, 0.035 F“ in diameter );
length 450 cm,
non-kinkable with stripes to detect movement – 5
9. Basket for retrieving stones with memory filaments – 5
10. Balloons 11mm diameter and wire guided – 5
11. Double pigtail stents – 7 cm, 10 cm long; 7 F and 10 F
diameter – each 10
12. Stents – straight 7 F and 10F; 7 cm and 10 cm long – each
10 in number
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6. 1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Shall be certified to be meeting safety standard IEC 60601-2-18
part 2 Particular requirements for the safety of endoscopic
equipment.
7.2 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.3 Manufacturer should be ISO certfied for quality standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number andcosting.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.

52
 EQUIPMENT ICU-4
1. Electric Suction Machine Lipo fully stainless steel body

Rotary High-Vac are double stage pumps of larger capacities, which are knows as
Lipo for fats extraction and full in cosmetics surgery, the main assembly of the pump consist
of a stator with a rotor mounted eccentrically in it. The rotor is fitted with two spring
loaded diametrically opposed vanes, which move in and out of their slots pressing against
the inner surface of the stator these are oil sealed self lubricated, silent running, it is
designed to achieve maximum vacuum in a very short time, it reduce the wear and tear of
its components and makes it suitable for noiseless and trouble free performance for years
and thus helps in reduction of repair bills, these are very compact but so simple in design
that all minor repairs in case of need can be carried out easily, it run continuously for many
hours at a time. The entire pump and motor are placed in an attractive solid STAINLESS
STEEL cabinet having steel top, which is giving extra protection, reduces heat noise and
vibration to the minimum the suction mechanism is oil immersed. The unit is mounted on
smooth moving ball bearing heavy-duty castors, and noiseless. It crates vacuum of 700 to
760mm of Hg (28” to 30”) the suction system is accurately controlled and precisely
regulated by knob this unit is fitted with filter and automatic cut off by float mechanism,
vacuum gauge, pilot light and protection fuse, this unit is fitted with 1/2HP ball bearing
double shaft motor working on 220-250V single phase 50cycle Suction Capacity: 25Lts /p
minutes Max Vacuum: 700mm to 760mm of Hg Consumption: ½ HP Voltage: 220 V 50
Cycles Castors: 5cm Antistatic Weight: Approx 43kg

Dimensions: 38cmx38cmx85cm with castor Sound: almost whispers Finish: SS cabinet

Suction Jar: 2nos 2500ml with over flow safety device

2. Spo2 machine with NIBP (Pulse oxy meter)

ideally suited for use in intensive care units out patient clinics emergency room or during
emergency air or land transport mains cum rechargeable batteries power supply battery
back up more than 2 hours bright easy to read large LED display stored data can be recalled
printed or downloaded in PC NIBP display systolic, diastolic and mean pressure, manual
stat or automatic adult and neonatal modes, SPO2 fast reliable and accurate SPO2 tru trak
technology patented by datax ohmeda total operation time approximately 2 hours at room
temperature using Ni-MH batteries microcontroller controlled device automatic self test at
power on automatically continuous system diagnostics visibility from 30feet in dark and 25
feet in ambient light spo2 calibration functional range 0% to 100% accuracy 90% to 100%,
1.5% - 80% to 89.9%, 2.1%, 70% to 79.9%, 2.8% - 60% to 69.9% 3.5%, below 60%
unspecified first reading full accuracy 10 seconds from power on 07 seconds while oxi
meter is on pulse rate range 20 to 255 beats per minute BPM accuracy assuming a constant
pulse rate 1 standard deviation 40 to 235: 1.7% - 20 to 40 and 236 to 255 unspecified first
reading accuracy reduce 5 bpm for 15 seconds then full accuracy 15 seconds from power on
10 seconds while oxi meter is on display spo2 pulse rate, systolic and diastolic three digit
LED numeric display 19m height map temperature perfusion index & interval three digit
LED numeric display 18m height pleth bar pulse rate signal strength a column of
logarithmically scaled eight segments (8 segment LED) NIBP measurement technique
oscillometic method implying stepwise pressure deflation. Proprietary software eliminates
most ambient noise and motion artifact application adult and pediatrics blood pressure

53
range systolic 30-255mm diastolic 15-220mm MAP 20-235mm Alarms audio visual alarms
for high and low spo2 pulse rates systolic diastolic MAP five functional alarms, alarms
audible, till not attended. Accuracy NIBP 5mmhg standard resolution NIBP 1mmhg over
pressure limit 290m hg Measurement modes manual adaptive or preset cuff inflation
automatic host controlled 1-90 minutes as selected by host stat restarts a new
measurements after 5 seconds pause stat mode terminates automatically after 5mints

DATA storage last 50 readings serial interface data lines – Txd and GND baud rates
4800rpm signal level Rs232 compatible Power supply 9volts Ni-MH battery and or 230v
AC mains

3. Anesthesia kit
1) Laryngoscope 4blades with standard handle 2cell 4spare lamps in pouch
code 6204 1set
2) Maggils forceps adult code 7204 1pc
3) Maggils forceps child code 7205 1pc
4) Maggils forceps infant code 7206 1pc
5) Bain Circuit code 2005 1pc
6) Rebrathing bag 0.5liter code 8201B 1pc
7) Rebrathing bag 1liter code 8202B 1pc
8) Rebrathing bag 1.5liter code 8203B 1pc
9) Rebrathing bag 1liter code 8204B 1pc
10) Jackson Rees Peadiatric circuit code 2001 1pc
11) Tube cleaning brush set of 4 code 7200 1pc
12) E.T.Tube Red rubber cuff 5/5.5/6/6.5/7/7.5/8 8.5/9/9.5/10 (set of 11) 1set
13) E.T. Tube red rubber plain2/2.5/3/3.5/4/4.5/5(set7) 1set
14) Rao’s tracheal connectors set in a box code 7009 1set
15) Guedel airway siliconised 000,00,0,1,2,3,4 set of 7 1set
16) Malleable styled with handle set of 3 code 7201 1set
17) Goldman halothane vaporizer stand adaptors code 4001 1pc

4. SYRINGE INFUSION PUMP

PCA upgradeable syringe pump accepting 10,20, 30, 50 ml syringes of known brands
as well as CUSTOM programmable syringe with facility for time locked BOLUS / PCA facility
& administration counter and display for the same. BODY WEIGHT MODE for automatic
flow rate computation depending on patient’s weight. Minimum six stage programming of
target time and target volume. Programmable rate KVO (keep vein open), LED display of
flow rate & LCD display of drug name, infused volume, infusion time simultaneously, facility
to change flow rates in Run condition. Facility to display name of the medicine being infused
out of a library of 48 / 96 Medicine

5. Volumetric infusion pump {With Micro and Macro mode of

operation}
Microprocessor based Volumetric automatic infusion pump should have a range
from 1-600 ml/hr and micro range 1 to 99.9 ml/hr. Should have Micro & Macro modes of
operation. Should display total ml infused, set drops/min. and elapsed time on LCD panel at
one time. Should have facility to set Target volume & Target time. Should have Alarms- for

54
high/slow speed,Battery charge low etc. Should have air in line removal facility with purge
mode. Should work on mains and battery and minimum 3 hours battery backup. Should
work on KVO Mode. KVO rate should be user selectable between 0.1 ml/hr to 9 ml/hr.
Should work on Micro and Macro standard I.V.sets. Calibration facility for no. of drops per
Ml from front panel. Should have free flow protection feature in case of accidental door
opening. Should work in both modes – Volumetric & Drop counting mode. Should have
nurse call facility with the help of a separate key on the front panel. Should have potential
free contact for remote alarm & Nurse call. Should have fixed drop sensor. The rates should
be stored into memory with facility for memory clear.

6. Electric cautery machine 400m

Latest technology (micro controller & IGBT – longer life) twenty programmable
modes separate monopolar and bi-polar RF output two surgeons can work separately three
fine cut modes – pure / bland 1 / bland 2 three coagulation modes spray / fulgurate /
desiccate white coagulation which avoids tissue necrosis two bipolar coagulation modes
macro – micro white coagulation isolated RF output reduced risk of site burns audio visual
patient plate monitoring impedance measured every 35 nano seconds to adjust power auto
compensation inbuilt stabilizer (SMPS) 150v to 270v AC 50Hz endocut facility with double
pedal explosion proof foot switch for monopolar single pedal foot switch for bipolar
specially designed patient plate & cord chuck handle (autoclavable) five electrodes hand
switch bipolar forcep and cord mains cord

7. Central Monitoring System

Unit for 8 bed side monitor facility but with 6 bed side monitor with PC & printer and
wiring (single para monitor) 14.4cm (5.7”)
STN blue LCD with backlit display with CCFL back light display area 120mmx90mm
resolution 320x240 pixels writing speed 25mm/sec non fade solid traces of graphical ECG
waveforms on the LCD screen real time ECG on the first channel and frozen delayed ECG on
the second channel auto ECG freeze on alarm condition 1mv alarms visual (bell) and audio
(buzzer beep) on alarm frozen display on channel 2 calibration pulse indicator LED blinking
for every detected QRS complex Standard frequency response and high common mode
rejection ration built in rechargeable battery CNS back panel connector 9 pin D-sub
connector 0.5V/mV at 10mm/mV gain dimensions 235x166x140mm weight 1.5kgs power
AC-DC adaptor 15V DC/1.5A AC main 100-264 V AC line indicator green LED power
consumption < 18VA battery rechargeable Nimh 9.6V/1400mAh battery backup duration
180 minute (min) battery low indicator Red led ECG display 4 second real time ECG on
channel 1 4 second delayed ECG on channel 2 standard accessories ECG patient cable 1no,
Disposable electrodes 30 Nos, Ac-DC adapter (AD-004) 1no, Accessory bag 1no, user
manual 1no, screw driver 1no

8. Defibrillator with monitoring system

less than 5 seconds to charge to 360J with battery display of actual delivered energy
100 charge / discharge cycles with fully charged battery LCD for sharp bright non fade
display visual and audio alerts self calibration facility sliding adult paddles over pediatric
paddles built in battery light weight and truly portable power supply 100 to 230 V AC
power consumption 100 VA battery type rechargeable SMF lead acid battery capacity 12V
4.5 AH 7 hrs only monitoring, 100 discharges of 360 joules dimension 260 w x 280 d x 250 h
mm weight 10.5kgs wave form 5msec monophasic pulse (lown) synchronization

55
defibrillation synchronized to the R wave marker indication on ECG waveform sync
message display message on monitor screen and lamp on front panel accessories
defibrillator paddles (adult & pediatric) 1no, disposable electrodes 30 nos. patient cable
(3lead) 1no, mains cable (power cord) 1no, internal paddles 1no, earth cable 1no, accessory
bag 1no, user manual 1no, cardijelly 1bottle

9. Electric drilling machine with attachments with reamers flexible

Driving unit with motor, Stand, flexible shaft, foot control, toolkit, oil bottle, & special
container, cannulated drill hand piece max speed 1200RPM & with fixed Jacob’s SS chuck
(0-1/4”) Saggital saw hand piece with set of 5 blades with 400RPM hand piece with flexible
reamer shaft 8mm dia fixed head, flexible reamer shaft for detachable heads up to 12mm,
flexible reamer shaft for detachable heads ABOVE12mm, detachable reamer heads from
8.5mm to 15mm step 0.5mm, reamer shaft standard length 440mm

10. Color multi para monitor

single knob to browse menu direct keys for all important function quick access to all
information built in demo mode for easy learning easy selection of adult / ped / neonate
mode during patent data storage for accurate measurements options for SVGA or flat LCD
slave display better visibility in multi viewer environment dual color blinker for easy
visibility of alarms yellow for warning & red for emergency unique night mode which saves
the life span of the TFT panel 120 hour data monitoring dynamic blood pressure monitoring
pacemaker detection (flexible and upgradeable) built in battery for easy transportation
ECG/Respiration heart rate range 20-254bpm +- 1bpm lead selection 3 lead mode (1,2,3)
of 5 lead mode 1,2,3, aVR, aVL, aVF, V) ST segment -0.8 ~ + 0.8Mv sweep speed
12.5/25/50mm/sec gain section 4mv,2mv,1mv,0.5mv,0.25mv auto respiration method
thoracic method respiration rate 5~99brpm NIBP method oscillometic parameters
sys/dias/map operating mode manual/auto/stat scale mmhg/Kpa cuff pressure adult /
pediatric 30~254mmhg neonate 30~135mmhg repeat cycles 1~10,15,30,60,90,120 minute
Spo2 saturation range 0-100% Accuracy +- 2%, +- 3%, pulse rate range 30~250bpm, pulse
rate accuracy -+1% (30~100rpm)

11. Equipment Specifications for Ultrasonic Cutting & Coagulation

Device
1 Description of Function
1.1 Ultrasound is the basis for an efficient surgical instrument: the
Ultrasonic Cutting & Coagulation Device cuts and coagulates by
using lower temperatures than those used by electrosurgery or
lasers. Ultrasonic Cutting & Coagulation Device technology
controls bleeding by coaptive coagulation at low temperatures
ranging from 50ºC to 100ºC: vessels are coapted (tamponaded)
and sealed by a protein coagulum.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The system is required for Open & Laparoscopic Surgical
Procedures
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 1. Ultrasonic generator generating ultrasound at app 55.5 khz
frequency

56
 2. Hand-piece with in-built transducer & silicon cable
3. Hand-switch activation adopter for blade & hook probe
4. Cart to house the generator and accessories
5. Dual foot-switch attachment
6. Stand-by mode for better safety
7. System diagnostics and troubleshooting guide
8. Warning system for malfunctioning cable, probe etc
9. Power entry filters to suppress electromagnetic
disturbances to monitors
10. It should have dual foot switch receptacles to connect two
footswitches to allow simultaneous use by 2 surgeons.
11. It should have a vibration range of 50-100micrometer.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 B) Accessories
1. Foot-switch with max and min pedals and cable.
2. 5 mm blade system adopter
3. Hand switch adopter
4. Open Surgery Instruments:
a. Coagulating shears – 10 mm dia, 20 cm long
b. Short Curved Coagulating shears- 5 mm dia, 14 cm
long.
c. Dissecting hook, 5 mm dia,10cm long
d. Hand Activted Coagulting shears with Clicker – 5
mm di ,Curved mode 23 cm long.
5. Endoscopic Surgery Instruments:
a. Dissecting Hook, 5mm dia, 32 cm long.
b. Curved Blade , 5mm dia, 32 cm long.
c. Laparoscopic Coagulating shears , 10mm dia , 34cm
long.
d. Laparoscopic Coagulating shears , 5mm dia ,knife
mode, 34cm long.
e. Laparoscopic Coagulating shears , 5mm dia , curved
mode, 36cm long.
f. Laparoscopic Hand Activated Coagulating shers ,
5mm dia, curved mode, 36 cm long.
g. Laparoscopic Coagulating shears , 5mm dia , Curved
mode, 45cm long.
h. Laparoscopic hand activated Coagulating shears
with clicker -5mm dia curved mode, 36cm long.
C) Probes
1. It Should have both 5 mm & 10 mm instruments.
2. It should have the following types of shears for open &
laparoscopic surgery.
a. 10 mm Coagulating shear capable of working in 3
modes – flat, Blunt & Sharp.
b. 5 mm Laparoscopic Curved coagulating Shears, 360
degree rotable, capable of sealing blood vessels upto
5 mm diameter with clicker & integrated bilateral

57
 integrated hand control to enable precise operation
of system by hand.
3. All Hand Pieces should be steam autoclavable.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 120 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 The generator must be CF isolated applied device and defibrillator
protection must be available.
7.2 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.3 Manufacturer should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.5 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-
60601 / IS-13450
7.6 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technicalmanual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number andcosting.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.
8.6 Compliance Report to be submitted in a tabulated and point wise
manner clearly mentioning the page/para number of original
catalogue/data sheet.Any point ,if not substantiated with
authenticated catalogue/manual, will not beconsidered.

58
12. Equipment Specifications for Cardiopulmonary Exercise
Physiology Test System with Treadmill
1 Description of Function
1.1 Cardiopulmonary exercise testing (CPT) system gives a breath-by-
breath measurement for comprehensive functional analysis of a
subject’s cardiopulmonary, respiratory and metabolic systems.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 System complete with Treadmill and Analysis software is required.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR AN BREATH BY BREATH EXERCISE
PHYSIOLOGY TEST SYSTEM
1) The unit should be a compact unit for spirometry and allied
parameters, mounted on a suitable trolley.
2) The system should measure VO2,VCO2,RQ,VE, spirometry /
flowvolume, AT etc.
3) The system should be interfaced to a PC with the following
specifications– Intel Pentium Core 2 Duo 2.7Ghz and above
PC system with 120 GB HDD , 512 MBRAM , 1.44MB FDD ,
52 x DVD RD/WR drive , Serial /Parallel/USB ports , 17”
Colour LCD/TFT monitor , Keyboard , Mouse.HP colour
inkjet printer
4) The system should have a fully automatic and computerized
volume calibration system.
5) The system should measure Nutritional parameters.
6) The system software should operate under windows XP
environment.
7) The system should have a bidirectional volume sensor with
the following specifications:-
Volume: 0 to 10 lit.
Accuracy: 50 ml or 2%
Resolution: 3 ml
Flow: 0 to 15 l/s
8) System should have oxygen & CO2 analyzer with response
time less than 80 msecs.
9) The system should record data breath by breath and
intrabreath.
10) The system should have a unit to automatically detect
ambient conditions such as pressure, temperature, and
humidity.
11) It should be have a 12 channel ECG unit integrated into the
system.
12) It should be interfaced a treadmill system.
67 (Specifications of treadmill enclosed).
13) A suitable interpretation program to evaluate the test
results should be available.
14) The system should have the following:
a) Bodyplethysmography supplement.

59
 b) PFT Supplement: FRC – Helium and Diffusion single
breath
3.2 SPECIFICATION OF TREADMILL
The new generation of treadmills especially designed in
accordance with high safety and quality requirements in Pneumology,
Cardiology, Stress Testing, Endurance Training, Rehabilitation, Sports
Medicine as well as in Medical Fitness Training. The digital interface (RS
232) should allow the treadmill and all its functions being controlled via
an Ergospirometry measuring station or a PC (SW program for control via
virtuel User Terminal to be included). Current values such as speed,
gradient, time, index no., distance as well as pulse rate can be transferred
to the Ergospirometry measuring station. For safety purposes the unit
should be equipped with an emergency switch which stops the treadmill
at any stage of operation, and which switches the WHOLE system
powerless.
Technical Specifications:
Speed:adjustable from 0 - 22 km/h optional: 0 - 30 km/h
Resolution:0.1 km/h; 0.5 %
Gradient: 0 - 24 %: electrical engine brake prevents acceleration
caused by body weight at gradient; optional: reverse operation 0 to -24%
for downhill running (up to 5 km/h)
Resolution: 0.5 %
Acceleration:7 intensities (3 ... 131 sec from 0 to max.) manual or also
selectable via program step
Slow down:7 intensities (3 ... 131 sec from max. to 0) manual or also
selectable via program step
Motor power: 2.2 kW
Motor: maintenance-free and efficient rotary current asynchronic motor
(CE mark) with V-belt, low noise and smooth running
Heart rate measurement: POLAR wireless, 1-channel receiver, beat-to-
beat ECG precise measurement automatic load control according to
preprogrammed heart rate (target pulse)
Interface: RS232 (V 24) incl. PC-, CosRec-, CosCom- ECG, Oxycon and
serial printer protocol
Programs: fixed memory locations incl. test programs Conconi,
Ellestad,Naughton, etc. in combination with User Terminal Platform:
wear-resistant and shock-absorbing
Usable platform area:app 150 x 50 cm (L x W)
Total dimensions: app 210 x 82 x 150 cm (L x W x H)
Weight: app approx. 200 kg
Packing: app 223 x 107 x 83 cm (L x W x H); approx. 294 kg
Handrails:metallic railing in front and at both sides
2. User terminal with HR Measurement
Integrated User Terminal with high contrast LC display. Complete
with POLAR Heart Rate Measurement system and heart rate
dependent load control. Current values such as speed, gradient,
time, index no., distance as well as pulse rate should be legibly
presented on the LCD. Programs should be available with fixed

60
 memory locations incl. test programs Conconi, llestad, Naughton,
etc.
3. Following should be should be available
a) Para graphic Software:-
The PC-software package Para Graphics should provide on-line
recording of the load parameters and the heart rate in the form of
graphs on the colour screen. The data should be exported to other
programs (e.g. POLAR, Cyclo Vantage, HRCT, etc.) and should thus
be evaluated. Apart from on-line recording the software package
Para Graphics HRC should provide a heart-rate controlled training.
It should work automatically to control the speed of the treadmill
according to the desired range of the heart rate that should be
programmed. The following data should be recorded on-line:
Time [s]
Speed [km/h]
Heart rate [bpm]
Elevation [%]
Distance [km]
b) Rehabilitation attachment:- comfortable joint adjustment in width
and height ; with scale; the Reha attachment should be fixed to the
lateral railings of the Treadmill. the Reha attachment should be
folded together, and should not need to dismantle it after use
4. Full Resting ECG Evaluation 12 Leads with Computerized
Reporting Analysis of Waveform Morphology & Rhythm.
5. Computerized Treadmill Exercise Testing with 12 Leads, 3 leads
Screen Showing Advanced waveforms Analysis. Accurate ST
Segment Measurement, Heart Rate, BP Measurement should
include noninvasive BP measurement from time to time during
treadmill evaluations.
6. Facility for programmability for all variety of protocols.
7. Trend Charts for Heart Rate BP & ST shifts in at least 3 leads
available at the end of the test.
8. Minute to minute Evaluation of all leads available at the end of the
test.
9. 12 lead Printout to be available as & when necessary during the
test.
10. Stable Reusable Electrode that gives clear good quality online ECG.
11. ST Analysis of all 12 leads at maximum ST Depression & at
Maximum METs should be available at the end of the test.
12. Minute to minute evaluation of HR, BP, METs, Speed , Percentage of
elevation of Treadmill Belt, ST Analysis in minimum 3 selected
leads or maximum ST Depression out of all leads should be
available at the end of the test.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost.
5 Environmental factors

61
 5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Suitable Servo controlled Stabilizer/CVT
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.2 10 years warranty on Driving Motor.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spares and accessories with their part number
and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.

13. EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRESS TEST SYSTEM WITH TMT

1 Description of Function
1.1 Exercise stress testing systems offer a wide array of unique
diagnostic software options to evaluate myocardial function.
Automatic arrhythmia detection, ST-segment analysis, and T-wave
alternans are a few examples. In conjunction with a treadmill or
ergometer, these systems provide a controlled environment for the
observation of the effects of increases in myocardial oxygen
demand: exercise-induced systolic hypotension, exercise-induced
angina, and/or the appearance of a heart murmur during exercise.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 System complete with PC, Software, TMT and necessary cables is
required.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 1. System should acquire and analyze 12 leads.
2. System should be based on Windows platform with 17”
color monitor having minimum resolution 1280 x 1024. 80
GB HDD, CD-RW, Mouse, UPS for analyzer.
3. Wireless patient module between patient and analyzer thus
providing wireless transmission of patients ECG / remote
patient preparation. The wireless module must have display

62
 for ECG waveform, electrode impedance check, low battery/
lead fail display.
4. Should provide standard Full Interpretation of Supine ECG
with reasoning.
5. Display of real time 12 lead diagnostic quality ECG
waveform, average complexes beat of all 12 leads with
superimposed color comparison along with digital value of
ST level and slope. Display the graph on the recording
paper.
6. Automatic detection, display, Storage and review of
arrhythmia, Heart Rate, Double Product and METS. It
should have online HR METs and ST running trends
available on the screen during exercise.
7. System should have ability to manual edit of J & Isoelectric
point during exercise. Filters for line frequency and special
filters to reduce noise and baseline artifacts without
compromising the ECG frequency response.
8. System should have full disclosure play back, review and
storage of patient ECG raw data for unlimited numbers
depending upon size of the hard disk. The unit should have
the ability to readjust “J-ST” interval measurement + 1 m
sec points and generate a new report from stored raw ECG
data.
9. System should provide multiple and customizable printing
formats as per user’s choice on A-4 size high resolution
thermal printer for online real time printings. Compatible
laser printer for printing reports on plain paper also to be
supplied.
10. System must have ECG trigger output to interface with
external automatic devices.
11. Heavy Duty Treadmill (Imported): Noise free TREADMILL
with speed ranging from 0.5 to 20 kmph and grade of 0 –
22% with suitable servo stabilizer.
12. Automatic Stress test Non Invasive Blood Pressure Monitor,
compatible with the treadmill stress Test System for bi-
directional exchange of data between the monitor and
analyzer. Optional Pulse Oximetry (SpO2) integrated with
NIBP Module to be quoted separately.of enlarged complex
and facility of dynamic lead selection for maximum ST
changes.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost.
5 Environmental factors
None
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz
6.2 Suitable Servo controlled Stabilizer/CVT

63
 7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.

14. EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR SLEEP SCREENING TEST

1 Description of Function
1.1 Sleep lab system is required to study the sleep disorders by
recording and analyzing the parameters like EEG,SPO2 ETC when
the patient is sleeping.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The sleep system is required with all the equipments and
computer with analysis software with printer
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 SLEEP LAB- WITH EEG FACILITY
Should have;
• flow/pressure (nasal cannula/mask)
• oral flow (Thermistor) Sensor
• snore (by nasal pressure or by neck vibration sensor
Piezo element)
• abdominal movement .
• Chest wall movement (by Xact trace RIP belts or by Piezo
element sensors)
• SPO2 average
• SPO2 beat-to-beat
• Pulse rate
• Pulse waveform
• Body position Sensor
• Flow limitation.
• Event marker
• Activity
• Limb movement
• Autoset information.
• Batteries; 2AA alkaline batteries (more than 10 hours
duration 2AA rechargeable batteries
• Housing construction; Injection moided plastic covered
with almunium shield.
• Number of channels; 7 sensors, 14 derived signals.
• Recording capacity; more than 10 hours
3.2 Computer specification :CPU Pentium IV 2.7 GHz and
above;128/64 MB RAM;1.44 MB Floppy drive;80 GB Hard Disk
Drive; High Speed DVD/CD Rom 52 X: Serial and parallel ports
;Keyboard (IOS) , Mouse and Mouse Pad; Preloaded latest MS

64
 Windows Versions; SVGA Monitor size 15”;Inkjet printer; Modem
56K;latest anti-virus SOLOMAN & NORTON. 87
3.3 Complete software and hardware to interface the system and
analyze the results of parameters recorded.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 All media and consumables for setting up and standardization
should be provided free of cost.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Shall be certified to be meeting the safety standards IEC- 60601-2-
26 PART 2: Particular requirements for safety of EEG Systems.
7.3 Manufacturer should be ISO certified for quality standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.5 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.
8.6 User list to be provided with performance certificate.

15. EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR SLEEP LAB (ADVANCED)

1 Description of Function

65
 1.1 Sleep lab system is required to study the sleep disorders by
recording and analyzing the parameters like EEG, SPO2 ETC when
the patient is sleeping.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The sleep system is required with all the equipments and
computer with analysis software with printer
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 SPECIFICATIONS OF SLEEP SYSTEM
(1) Ambulatory polysomnography with 26 channels and upto 8
of these should be EEG , should be light and compact. The
basic unit should not be more than 500 gm. including
batteries.
(2) Should have latest touch screen for device configuration ,
impedance measurement and signal control.
(3) Following parameters should be recorded ;
(a) 8 AC signals for EEG,EOG,EMG,ECG and IC-EMG.
(b) flow by using a thermistor (nasal-oral) or using a
nasal cannula.
(c) Effort should be measured using piezoelectrical
sensors.
(d) Pulse frequency and oxygen sensor should be
measured with a finger clip attached to the interval
pulse oximeter.
(e) Snoring detected by a microphone.
(f) Body position (back,stomach,left,right) by means of
an integrated body position sensor in the
patients yoke box.
(g) Estimation of sleep and wake phases should be
measured using accleration sensor attached to
patient wrist.
(h) Light sensor integrated in the base unit to measure
actual time in bed.
(i) NCPAP/BiPAP pressure and flow. 90
(j) Possibility for software to generate a sum of both
effort signals, and heart frequency generated from
ECG.
(k) Necessary signals (EEG, EOG.EMG) required for
sleep staging should be bundled into one cable/plug
harness.
(l) Sleep Stage Analysis should be based on criteria of R
& K. The average frequency value of the central EEG
lead should be calculated, sleep spindles, K-
complexes, REMs and movement arousals should be
detected and displayed.
(m) The displayed amount of sleep interruption within
specific time intervals should provide
information about the disorder of sleep architecture.
(4) Should have built – in pulse oximeter, display should be 120
x 64 pixel b/w , touch screen memory = PCMCIA or compact

66
 flash card , 96 MB memory , optional 160 MB. Pulse
Oximeter – 75% - 100% Range
(5) 7 aux. Channels to connect to external sources like PH , et
CO2 , temperature , Oesophagus pressure , NPT etc.
(6) Software based on windows platform and after transferring
the data to PC , the data should be analyzed automatically
with a clear over view of the final result.
(7) Computer assisted analysis or even complete manual
evaluations should be possible. The analysis software
should also evaluate measurements of children and infants
taken specific aspects such as periodic breathing into
consideration.
(8) The yoke box incl. Integrated body position sensor should
not be more than 250 gms.
(9) Internal storage of raw data and automatic gain adjustment
for perfect amplification of the respiratory signals should
be possible.
(10) Computer specification :CPU Pentium Core 2 Duo 2.7 GHz
and above;512 MB RAM;1.44 MB Floppy drive;120 GB Hard
Disk Drive; High Speed DVD/CD Rom 52 X: Serial .USB and
parallel ports ;Keyboard (IOS) , Mouse and Mouse Pad;
Preloaded latest MS Windows Versions;LD/TFT SVGA
Monitor size 17”;Inkjet printer; Modem 56K;latest anti-
virus SOLOMAN & NORTON.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility. or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer should be ISO certified for quality standards.
7.3 Shall be certified to be meeting the safety standards IEC- 60601-2-
26 PART 2: Particular requirements for safety of EEG Systems.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.

67
 8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.

16. EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR LUNG FUNCTION TEST SYSTEM

1 Description of Function
1.1 Pulmonary function tests are a group of procedures that measure
the function of the lungs, revealing problems in the way a patient
breathes. The tests can determine the cause of shortness of breath
and may help confirm lung diseases, such as asthma, bronchitis or
emphysema. The tests also are performed before any major lung
surgery to make sure the person won't be disabled by having a
reduced lung capacity
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Complete with all hardware and software is required
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 The system should be able to measure spirometry and flow volume
parameters and sub divisions, Maximum Ventilation
Volume(MVV),Lung Volume including TLC,RV& FRC by
multibreath closed circuit Helium Dilution.
3.2 Should be able to perform diffusion studies.
3.3 Broncho Provocation/ Histamine Challenge Test Software
3.4 System should incorporate Precision Dry Rolling Seal
Spirometer(11-13 Litres)/ heated Pneumotech for highest
accuracy and reproducibility and Flow Volume Differentiator
(Resistance less than 1 cm of H2O /Liters/Sec
a) Volume resolution < 8ml
b.) Accuracy < 0.5%c)Flow Range+/- 15 Liters/Sec.
3.5 Should have linear analyzers for
Helium Analyzer: Range 0-15% Helium Accuracy+/- 0.1 %
Carbon Monoxide Analyzer: Range0- 0.350%CO, Accuravy+/- 0.1%
Oxygen Analyzer: Range: Range 0-100% Accuracy +/- 0.1%
3.6 Gas Control Module with Automatic Filling circuit.
3.7 System should have automatred O2 compensation during FRC test.
3.8 System should also have fully automated Calibration/Test
procedure with computer.
3.9 Computer specification :CPU Pentium IV 2.7 GHz and
above;128/64 MB RAM;1.44 MB Floppy drive;80 GB Hard Disk
Drive; High Speed DVD/CD Rom 52 X: Serial and parallel pOrts
;Keyboard (IOS) , Mouse and Mouse Pad; Preloaded latest MS
Windows Versions; SVGA Monitor size 15”;Inkjet printer; Modem
56K;latest anti-virus SOLOMAN & NORTON.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 Should be supplied complete with Computer Interfacing package,
cables, Trolley, PFT Software, Manual and standard accessories
4.3 Should be supplied complete with Gas mixture cylinders (at least 2
cubic metres)

68
 a) Helium Cylinder-01
b) Cylinders Diffusion Mixtures-02
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-
60601-1 General Requirements
7.4 Should comply with ATS/ ECCS Guidelines.
7.5 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
94
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spares and accessories with their part number
and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.

17. EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR LUNG FUNCTION TEST SYSTEM

(ADVANCED)
1 Description of Function
1.1 Pulmonary function tests are a group of procedures that measure
the function of the lungs, revealing problems in the way a patient
breathes. The tests can determine the cause of shortness of breath
and may help confirm lung diseases, such as asthma, bronchitis or
emphysema. The tests also are performed before any major lung
surgery to make sure the person won't be disabled by having a
reduced lung capacity

69
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Complete system is required along with control software, PC and a
printer.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 SPECIFICATION FOR A COMPUTERISED PFT SYSTEM
1) The System should be an economically oriented lung
function measuring system for the determination of the
static and dynamic lung volumes using the classical FRC-
Helium rebreathing and the Diffusion Capacity by using the
single Breath technique. It should also be possible to
measure Diffusion Capacity (DLCO) by the Rebreathing
technique for patients with distribution impairments of the
lungs, to minimise patient co-operation. 2) The system
should measure the following:
a) Slow and forced spirometry (Inspiratory and
Expiratiory Flow Volume Curve)
b) Lung subvolumes - Functional residual Capacity
(FRC), Residual Volume (RV). Total Lung Capacity
(TLC) by FRC-Helium multiple breath technique.
c) Diffusion capacity of the lung, by single breath
technique.
d) Diffusion capacity of the lung by the multiple breath
technique.
3) The system should measure the following
parameters:
a) Slow and forced Spirometry, VT, BF, MV, ERV, FVC,
FEV1, VCin, VCex, MEF 50, MEF 75, PEF, MVV etc.
b) Lung Subvolumes : FRC, RV, TLC, RV%TLC etc.
c) Diffusion capacity of the Lungs : DLCO-SB , DLCO –
RB.
4) The system should have an easy to exchange, bidirectional heated
pneumotach with the following specifications. :
Range - Should be 0 to 20 lit/sec.
Accuracy - Should be +/-2%
Resistance - Should be less than 0.05 KPa/ lit/sec.
5) The system should have carbon monoxide analyser, He analyser
and O2 Analyser with the following specifications:
a) Carbon monoxide analyser : Range - Should be from 0 to
0.4% Resolution/Accuracy should be 0.0002%/0.0003%
Reproducibility should be 0.0006%
b) He Analyser : Range - Should be 0 to 9.5%
Resolution/Accuracy should 0.005% /0.05 %
Reproducibility should be 0.02%
c) O2 analyser Range - Should be 0 to 100%.
Resolution / Accuracy should be 0.05% / 1.0%
Reproducibility should be 0.1%.
6) The system should have a demand valve unit for direct breathing
(no inspiratory bag) from pre-mix gas container, to minimise
wastage of gas.

70
 7) The computer system should have the following specification:
Branded - Pentium Core 2 Duo processer 2.7 GHz and above
120 GB HDD,512 MB RAM,1.44 MB FDD,DVD RD/WR
Serial / Parallel Ports/USB,15” TFT Monitor.Keyboard,Mouse.
HP colour inkjet printer
ORIGINAL WINDOWS XP PROFESSIONAL
OEM O.S.WITH SERVICE PACKS 2
8) System software should have facility for entry of patient data and
saving of this information in a data base system Software should
be MS-windows based . It should be possible to configure different
report out put formats.
9) It should be possible to upgrade the system to the following :
a) Airway resistance by shutter method.
b) Respiratory impedance by Impulse Oscillometry system.
c) Respiratory muscle strength, Respiratory drive.
d) Compliance - Static / Dynamic system.
e) Body Plethysmography.
f) Aerosol Provocation system.
g) Ergospirometry & Stress test ECG.
h) Breathing Analysis for children.
10) The system should have fully computerised calibration procedure
for flow sensor and gas analysers. The system should also have a
check procedure during start-up.
11) It should be possible to integrate/connect the system in a local
Area Network (LAN). The data base must be accessed in a novel
authorised operating system.
12) The software for diffusion must have program for patient training
of DLCO Test without gas.
13) The software must be able to be set values for discard volume,
Alveolar time & other parameters according to user requirement.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 Should be supplied complete with Computer Interfacing package,
cables, Trolley, PFT Software, Manual and standard accessories
4.3 Should be supplied complete with Gas mixture cylinders (at least 2
cubic metres)
a) Helium Cylinder-01
b) Cylinders Diffusion Mixtures-02
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug

71
 6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer should be ISO certified for quality standards.
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-
60601 / IS- 13450
7.4 Should comply with ATS/ ECCS Guidelines.
7.5 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.

18. MULTIPARA MONITOR

1. Compact portable, suitable for all patient categories, i.e. adults, paediatric
and infants.
2. Parameters monitored: ECG, HR, Respiration rate, SpO2, NIBP and
temperature.
3. Display: colour TFT, approx 10.1 inch and above, 4-channel.
4. Soft touch keys, durable and easy to clean .
5. Measurements, ranges:
6. ECG: I, II, III
7. HR: approx 30 to 250 bpm <3 bpm>
8. NIBP: approx 20 to 290 mmHg (systolic) <1 mmHg>
9. SpO2: approx 40 to 100 % <1%>
10. ECG div. respiration: approx 6 to 180 bpm <1 bpm>
11. Temperature: approx 10 to 45 degree Celsius< 0.1 degree Celsius>
12. NIBP oscillometric step deflation, manual/automatic, initial inflation
pressure user selectable
13. Sweep, adjustable: 12.5, 25 or 50 mm/s
14. Sensitivity (amplitude) of all signals user adjustable
15. Standardising voltage marker, 1 mV
16. User preset of high/low alarms on all monitored parameters
17. Audio visual alarm in case measurements are outside preset range

72
 18. Silencing feature for audio alarms
19. Trend display from 2 to 24 hours
20. RS232 serial data output provision (peripheral printer or network),
analogue output for ECG
21. Defibrillator sync and protection
22. Pacemaker detection/rejection
23. Display reports system errors, leads and sensors failure and built-in
battery status
24. Unit can be mounted on standard bed/wall rail or mobile pole/stand.
25. Automatic switch from mains to batteries in case of power failure
26. Monitor: constructed of durable shock proof plastic
27. Power requirements: 220 V / 50 Hz (with adapter) or internal re-
chargeable batteries (autonomy approx 3 hrs, automatic recharge)
1 28. Battery backup minimum 2 hrs.

It should Supplied with following accessories:

1 1. 3 x cuff hose infant
0 2. 2 x sets of 5 neonate BP cuffs (No 1 (3.1-5.7 cm), No 2 (4.3-8 cm), No 3
(5.8- 10.9), No 4 (7.1-13.1cm), No 5 (9.6-14.3 cm)
2 3. 1 x patient cable
3 4. 1 x box neonatal ECG-electrodes (200 sets of 3 electrodes, chest
and/or extremities, diameter approx 22mm, ultra soft gel, self adhesive)
4 5. 2 x skin temperature transducers
5 6. 2 x reusable SpO2 sensors neonate, clip-on type (including
connection cable)
6 7. 10 x reusable SpO2 sensors neonate, wrap around type (including
connection cable)
7 8. 1 x spare rechargeable battery
8 9. 1 x spare set of fuse

19. DEFIBRILLATOR (BI-PHASIC)

1 1. Should be a Low Energy Biphasic defibrillator monitor with Recorder,
having capability to arrest all arrhythmia within a maximum energy of
360 Joules.
2 2. Should work on Manual and Automated mode.
3 3. Should monitor ECG through paddles, pads and monitoring electrodes
and Defibrillate through pads and paddles.
4 4. Should compensate for body impedance for a range of 25 to 1500hms. 4
5 5. Should be capable of doing synchronized cardioversion.
6 6. Should have a built in 50mm strip printer.
7 7. Should have charging time of less than 5 seconds for maximum energy.
8. Should have bright electroluminescent display for viewing messages and
ECG waveform of 4 seconds.
8 9. Should have external paddles with paddles contact indicator – for good
paddle contact. Both Adult and pediatric paddles should be available.

73
 0 10. Should have event summary facility for recording and printing at least
250 events and 50 waveforms.
1 11. Should have facility to store patient data in internal memory and on
data card typically more than 90 minutes of patient ECG &events.
9 12. Should have a battery capable of usage for at least 90minutes or 40
discharges.
10 13. Should be capable of printing Reports on Event summary,
configuration, self test, battery capacity etc.
11 14. Should have facility for self test/check before usage and set up function.
12 15. Should have SP02 and non invasive pacing facility.
13 16. Should be capable of delivering energy in increments of 1-2 joules up to
30J and increments of maximum 50J thereafter.

20. VITAL SIGN MONITOR

1. Monitor should be able to monitor ECG (5 leads). NIBP, Pulse Oximeter,
Body Temperature and Respiration.
2. Monitor should preferably have colour display and should display at
least two traces of different Colours.
3. Should have trend and listing facility for all parameters.
4. Alarms should be audio-visual and should have automatic and manual
alarm setting for all parameters. Should display alphanumeric alarm
messages.
5. Monitor should have inbuilt battery and inbuilt 1 channel thermal
recorder.
6. Should have 5 leads ECG (I, II, III, AVR, AVL, AVF and V), Should
measure NIBP from Neonates to adults. Should be supplied with
cuffs for neonates, pediatrics and adults.
7. Should have the facility to record BP when there are rapid circulation
changes between the cuff interval measurements.
8. Should also display the trend of circulation changes over a period of
time.
9. Should have an indicator displaying on screen the increase / decrease in
circulation status and also the normal /Alarming range.
10. Should be capable of Measuring Oxygen Saturation even in case of
Motion Artifact.
11. Should have selectable cuff interval from 1min. up to 3 hours.
12. Should have cuff measurements ending time.
13. Monitor should automatically measure the BP on any alarm condition.
14. Should display the waveform graph and pulse bar graph.
15. SpO2 should be ECG synchronized.
16. Should have change in pulse tone with rate.
17. Should be user friendly.

21. ECG MACHINE

1 1. Digital recorder of rest Electro Cardio Gram (ECG)
2 2. Records 12 standard leads simultaneous: aVR, aVL and aVF, I, II, III and
V1-6 pre-cordials.

74
 3 3. Automatic and manual printout mode
4 4. Internal memory for data storage
5 5. Splash-resistant alphanumeric keyboard and direct function keys
6 6. Reset zeroing, auto-base-line correction (0.5 Hz) and 1mV test
7 7. Electrode connection quality check
8 8. Filter setting for line-frequency (50 or 60 Hz) and tremor
9 9. Large back-lit LCD displays recorded data and failure announcements:
ECG- curves, leads, heart rate, patient name and ID, electrode control,
clock, leads, speed and filter setting
10 10. Integrated high-resolution 300 dpi thermal printer, width 210 mm
11 11. Print-out, folded thermo-reactive paper, format A4
12 12. Number of channels, selectable: 3, 6 or 12
13 13. Standard combination of channels or manually selectable
14 14. Paper speed, selectable: 5, 25 and 50 mm/sec
15 15. Sensitivity, automatic or selectable: 5, 10 and 20 mm/mV
16 16. Copy function
17 17. Built-in batteries and charging unit
18 18. When fully charged, the battery gives approx. 50 readings
19 19. Power requirements: 220 V / 50 Hz (with adapter) or internal re-
chargeable batteries (autonomy approx 6 hrs, automatic recharge)
20. Supplied with:
0 i. 1 x patient cable
1 ii. 6 x suction ball-type chest electrodes, reusable
2 iii. 4 x extremity clamp electrodes, reusable
3 iv. 1 x bottle of gel for electrodes
4 v. 1 x box of recording paper
5 vi. 1 x box ECG-electrodes (200 sets of 3 electrodes, chest and/or
extremities, diameter approx 22mm, ultra soft gel, self adhesive)
6 vii. 1 x spare set of fuses

22. PULSE OXI-METER

1. Oximeter must have the provision for all 3 types of probes connection i.e.
finger, toe or ear for both adult as well as pediatric and neonates.
2. It must have provision to use both disposable and reusable probes.
3. The display must indicate the oxygen saturation, heart rate, alarm limits
for oxygen saturation and pulse rate, bar graph indicating the pulse
amplitude, the plethysmograms and various system messages and error
messages.
4. Alarms should be present to indicate the violation of the set pulse limits
or set oxygen saturation limits.
5. Unit must also indicate the disconnection of the probe or the poor contact
of the probe and the patient, low perfusion, and low battery.
6. It must be compatible with the other equipments like patient monitors,
printers etc. for interfacing with them.

75
 7. Unit must be light weight and portable, with a battery back-up of
minimum 6 hours.
8. The system should supplied with following
i. System as specified- 01
1 ii. Reusable SPO2: Adult SPO2 sensor with cable- two nos. per monitor,
Paediatric and Neonate SPO2 sensors - one no. per monitor .

23. FUMIGATION MACHINE

1. Multipurpose, heavy-duty portable fumigation machine capable of
producing aerosols with particle size of less then 5 microns, for use in
critical and semi critical areas of hospital.
2. Body should be compact, durable, leak proof and made of stainless
steel /heavy duty plastic. The blower head should be rust proof and
deliver aerosols uniformly.
3. Machine should be compatible with all disinfectant solutions containing
silver nitrate, hydrogen peroxide in usual concentration. Machine should
be compatible with maximum Ph range (both acid and alkali).
4. The tank capacity should be 4-6 liters, with easy cleaning facility.
5. The machine should operate on 220 +/- 10 volts, 50 Hz, single phase, A.C
supply commonly used in Indian conditions.
6. The discharge rate should not be less than 1Liter/25 minutes.
7. The tank capacity, discharge rate and timer on the machine should be so
that the disinfectant should be able to disinfect 4000-5000 cubic feet in
one cycle of 2 hours (max).
8. The equipment should be of good quality and conform to
national/international standards.
9. Machine should be user friendly and have safety features.
10. Cable should be at least 5 meters in length, ISI marked.
11. Company should be able to demonstrate and train users on proper usage
of the fumigation machine in the user areas.

24. SUCTION MACHINE (Electrical)

1. High vacuum suction unit run on electricity.
2. It should be mobile unit
3. With two suction jars of approx 3 liters capacity each.
4. Auto cut off device for preventing entry of fluid in pump.
5. Fast and efficient jar change facility.
6. Easy access and control
7. It should be heavy duty and noiseless.
8. Should be able to create desired maximum vacuum in- least possible time.
9. One plastic suction jar cover, steam sterilisable to be provided extra.
10. Two extra suction jars (Plastic) of capacity 3 liters should be quoted with
accessories like lid, tubing etc.

25. SUCTION APPARATUS { FOOT OPERATING}

1. High vacuum suction unit run on manual (foot )
2. With two suction jars of approx 1 and 1 liters capacity each.

76
 3. Auto cut off device for preventing entry of fluid in pump.
4. Fast and efficient jar change facility.
5. Easy access and control
6. It should be portable
7. Should be able to create desired maximum vacuum in- least possible time.
8. One plastic suction jar cover, steam sterilisable to be provided extra.
9. Two extra suction jars (Plastic) of capacity 1 and 1 liters should be quoted
with accessories like lid, tubing etc.

26. OXYGEN CONCENTRATOR

1. To deliver 8 Litres /min
2. Dual Port (each can deliver 4 litres / min)
Advantage: can be connected to 2 patients at a time
3. 24 hour usable
4. Flow rate – 1-10lpm
5. Outlet pressure – 18-20 psig
Alarms – 1. Power failure, 2. High & Low pressure, 3. Low purity test, 4.
temperature Advantage: can be connected to 2 patients at a time
6. Advantage: can be connected to 2 patients at a time

27. BI – PAP
1. Non invasive
2. Working in 5 modes (S/ST/PC/ Timed/ C – page, Av APS).
3. Bipap Spontaneous or Spontaneous / timed

28. Specifications for Fetal Monitor

1. Should be compact and light weight
2. Easy to use menu system
3. Large illuminated display.
4. Modem and network connections for remote and integrated obstetric
management.
5. Graphical display – showing on screen FHR & Tocotraces
continuously.
6. 6 hour trace memory with fast print facility.
7. Automatic recording of fetal movements with actogram.
Accessories
a) Main unit
b) Ultra sound transducer
c) Toco transducer
d) Patient event marker
e) Gel, power cable, paper pack, user manual
General conditions
a) All equipments should match specifications
b) End user should certify the performance of the equipments and end user
have right to reject or accept the equipment after the demonstration

77
 EQUIPMENT LABORATARY-5
1. Blood Gas Auto Analizer
Bench top Blood Gas Analyser for use in critical care testing. Measured
parameters: pH, pCO2, pO2 , tHb, Oxygen Saturation - Na +, K+, Ca++, Cl- , Haematocrit
Additional Calculated Parameters: up to 30 Parameters. Maintenance-free
electrodes. Typically 70 micro liters of sample for up to 10 parameters. Sample
throughput: 30 samples per hour. Should accept whole blood and QC materials for
blood gas measurements. Should be able to generate Levy-Jennings plots from QC
measurements. Electrolytes should be measurable on whole blood, serum and
plasma, Dialysate solutions. Fully automatic liquid calibration for all parameters
using internally generated gases. No gas cylinders. .Economy mode should be
possible in automatic/manual modes. In-built data management package to store
patient results, QC results, calibration reports and self-diagnostics for up to two
months. Remote instrument control and HIS connectivity. Built-in graphic thermal
printer. Color touch screen. Bar code scanner for lab automation. Operating
conditions: Instrument: +15 deg C to +33 deg C Electrodes: +37 deg C Solutions: +15
deg C to +33 deg C Electrical Data: Mains voltage: 220 volts Frequency: 50 Hz

2. Specification for Blood gas analyzer with coximeter suitable for

point of care testing
1. Capability to measure pH, pCo2, Na+, K+,Cl+, Glucose,Lactate,

2. Provides calculated parameter FiO2, tHb, SO2%, p50, Standard Bicarb, HCo3
levels, Anionic gap, Hct,RI, Qt, VO2, DO2, BO2,

3. The instrument should preferably be able to do measurement and provide

results in single automated aspiration
4. Sample size should not exceed 200 micro liters
5 Should have built in printer to take out hard copy
6. Desirable to have adjustable color touch screen
7. The instrument should have large on board memory to store data over 3 to
5 thousand samples
8 The reagent packing should be such that that they are individualized to each
agent so that usage is optimized. There should be minimum wastage.

78
9. The price quoted should be inclusive of the cost of electrodes for minimum
period of 3 years. Should also provide sufficient sets of reagent / calibration and
flusing fluids or gas, free of cost in a span of one year or equivalent of 5000 tests.

10. Instrument should have well configured assembly of wet sections, tubing and
valve so that disconnection and breakage are minimized

11. The instrument should be provided with suitable analyzer management

system.

12. The reagents on board should have minimum expiry period of 12 months

13 To be provide a device which will uniformly mix heparin and blood, quickly
remove air bubble and eliminate clot formation.

14. Instrument should be CE / FDA / EU certified and comply with all electrical and
instrument regulations applicable of similar Lab / Medical equipment

15 To provide adequate training to at least 10 users in safe effective optimal

handling of the sample reagent and the instrument.

3. Spiro meter
windows based pulmonary function analysis system useful to conduct FVC, SVC,
MVV and broncho provocation challenge tests unique patients incentives for adult and
pediatric patients undergoing pulmonary tests to achieve maximum effort easily complete
system dedicated to provide a simple solution for evaluation of pulmonary functions Flow
meter method bi-directional digital turbine flow detection opto-electronic semiconductor
sensor volume range 14liter flow range 0.03- 20lts/sec flow accuracy +- 3% User
selectable predicted values ERS93,Knudson83, ITS white, ITS black, LAM, Barcelona,
Indian, user programmable Test method FVC, SVC, MVV tests conducted sequentially
optionally broncho challenges as per methacholine challenge protocols Database MSAccess
easy recall of any previous test Internet connectivity remote review dedicated BPL
arpimis software Upload methods test sent as emailattachments Physical characteristics
instrument dimensions 200mm x 150mmx80mm approximate instrument weight 250
grams standard accessories pneumotch 1no, serial cable with adapter 1no, software 1no,
pediatric adaptor 1nos, pediatric mouthpieces 15nos, adult mouthpieces 25nos, 25 to 9 pin
adapter 1nos 43a Suitable P.C. and Printer for above Spiro meter

4. SPECIFICATION OF HAND TUBE SEALER (Dielectric tube sealer)

1. Seal all types of blood bag tubes available in the market.

2. Leak proof seal

3. Sealing handle with coax cable 1.5 to 2 meters

4. Sealing time adjustable from 0.5 to 5 seconds

5. Body is made up of steel with power coating

79
6. Rechargeable battery capable of sealing more than 500 to 1000 seals, when
fully charged.

7. Works on 220 to 240 voltage, 50 – 60 Hz.

8. Shows battery status after every sealing.

9. Weight 2.5 to 4 Kg, including battery.

10. Suitable for mobile as well as stationary purpose.

11. Easy, manual operation

80
 EQUIPMENT NEPHROLOGY-6
1. Equipment Specifications for Haemodialysis Machine
1 Description of Function
1.1 Haemodialysis is a method for removing waste products as well as
free water from the blood when the kidneys are incapable of this.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Machine should have facility for Acetate, Bicarbonate and
Sequential dialysis (Isolated UF).
2.2 Can be linked with Patient Data Management System and should
be upgradable to future software developments
2.3 The blood pump should run even in the absence of water or
dialysate flow.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Should have facility for conventional and High flux dialysis.
3.2 Deleted
3.3 Deleted
3.4 Machine should have two bacterial filter (Pyrogen filters) one at
water inlet and one before water going to dialyser
3.5 Battery back-up for at least 30 minutes to run complete machine
with heater supply
3.6 Should have Na, Bicarbonate and UF profiling
3.7 Dialysate temperatures selectable between 35 degrees C to 39 deg.
C
3.8 Variable conductivity setting between 12 to 15
3.9 Should have variable dialysate flow 250-800 ml/mt
3.10 Should have facility to show trends curve of all parameter for 15-
20 minutes
3.11 Heparin pump with syringe sizes up to 50 ml with pump flow rate
from 1-10 ml/hr( 0.1 ml increments)
3.12 Stroke pressure operated short term single needle dialysis
(Optional)
3.13 Ultrafiltration 0.1 to 2.5 litres/hr.The in and out fluid circuit must
be separated so that there is no chance of contamination in the
event of membrane rupture.
3.14 Treatment parameter should be displayed by graph and digitally
both
3.15 Should have integrated heat (800C) and chemical disinfection
facility.
3.16 Should have accurate feedback control conductivity mixing
technique.
3.17 Should have drain facility.
3.18 Should have accurate UF control by flow measurement technique.
3.19 Extra facilities like Blood Volume sensor, Bicart Select technique
and online clearance kt/V (Optional)
3.20 All important data should be preset so that machine can be used
anytime without feeding data every time
3.21 Should have automatic self test facility
3.22 Should have auto ON/OFF Facility

81
 3.23 Should have touch button screen
3.24 Easy to service, troubleshoot and calibrate
3.25 Machine can be connected to computer to feed all data and trouble
shoot whenever any problem
3.26 Blood pump rate from 20-500 ml/min adaptable to all standard A-
V blood lines
3.27 Ability to monitor pulse rate and NIBP with graphic and tabulated
trends.
3.28 Audio visual alarms on limit violation of conductivity, blood leak,
air leak, transmembrane pressure alarms,, Dialysis temperature
alarm, dialysis can empty alarm, end of disinfection alarm, bypass
alarm and blood pump stop alarm
3.29 Alarm for reverse Ultra filtration.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost.
4.3 To be supplied free of cost
Bacterial filters– 2 sets extra , 100 polysulfone 1 m2 dialyzers and
tubings
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of
medical electric equipment part2- particular requirements for the
safety of Haemodialysis equipment.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty supported by the principal manufacturers.
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
7.6 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.

82
 8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. As per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out

2. Equipment Specifications for Continuous Renal Replacement

Therapy (CRRT) Machines
1 Description of Function
1.1 CRRT is indicated in any patient who meets criteria for
Haemodialysis therapybut cannot tolerate intermittent dialysis
due to hemodynamic instability. CRRT is better tolerated by
hemodynamically unstable patients because fluid volume,
electrolytes and pH are adjusted slowly and steadily over a 24
hour period rather than a 3 – 4 hour period.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Easy to handle and maintain.
2.2 Microprocessor/microcontroller controlled user interactive menu
with operating and malfunction removal instructions on display
screen
2.3 Should be light weight and portable with alloy wheels and brakes.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Four pumps, one each for Blood, Dialysate, Replacement fluid and
Effluent/filtrate.
3.2 Able to perform SCUF, CVVH, CVVHD, CVVHDF & PLASMA
EXCHANGE.
3.3 Clear touch screen TFT/LCD Monitor.
3.4 Blood pump speed of appr. 10-450 ml/min.
3.5 Close blood circuit to prevent air to blood interface.
3.6 Short preparation and priming program and ready to start
treatment within 10- 20 minutes.
3.8 Venous pressure range:(+)350 mmHg +/- 50 mmHg.
3.9 Pre Filter Pressure: 50mmHg to -500 mmHg
3.10 Effluent Pressure: 350 mmHg+/- 50 mmHg
3.11 Programmable Substitution solution flow rate: 0-5000 mL/Hr
3.12 Dialysate Flow rate: 0-2500 mL/Hr.
3.13 Programmable Effluent Flow Rate : 60-10000 mL/Hr
3.14 Deleted
3.15 Deleted
3.16 Integrated heparin pump with flow rate of 0.5 ml-5 mL/Hr. Bolus
facility range 0.5mL-5mL. Bolus frequency immediate 1-24 hrs.
3.17 Capable of changing therapies.

83
 3.18 Three weighing scales to control system with balancing accuracy
of less than 1% of total turnover in normal conditions and
weighing capacity of at least 0-20kg.
3.19 Integrated Fluid/Blood warmer for blood/dialysate warming temp
range app 33-40 deg C(+/- 3 deg C)
3.20 Ultrasonic air bubble detector and Blood leak Detector.
3.21 Alarm in case of blood leak, air in line, pressure limit violation,
empty dialysate/ replacement bag, full effluent bag and advisory
alarms in case of excessive TMP and filter clotting.
3.22 Should have a 30 mt Battery back up including Heater and pumps.
3.23 Should have an RS 232 Port for Data transfer and interface.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 The system should be compatible with Universal Heamodialysis/
Haemofiltartion
4.3 Should be supplied with 250 Nos of essential accessories such as
blood line set, haemofilters and ultrafiltrate bags at no extra cost.
4.4 All media and consumables for setting up and standardization
should be provided free of cost in addition to the items supplied in
4.3.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0-50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty supported by the principal manufacturers.
7.4 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of
medical electric equipment part2- particular requirements for the
safety of Haemodialysis equipment.
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
7.6 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.

84
 8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.

3. Equipment Specifications for Automatic PD Cycler

1 Description of Function
1.1 Automatic peritoneal dialysis (PD) Cycler is a system whereby
cyclically peritoneal dialysis is done and is quite useful during
sleeping hours.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Should be compact in size and easily portable
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Should have built in heater for warming the Fill solution at body
temperature
3.2 Should be able to measure fluid flow and volume without the use
of weighing scales
3.3 Deleted
3.4 Disposable set should have cassette and tubing lines pre loaded on
an organizer for simplified set up.
3.5 Should be simple to use. Machine should calculate automatically
the number of cycles and Dwell time per cycle once the patient
enters the total therapy time, total volume and fill volume.
3.6 Should perform a self check before starting the treatment.
3.7 Should have built in Nurses Menu and Service Menu.
3.8 Should have a built in Therapy Log and Alarm Log for simplified
troubleshooting.
3.9 In case of power failure the machine has a battery back up upto 2
hours for remembering the status of the therapy and it resumes
from the cycle from where it was left.
3.10 Therapy Parameters Limits and Increments:
1. Therapy volume: 200-65,000 ml( increments of 50 ml from
200 to 2000 ml, 100 ml from 2,000 to 5000 ml and 1000 ml
from 5,000 to 65,000 ml
2. Therapy Time: 10 min to 48 hours in increments of 10 mnt.
3. Fill Volume: 100-3,000 ml in increments of 10 mlfrom 100
to 500 ml , 50 ml from 500-1,000 ml and 100 ml from 1,000
to 3,000 ml.
4. Last fill volume: 0 ml , 100 ml to 3,000 ml in increments of
10 ml from 100 to 500 ml , 50 ml from 500-1,000 ml and
100 ml from 1,000 to 3,000 ml.
5. 11 Should be able to perform IPD also.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables

85
 4.1 System as specified-
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or
should comply with 89/366/EEC;EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-
60601 / IS18 13450
7.4 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual
7.5 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty supported by the principal manufacturers.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.4 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.
8.5 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.

4. Equipment Specifications for Haemodialysis Chair

1 Description of Function
1.1 Haemodialysis Chair is used for administrating dialysis to the
patients comfortably.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Should be ergonomically designed and comfortable to the patient
2.2 Should allow the patient to rest in full sitting position and lying
position.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Should have electronically controlled adjustments for back section,
leg section and height.
3.2 Should have a patient hand set with controls for all positions.

86
 3.3 Should have an option for manual operation of all controls
3.4 Armrest should fold to allow side entry of the patient.
3.5 Head rest should be detachable and should have manual
Trendelenburg facility.
3.6 Seat cushion should be removable, made of proper density foam
and should have a smooth surface for easy hygiene and cleaning.
3.7 Frame should be made up of corrosion free galvanized steel with
powder coating and should have four 150mm dia swiveling castor
wheels of which the front two should be lockable
3.8 Should be able to withstand a maximum load of 150 Kg.
3.9 Should have facility for online weight measurement (optional).
3.10 Dimensions(approx 5 cm): Width 63 cm x Length 195 cm( fully
stretched)x Adjustable Height( Min 56 cm; Max 78 cm from
ground)
3.11 Rubber buffers are to be provided
3.12 Should have a detachable drip stand and a tray table.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified-
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI
Specifications.( Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality
Standard.
7.3 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty supported by the principal manufacturers.
7.4 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual.
7.5 All electrical actuators and mechanisms should be housed inside
the structure making the product safer
7.6 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-
60601 / IS- 13450
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing
8.4 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the

87
 hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.
8.5 User list to be provided with performance certificate.
8.6 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.

5. Equipment Specifications for Dialyzer Reprocessor

1 Description of Function
1.1 Dialyzer reprocessors are systems which cleans the dialyzer for
reuse and reduce overall dialysis expenses .
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Should have fully automatic operation. In built dedicated software
should operate without external computer. Should have
connectivity with other reprocessors or external computers, if
needed.
2.2 4 station vacuum chamber venturi assembly up to 25 inches
vacuum to run on RO reject water/ tap water or a positive
pressure system.
2.3 Option of semiautomatic operation for customized cleaning.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Should be able to clean both high flux and low flux dialyzers and
hemo diafilters.
3.2 Should be safe for cellulose based and synthetic membranes.
3.3 Should be compatible with sterilants available in open market.
3.4 Should have LCD Screen and menu guided operations.
3.5 Should have 8-10 standard programs and facility of customized
programs.
3.6 Water requirements - flow 3 litres/ minute and pressure 35-50 psi.
3.7 It should have regulators, pressure gauges to monitor pressures.
3.8 It should perform leak test for dialyzers and assess fibre bundle
volume
3.9 It should have stainless steel sides and back
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 Also quote for single station machines of same specification
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0-50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 Vendor should specify the water, electricity and civil work
requirements for installation of the equipment.
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240 VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI
Specifications.( Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)
7 Standards, Safety and Training

88
 7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty supported by the principal manufacturers.
7.4 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
7.5 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out
8.6 User list to be provided with performance certificate.

6. Equipment Specifications for Water Treatment System for

Haemodialysis
1 Description of Function
1.1 Water Treatment system is required to produce pure water for
dialysis
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The system should be sufficient for online operation of 15-20
machines with pure water capacity of 1000-1200 litres per hour.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 The system should comprise of pre treatment modules such as
sand filter, activated carbon filter, water softener, 5 micron
particulate filter and deionizer before the reverse osmosis unit and
post R.O Bacterial Filters (1 micron) and UV light Disinfection for
yielding high purity water.
3.2 All pre treatment modules should have programmable back wash
and regeneration facility. These stages should be designed to
handle water flow of 1500-2000 litres/hour.
3.3 R.O. Unit should be compact in sleek cabinet, housing two R.O
membranes of equal output connected in parallel for being used
alternately every two- three hours by automated valves, a high
pressure pump and bypass mechanism. The control unit should be
microprocessor/ microcontroller controlled. A 5 micron filter
should protect the membrane.

89
 3.4 The entire unit should have adequate monitoring of input and
output water conductivity, feed water pressure and rejection flow
rate.
3.5 The system should have protection alarm against low feed water,
high output conductivity and high temperature of pump motor.
3.6 The system should include online water distribution to 15-20
machines in loop so that the unused water may be fed back to
treatment unit, thus saving on water rejection.
3.7 The unit should have programmable and automatic
rinsing/flushing facility, at regular intervals, when system is not in
use, to prevent drying of filter media and R.O. Membrane.
3.8 The system should have programmable disinfection /de-
calcification facility using commonly available disinfection /
decalcification chemicals.
3.9 The system should accept feed water with TDS upto 1500 mg/litre
and hardness up to 1 dH with 0.5% rejection of TDS & hardness
and 99% rejection of bacteria and endotoxins.
3.10 The unit should be designed for maximum saving of raw water,
with efficiency of 60-70%.
3.11 The water distribution loop, booster pump and storage water tank
should be made up of stainless steel. Storage water tank should
have capacity of at least 5000 litres with water level controller,
outlet valves and easy cleaning provisions.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified-
4.2 The vendor should provide a system on a turnkey basis including
all civil and electrical works including two booster pumps in
parallel for providing water delivery. The vendor should inspect
the site for this purpose.
4.3 The vendor should supply adequate filter cartridges, media or
resins to last for at least 3 years. The vendor may visit the site and
check the water quality.
4.4 The vendor should provide preventive maintenance which
includes chemical checks, bacterial and pyrogen checks
periodically during the warranty period.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The hospital will provide vacant space, water outlets and electrical
points as specified by the vendor. Other plumbing works and civil
works will have to be undertaken by the bidder. Vendor should
ensure that there is no environmental damage of any kind takes
place.
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input :220-240V/ 50 Hz AC Single phase or 380-400V AC 50
Hz Three phase fitted with appropriate Indian plugs and sockets.
7 Standards, Safety and Training

90
 7.1 Output water quality should match AAMI(Association for the
Advancement of Medical Instrumentation) standards for
Haemodialysis Water( Al < 0.01 mg/L; Ca < 2 mg/L; BACTERIA<
200 CFU/ml)
7.2 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.3 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty supported by the principal manufacturers.
7.5 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.
8.6 User list to be provided with performance certificate.

7. Equipment Specifications for Bed weighing Scale

1 Description of Function
1.1 Bed weighing Scale is required to measure patient's weight by
measuring the weight of the bed with and without patient.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Integrated mechanical lifters and equipment trolley.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Capacity : 300 Kg
3.2 Maximum Patient weight: 150 kg
3.3 Resolution: 100 gm up to 200 Kg: 200 gm above 200 Kg
3.4 Can be fixed under patient bed
3.5 Digital display can be fixed on the bed as well as on the wall.
3.6 Scale works on mains as well as rechargeable battery
3.7 The previously determined weight of the weight is noted in the
system and accurate weight of the patient is determined.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified-
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.

91
 5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10-40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Normal Power 220-240 Volts AC 50 Hz with a suitable adopter or
Battery Rechargeable
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-
60601-1 General Requirements
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty supported by the principal manufacturers.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing
8.4 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.
8.5 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
maintenance support as per manufacturer documentation in
service / technical manual

92
 EQUIPMENT UROLOGY-7
1. Equipment Specifications for Urodynamic System 6 Channel
(HIGH END)
1 Description of Function
1.1 The Urodynamic system should have a 6 channel microprocessor
based compact system with a high resolution color monitor for the
Urodynamic study for Neurovesical and erectile dysfunction The
equipment should be modular design and should be able to
carryout different tests like Uroflowmetry, Cystometry (CO2 &
H2O), Electromyography (EMG), Urethral pressure profile (UPP),
Pressure flow study (PFS), Video Urodynamics, Bladder/Valsalva
leak point measurement & Cavernosometry.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The equipment should be modular design and should be able to
carryout different tests like Uroflowmetry, Cystometry (CO2 &
H2O), Electromyography (EMG), Urethral pressure profile (UPP),
Pressure flow study (PFS), Video Urodynamics, Bladder/Valsalva
leak point measurement
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 The pre set program should be done on the screen according to
selected tests
3.2 There should be online monitoring of measurement up to six
parameters with simultaneous measurement of three direct
pressure studies like vesical, abdominal and urethral
3.3 There should be a high resolution, medical grade 17” TFT monitor
with speaker & microphone with a dedicated controlled keyboard,
mouse, speakers for EMG
3.4 Facility for fully automatic comprehensive patient filing & report
generation with editing/post processing mode. Appropriate
software for analysis of data including p-q Plot & Stress profile.
3.5 The pressure transducers should be of long life Statham
transducer so as to last for more than 8-10 years The
Uroflowmetry should have rotating disc transducer or weight
transducer so as to provide graphical representation of relation
between detrusor pressure and uro-flow rate
3.6 The equipment should have control panel inside the equipment to
avoid water spillage.
3.7 Advanced window based Software for operating, analyzing &
report generation with templates of full text.
3.8 Flowmetry : Range – 0-60ml/sec; Volume – 2 l Transducer –
Rotating disc type/weight transducer
3.9 Pressure Study : Range: 1 – 250 cm of water; Transducer – Long
life Statham type
3.10 EMG : One channel with inbuilt speaker & voice annotation, low
frequency
3.11 Water Pump Unit : Infusion Rate – 2-10ml/min, Increment –
1ml/min –10-100ml/min, Increment – 5ml/min

93
 3.12 Console : Pentium Duo Core 2.5 GHz or more with a hard disk
drive (HDD) –120GB & RAM-512MB, DVD-writer 18X or more for
recording of DVDs/CDs
3.13 Equipment should have Uro-Video system with facility to super-
impose the bladder images on graph tracing and PIP with graph
tracing. Facility for Digital video recording
3.14 Patient Unit should include :Trolley –1, Pole – 1, 17” Monitor
with speakers & microphone-1, Water Pump Unit with 30 infusion
sets, EMG Module-1, Pressure Transducer Statham-3,
Uroflowmetry transducer-1, Puller for urethral pressure profile
study.
3.15 Software in Original: Windows XP, Office XP - Latest &
compatible
3.16 Facility to connect with hospital information system (HIS - VII) and
to transfer data through cable.
3.17 Suitable Micturition chair - separate
3.18 The Urodynamic system should be up gradable for future with
technical advances
3.19 Suitable Laser Printer.
3.20 Suitable C – Arm with 9” IITV and diagnostic Ultrasound system to
be integrated with the Urodynamic system.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost as mentioned below:
Dampening tube-24, Two lumen catheter-12, Infusion set-12, Y-
Piece-4, Three way stop cork-50, Disposable Domes-50, Rectal
catheter-4, , Concentric needle electrode-10, Ground Electrode-4,
Surface Electrode-12, Pressure line (150cm) – 50, Anal plug
electrode – 2
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA, CE, UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of
medical electric equipment part2- particular requirements for the
safety of Haemodialysis equipment.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
8 Documentation

94
 8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in
service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist.
The job description of the hospital technician and company service
engineer should be clearly spelt out

2. Equipment Specifications for Urodynamic System 6 Channel

(Low End)
1 Description of Function
1.1 The Urodynamic system should have a 6 channel microprocessor
based compact system with a high resolution color monitor for the
Urodynamic study for Neurovesical and erectile dysfunctionThe
equipment should be modular design and should be able to
carryout different tests like Uroflowmetry, Cystometry (CO2 &
H2O), Electromyography (EMG), Urethral pressure profile (UPP),
Pressure flow study (PFS), Video Urodynamics, Bladder/Valsalva
leak point measurement & Cavernosometry.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The equipment should be modular design and should be able to
carryout different tests like Uroflowmetry, Cystometry (CO2 &
H2O), Electromyography (EMG), Urethral pressure profile (UPP),
Pressure flow study (PFS), Video Urodynamics, Bladder/Valsalva
leak point measurement
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 The pre set program should be done on the screen according to
selected tests
3.2 There should be online monitoring of measurement up to six
parameters with simultaneous measurement of three direct
pressure studies like vesical,abdominal and urethral
3.3 There should be a high resolution, medical grade 17” TFT monitor
with speaker & microphone with a dedicated controlled keyboard,
mouse, speakers for EMG
3.4 Facility for fully automatic comprehensive patient filing & report
generation with editing/post processing mode. Appropriate
software for analysis of data including p-q Plot & Stress profile.
3.5 The pressure transducers should be of long life Statham
transducer so as to last for more than 8-10 years The
Uroflowmetry should have rotating disc transducer or weight
transducer so as to provide graphical representation of relation
between detrusor pressure and uro-flow rate

95
 3.6 The equipment should have control panel inside the equipment to
avoid water spillage.
3.7 Advanced window based Software for operating, analyzing &
report generation with templates of full text.
3.8 Flowmetry : Range – 0-60ml/sec; Volume – 2 l Transducer –
Rotating disc type/weight transducer
3.9 Pressure Study : Range: 1 – 250 cm of water; Transducer – Long
life Statham type
3.10 EMG : One channel with inbuilt speaker & voice annotation, low
frequency
3.11 Water Pump Unit : Infusion Rate – 2-10ml/min, Increment –
1ml/min–10 100ml/min, Increment – 5ml/min
3.12 Console : Pentium Duo Core 2.5 GHz or more with a hard disk
drive (HDD) –120GB & RAM-512MB, DVD-writer 18X or more for
recording of DVDs/CDs
3.13 Equipment should have Uro-Video system with facility to super-
impose the bladder images on graph tracing and PIP with graph
tracing. Facility for Digital video recording
3.14 Patient Unit should include :
Trolley –1, Pole – 1, 17” Monitor with speakers & microphone-1,
Water Pump Unit with 30 infusion sets, EMG Module-1, Pressure
Transducer Statham-3, Uroflowmetry transducer-1, Puller for
urethral pressure profile study.
3.15 Software in Original: Windows XP, Office XP - Latest &
compatible
3.16 Facility to connect with hospital information system (HIS - VII) and
to transfer data through cable.
3.17 Suitable Micturition chair - separate
3.18 The Urodynamic system should be up gradable for future with
technical advances
3.19 Suitable Laser Printer.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost as mentioned below:
Dampening tube-24, Two lumen catheter-12, Infusion set-12, Y-
Piece-4, Three way stop cork-50, Disposable Domes-50, Rectal
catheter-4, Concentric needle electrode-10, Ground Electrode-4,
Surface Electrode-12, Pressure line (150cm) –50, Anal plug
electrode – 2
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA, CE, UL or BIS approved product

96
 7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of
medical electric equipment part2- particular requirements for the
safety of Haemodialysis equipment.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out

3. Equipment Specifications for Electro Surgical Generator with

Argon Beam Coagulation
1 Description of Function
1.1 ESUs are used for surgical cutting and for controlling bleeding by
causing coagulation (hemostasis) at the surgical site. They deliver
high-frequency electrical current through an active electrode tip,
causing desiccation,vaporization, or charring by resistive heating
in the target tissue. Using argon gas to enhance electrosurgical
coagulation allows for rapid hemostasis on bleeding surfaces of
highly vascularized organs. Argon-enhanced systems are also used
to control bleeding in other tissues, such as bone marrow, lung
tissues, kidney and muscle
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Microprocessor/Microcontroller technology with two or more
generators
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Should have facility to use gas argon coagulator
3.2 Should provide mono polar cut in 4 or more levels, mono polar
coagulation in 3 or more levels bipolar cut in 2 or more levels,
bipolar coagulation in 3 or more levels or with automatic bipolar
coagulation
3.3 Optional combined bipolar cutting and coagulation
3.4 Sinusoidal wave form
3.5 Activation by double pedal foot switch and hand switch
3.6 Activation of bipolar by foot switch and automatic start/stop
system

97
 3.7 Auto diagnosis on switching on and during working to
continuously monitor all
3.8 Automatic stoppage of output in case of malfunction with acoustic
and visual signal with display of error code.
3.9 Output powers adjustable automatically or manually by membrane
keys or push buttons
3.10 Four or more programmable memory for output settings
3.11 Simultaneous access to mono and bipolar by 2 or more users
3.12 Should be usable with laparoscopic mono polar and bipolar
instruments
3.13 System for neutral plate safety by continuous monitoring of
contact quality and connection
3.14 System for monitoring and control of leakage current
3.15 Frequency leakage on the patient should be less than 10 micro
Amp.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 The accessories should include portable trolley, mains cable, foot
switches for mono and bipolar, reusable and single use neutral
electrode for adults and children, cable for neutral electrode, fixing
belt for neutral electrode (paed/adult),securing buttons for fixing
belt, sterilisable and or disposable electrode handle with and
without finger switch, cable for electrode handle, set of electrodes
(long and short), electrode container with holder, tip cleaner,
bipolar forceps, cable for bipolar forceps, cable for connecting to
mono polar laparoscopic instruments
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMCdirective.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI
Specifications. (Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA, CE, UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Certified to be compliant with IEC 60601-2-2 Medical Electrical
Equipment Part 2-2: Particular requirements for the safety of High
Frequency Surgical Equipments
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
7.6 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to

98
 carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.

4. Equipment Specifications for ENDOVISION SYSTEM with

PCNL set
1 Description of Function
1.1 Endovision systems allow the viewing of live, color images of the
interior of the body during diagnostic and therapeutic endoscopic
procedures. They also enable these images to be stored, retrieved,
and otherwise electronically manipulated.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Systems should comprise modular image detection/processing
systems, monitors, and documentation devices, as well as other
accessories and mobile cart.
2.2 Adult (standard & Miniperc) and Paediatric PCNL Set should also
be quoted
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Endovision Camera Specifications: 3CCD chip (3x1/2”), Digital
Camera- PAL Resolution > 750 horizontal lines, Digital and Optical
Zoom function which can be activated via both from camera head
as well as from control unit. Minimum sensitivity 3-4 lux (f 1.4),
Auto exposure control (1/60-1/10000s), Auto white balance with
memory function, 2 preset function keys on the camera head to
control camera functions, camera head should be light weight.
Video output-composite signal to BNC socket, Y/C signal to S-VHS-
socket, RGB signal to BNC socket. The camera should be quoted
with the CCU, camera head, connecting cables for printers and
recorders, BNC, S-VHS (Y/C), Digital Video output and RGBsync.
Connecting cables, Keyboard for character generation
3.2 Color monitor: Medical grade High resolution PAL, 17” TFT
Monitor (SONY Make), S-VHS, RGB compatibility & Digital Video
output.
3.3 Specifications Light Source:
• Xenon light Source
• Should have lamp power > 300 watt, along with dual bulb
• Light Intensity Continuously adjustable

99
 • Colour temperature should be > 6000 K.
• Should have bulb life indicator. Bulb life should be
guaranteed for a minimum of 500 hrs 3.4 Light Cable:
• Fiber optic light cable autoclavable
• Length 350cm
• Diameter should be 4.8mm
3.5 Digital video recording, editing, image management and archival
system.
3.6 Nephroscopes:
i) For Adult Set (Standard and long length): Wide angle
straightforward telescope(s) 6 degrees with parallel
eyepiece, autoclavable, with leur lock connection, with
instrument channel. Fibre light transmission incorporated.
Light post adapter for Storz, Olympus and Wolf light cables.
ii) For Adult Set (Miniperc): Wide angle straightforward
telescope 6 degrees with parallel eyepiece, autoclavable,
with leur lock connection, with instrument channel. Fibre
light transmission incorporated. Light post adapter for
Storz, Olympus and Wolf light cables.
iii) For Paediatric set: Wide angle straightforward telescope 6
degrees with offset eyepiece compatible with 17/18Fr
Sheath, autoclavable, with leur lock connection, with
instrument channel. Fibre light transmission incorporated.
Light post adapter for Storz, Olympus and Wolf light cables.
3.7 Metallic Telescoping Dilation set, set of 8 dilators, sizes
9,12,15,18,21, 24,27 & 30 Fr, along with one rigid and one flexible
guide rod.
3.8 Metallic Alken dilator and cannula - One set
3.9 Operating Sheaths:
a) 26Fr Adult Sheath(s) with obturator (short and long) with
continuous irrigation and suction
b) Miniperc Sheath 17/22 Fr
c) 17/18Fr paediatric Sheath compatible with the above
nephroscope
3.10 Grasping forceps, alligator jaws & spring handle – Two numbers
3.11 Grasping forceps, 3 expanding jaws and small fixation spikes with
spring handle - Two numbers.
3.12 Biopsy forceps, double action jaws
3.13 Suction tube
3.14 Appropriate rigid storage case.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified along with compatible accessories as specified
from 3.10 to 3.14 for Adult, Miniperc and Paediatrics.
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply

100
 6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 30 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality
Standard.
7.3 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.4 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-
60601 / IS- 13450
7.5 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have
the necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to
carry out preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided
in the service/maintenance manual.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.

5. Equipment specifications for extracorporeal shockwave

lithotriptor (E.S.W.L.) (high end)
1 Description of Function
1.1 Renal extracorporeal lithotripter systems noninvasively
disintegrate kidney stones with focused shock waves, allowing the
resulting sand-size fragments to pass out of the body during
urination.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Completely integrated system with Fluoroscopy and Ultrasound
guided stone localization and targeting along with digital
documentation and patient data management system is required.
The system should be compatible with Hospital Information
System (HIS - VII).
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Shockwave Generator: Type: Electromagnetic Triggering: Manual,
Automatic & ECG gating. Pulse Frequency: = 60 – 120 per minute
(User Selectable) Penetration Depth>=130 mm Pressure at focus.
Minimum 20 MPa or less, Maximum 50 MPa or more Energy level:
User Selectable & Variable The Shock wave Generator should be
guaranteed for minimum of one million shockwaves

101
 3.2 Imaging System: Integrated non detachable Fluoroscopy Should
have high frequency generator and allow pulse fluoroscopy. kV
Range: 40-110 kV mA Range: 4 – 8 mA Focal Spot Sizes: Dual:
0.3/0.6 and 0.6/1.2/1.5 Image Intensifier Size: 9 inches.
Collimation: Motorized, Iris collimator. Post Exposure Image
Enhancement facility. Imaging System Ultrasound: High resolution
ultrasound system Localization should be done through integrated
Ultra-sound iso centric to the shock wave source with
inline/outline transducer for best image quality
Transducer:
I) 3.5 /5 MHz Convex Sector
II) Ultrasound system should be able to accept 6.0-7.5 MHz
electronic biplane trans rectal probe. Mode: B Coupling arm
to integrate the ultrasound probe with shockwave
generator.
3.4 Patient Table System:
i) Fluoroscopy compatible, motorized patient Table with
Vertical, Longitudinal and lateral movements. Facility for
tilt and trendelenburg. Patient load capacity of app 150 Kg.
ii) The table should be provided with accessories suitable for
urological endoscopic procedures
3.5 Flouroscopic Imaging System: 17 inches LCD Display with data
storage and image storage. Minimum storage would be 1000
images with 1024x1024x(12 bits)
3.6 Patient Monitoring: Monitoring of ECG, RESPIRATION, SpO2 and
Arrhythmia.
3.7 Separate Remote Console with facility for:
i) Controlling imaging, computerized stone localization,
targeting and shockwave parameters
ii) Patient monitoring
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0-50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 Pre Requsites should be clearly spelt out in terms of room
requirements, civil and electrical works.
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input: 220-240V/ 50 Hz AC Single phase or 380-400V AC 50
Hz Three phase fitted with appropriate Indian plugs and sockets.
6.2 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI
Specifications. (Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA, CE, UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Should be compliant to ISO 13485: Quality systems - Medical
devices – Particular requirements for the application of ISO 9001

102
 applicable to manufacturers and service providers that perform
their own design activities.
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-
60601-1 General Requirements
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and provision of AMC for
next 5 years.
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spares and accessories with their part number
and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.
8.6 Must submit user list and performance report within last 5 years
from major hospitals.

6. Equipment specifications for extracorporeal shockwave

lithotriptor (E.S.W.L.) (low end)
1 Description of Function
1.1 Renal extracorporeal lithotripter systems noninvasively
disintegrate kidney stones with focused shock waves, allowing the
resulting sand-size fragments to pass out of the body during urination.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Complete system with Fluoroscopy and Ultrasound guided stone
localization and targeting is required.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Shockwave Generator: Type: Electromagnetic Triggering: Manual,
Automatic & ECG gating. Pulse Frequency: = 60 – 120 per minute
(User Selectable) Penetration Depth>=130 mm Pressure at focus.
Minimum 20 MPa or less, Maximum 50 MPa or more Energy level:
User Selectable & Variable The Shock wave Generator should be
guaranteed for minimum of one million shockwaves
3.2 Imaging System: Fluoroscopy Should have high frequency
generator and allow pulse fluoroscopy. kV Range: 40-110 kV mA
Range: 4 – 8 mA Focal Spot Sizes: Dual: 0.3/0.6 and 0.6/1.2/1.5
Image Intensifier Size: 9 inches. Collimation: Motorized, Iris
collimator. Post Exposure Image Enhancement facility. Coupling
arm to integrate the C – Arm with shockwave generator.
3.3 Imaging System Ultrasound: High resolution ultrasound system

103
 Localization should be done through integrated Ultra-sound iso
centric to the shock wave source with inline/outline transducer for
best image quality
Transducer:
I) 3.5 /5 MHz Convex Sector
II) Ultrasound system should be able to accept 6.0-7.5 MHz
electronic biplane trans rectal probe.
Mode: B Coupling arm to integrate the ultrasound probe
with shockwave generator.
3.4 Patient Table System:
i) Fluoroscopy compatible, motorized patient Table with
Vertical, Longitudinal and lateral movements. Facility for
tilt and trendelenburg. Patient load capacity of app 150 Kg.
ii) The table should be provided with accessories suitable for
urological endoscopic procedures
3.5 Flouroscopic Imaging System: 17 inches LCD Display with data
storage and image storage. Minimum storage would be 1000
images with 1024x1024x(12 bits)
3.6 Patient Monitoring: Monitoring of ECG, RESPIRATION, SpO2 and
Arrhythmia.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2:2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0-50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 Pre Requsites should be clearly spelt out in terms of room
requirements, civil and electrical works.
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input: 220-240V/ 50 Hz AC Single phase or 380-400V AC 50
Hz Three phase fitted with appropriate Indian plugs and sockets.
6.2 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI
Specifications. (Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA, CE, UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Should be compliant to ISO 13485: Quality systems - Medical
devices – Particular requirements for the application of ISO 9001
applicable to manufacturers and service providers that perform
their own design activities.
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-
60601-1 General Requirements
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and provision of AMC for
next 5 years.
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.

104
 8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spares and accessories with their part number
and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.
8.6 Must submit user list and performance report within last 5 years
from major hospitals.

7. Equipment Specifications for Flexible Cysto-Nephroscope (High

End)
1 Description of Function
1.1 The Flexible Cysto – Nephroscope with employs an ultra-miniature
digital video CMOS sensor placed directly at the tip of the
endoscope that captures full-motion video images in digital format.
Illumination of the surgical site is provided by white light LEDs that are
built into the endoscope. This illumination technology eliminates the need
for a separate high-intensity light source and related cables.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The Flexible Cysto-Nephroscope is used for transurethral and
percutaneous nephroscopic procedures. It is ideal for bedside
cystoscopy / office practice under local analgesia as well as during
operating procedures and anaesthesia. Large working channel to
accommodate full range of operating instruments for therapeutic
applications. The flexible shaft, small outer diameter, and beveled,
ultra-glide covered tip to provide minimal traumatic access.
Should be suitable for gas as well as chemical sterilization.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Field Of View: 110 degree or better Length: 37 cm (approx) Direction Of
View: Straight forward (zero to six degrees).Working Channel: 6.0 Fr or
better Distal tip Diameter: 14.0 Fr (approx)
3.2 Compatible Accessories
(i) Grasping forceps – 2 Nos.
(ii) Biopsy forceps – 2 Nos.
(iii) Ball tip Fulgurating electrode 5 Fr – 2 Nos.
(iv) Luer Lock Y connector Biopsy port
(v) Soak disinfection tray
(vi) Cleaning brush – 2 Nos.
(vii) Appropriate rigid storage case
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost.
5 Environmental factors

105
 5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 30 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA, CE, UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of
medical electric equipment part2- particular requirements for the
safety of Haemodialysis equipment.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab / OT staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out

8. Equipment Specifications for Flexible Cysto– Nephroscope(Low

End)
1 Description of Function
1.1 The Flexible Cysto – Nephroscope is used for diagnosis and
therapeutic treatment of bladder and kidney especially suitable for
office procedure / bedside procedure under local anaesthesia as
well as for operating procedure under anaesthesia.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 The Flexible Cysto-Nephroscope is used for transurethral and
percutaneous nephroscopic procedures. It is ideal for bedside
cystoscopy / office practice under local analgesia as well as during
operating procedures and anaesthesia. Large working channel to
accommodate full range of operating instruments for therapeutic
applications. The flexible shaft, small outer diameter, and beveled,
ultra-glide covered tip to provide minimal traumatic access.
Should be suitable for gas as well as chemical sterilization.
3 Technical Specifications

106
 3.1 Length: 37 cm (approx) Direction Of View: Straight forward (zero
to six degrees). Working Channel: 6.0 Fr or better Distal tip
Diameter: 14.0 Fr (approx) Tip deflection: 140 degree (down) –
210 degree (up) Angle of view: About 110 degrees
3.2 Compatible Accessories
(viii) Grasping forceps – 2 Nos.
(ix) Biopsy forceps – 2 Nos.
(x) Ball tip Fulgurating electrode 5 Fr – 2 Nos.
(xi) Luer Lock Y connector Biopsy port
(xii) Soak disinfection tray
(xiii) Cleaning brush – 2 Nos.
(xiv) Appropriate rigid storage case
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 30 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA, CE, UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of
medical electric equipment part2- particular requirements for the
safety of Haemodialysis equipment.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab / OT staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out

107
9. Equipment Specifications for O.T. Table for Urology
1 Description of Function
1.1 A dedicated system for Urological surgery (Endoscopic as well as
open surgeries).
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Multi purpose powered OT table, C- Arm Fluoroscopic compatible,
suitable for all major surgical procedures, complete with a corded
handset with battery level indicators (choice of IR handset should
also be available) and moulded, anti-static, seamless mattress.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Table should feature of sliding table top with a traverse of
minimum of 250mm or more, either Cranially or Caudally
3.2 Full length X-ray translucent top with removable &
interchangeable head and leg sections with an auto-locking
mechanism.
3.3 Table must allow for unrivalled C-arm access and kidney break
positioning without the need to move the patient.
3.4 The handset should offer controls for trendelenberg / reverse
trendelenberg, lateral tilt, flexion/extension (90/230 degree),
longitudinal tabletop traverse and height functions (min. height
around 700-800mm and max. height around 1000- 1200mm).
3.5 The brakes, wheels and castors should be controlled by two foot
pedals provided at either end of the table
3.6 The table should feature an integrated stand by panel for
controlling the movements in case of handset loss or battery
failure
3.7 The Table stem should be located under the middle of the back
section making the tabletop eccentric.
3.8 Table should be able to carry heavy patients and have a capacity of
up to 300kgs with an option for width extension of obese patients.
3.9 Table should also be suitable for tall patients and have a length of
at least 2000 mm
3.10 Table should offer low minimum height enabling the surgeon to
operate even when seated
3.11 The table should have divided leg section with mattresses, arm
board & universal clamp
3.12 Should have facilities for manual operations in case of power
failures.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 The table should be supplied with following necessary accessories
including knee crutches:
a. Arm supports – 2
b. Gel heel pads – 1 pair
c. Patient positioning gel strap, 200-250cms – 1
d. Hand Surgery Board – 1
e. Anaesthetic screen with sleeve – 1
f. Lithotomy Poles/crutches with pads – 1 pair
g. Douche tray with strainer to be fixed with table – 1

108
 h. Elevated Arm Support - 1
i. Freddicks Lloyd Davis Stirrups – 1 pair
j. Fluoroscopic compatible Kidney Bridges
k. Padded head, shoulder and arm rest – 1 set each
l. Padded lateral support and shoulder supports – 1 set
m. Appropriate accessories’ clamp.
4.3 Table should be quoted with Suitable Chair for the surgeon for
endoscopic procedures,1
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2: 2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General
Requirements of Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility or
should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMCdirective.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0-50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI
Specifications.(Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Should have current leakage less than 70 U/A AC (0.07m Amp).
7.3 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and
quarterly maintenance checklist. The job description of the
hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out.

10. Equipment Specifications for Uretero-Renoscope (Semi Rigid)

1 Description of Function
1.1 Minimally invasive Fibre optic, endoscopic instrument for
diagnosis and treatment of diseases of ureter and kidney.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Integrated fibre optic semi rigid ureterorenoscope for using in
adult and paediatrics upper urinary tract endoscopic surgery
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Long Arm (Length ~ 420mm)

109
 Autoclavable with offset Eyepiece, Distal sheath tip 7.5 – 8 FR, 5-8
degree with working channel of 5 – 6FR. Irrigation channel and
accessory Instruments including double instrument port with 425
mm working length. -Grasping forceps 5FR with working length
550 mm – 2 Nos. -Biopsy forceps 5FR with working length 550 mm
-Path finder plus bulb irrigator
3.2 Long Arm (Length ~ 420mm) Autoclavable with offset Eyepiece,
Distal sheath tip 6 – 6.5 FR, 5-8 degree with working channel of
4FR. Accessory Instruments including irrigation channel and
instrument port. -Appropriate Grasping forceps. – 2 Nos.
-Appropriate Biopsy forceps – 1No. -Path finder plus bulb irrigator
3.3 Short Arm (Length ~ 320mm) Autoclavable with offset Eyepiece,
Distal sheath tip 6 – 6.5 FR, 5-8 degree with working channel of
4FR. Accessory Instruments including irrigation channel and
instrument port. -Appropriate Grasping forceps. – 2 Nos.
-Appropriate Biopsy forceps – 1No. -Path finder plus bulb irrigator
`stem Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified- along with light post adaptor for STORZ/
Olympus/ Wolf light cable
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of
system to be given free of cost.
4.3 Appropriate Rigid Storage Box.
5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient
temperature of 0 - 50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
temperature of 10 - 40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection
for 60 minutes back up.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality
standards.
7.3 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of
medical electric equipment part2- particular requirements for the
safety of Haemodialysis equipment.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after
warranty
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till
familiarity with the system.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine
Preventive Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer
documentation in service/technical manual.

110
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part
number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital
technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out

111
 EQUIPMENT OPHTHALMOLOGY N ENT- 8
1. Slit Lamp Biomicroscope
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
1. Main Microscope Galilean, 5 Steps Magnification
2. Eye pieces 12.5x
3. Diopter Adjustment From + 6 to -6
4. Interpupilary Distance Adjustable from 55mm-75mm
5. Working Distance 100mm
6. Magnification Mannual 5 Step 6x, 10x, 16x, 25x, 40x
7. Field of View (in mm) 35, 23, 14, 8, 7, 5, 6
8. Slit Width 0 to14 mm
9. Slit length 0 to 14 mm
10. Slit Appertures 0.2, 1.3, 4.6, 10,14mm/
11. Slit Angles 0-180 deg.
12. Slit inclination 5,10,15,20 Deg
13. Filter Heat Absorbing Filter and UV, GREEN and BLUE Filters
14. Light source 12V/30W,Halogen
15. Movement Ranges :
0 i. Longitutional in/out 118mm
1 ii. Lateral (left/Right) 99mm
2 iii. Vertival (Up/Down) 30mm
3 iv. Chinrest Range 55mm
16. Voltage 220-240V,50/60Hz.

2. Photoslit Lamp
Imaging and Documentation System :
It should have the following features and facilities :
1 1) Live on screen view
0 2) Should come with Sony Firewire camera for still and movie capture
documentation software
2 3) Comprehensive Database with search and querry functions.
3 4) Unique patient identification.
4 5) User definable database.
5 6) Single and 4 –up image display.
6 7) Automatic archiving.
7 8) System Administration with password protection..
8 9) Import & export functions.
9 10) Image copy to email
10 11) User definable image compression
11 12) Brightness, contrast and gamma control
12 13) Image Zoom and resize
13 14) Red – Free, Negative, Green filter
14 15) Rotate & Invert image
15 16) Sharpening and Box Enhancement
16 17) Patient and Image Notes
17 18) Image annotation
18 19) Grading and Reporting

112
19 20) Multiple Print format and contact sheey print
20 21) Crash protection
21 22) Stereo image viewing
22 23) On-line help
23 24) It should have the facility of DICOM export.
24 25) Compatible PC should be provided
Slit lamp with specifications
1) Should have illumination from top using tungsten filament bulb capable of
giving illumination intensity up to 600,000Lux.
2) Magnification from 6.3X to 40X in 5 steps having steps at 6.3, 10,16, 25
and 40X.
3) Diameter of field should be from 32 mm to 5.1mm.
4) Slit length 0.2 to 8mm
5) Eyepieces of 12.5X.
6) Facility to tilt the slit image up to 20deg should be available.
7) Should have the facility for stereoscopic examination of fundus where in
Angle on stereoscopic observation can be reduced from 13deg to 4.5deg
to have better view of eyes with small pupil or high myopia.
8) Adaptor for Inclined Eye- piece to enable the viewing into the microscope
is inclined at 20° to the horizontal – thus enabling the examiner to keep
his head in a fatigue free position.
9) Should have the facility to attach beam splitter and adaptor for digital
camera.
10) Imaging with this slit lamp should be flash free.
11) Should have the facility of background illumination through a cold light
source.
12) Original Goldman Applanation tonometer
13) Spring balanced table for slit lamp.

3. Direct Ophthal Moscope

1 1. Battery operated
2 2. Light source –halogen bulb 3.5 V
3 3. Red-free filter should be available
4 4. Should have 6 more apertures for use: small and large spot sizes,
fixation target, slit aperture, hemi spot and Cobalt blue filter.
5 5. Wheel control, with lens powers ranging from +20D to -35D in single
diopter steps up to 10D and 5D steps above that.
6 6. Illuminated lens dial
7 7. Rubber brow rest
8 8. Dust free sealed optics and a spherical optical system
9 9. Good quality carrying box(original)
10 10. Sturdy large battery handles, with rheostat adjustment.
11 11. Standard accessories : spare halogen bulbs {10 Nos.}

113
 4. Indirect Ophthalmoscope
1 1. Weight of Head band with Light weight 500-600 gm with soft
cushioning and non slip contoured ophthalmoscope metallic head
band.
2 2. Bulb 6V with easy fit, push in (halogen bulb)
3 3. Illumination 2000lux, rheostat-On head band & Illumination should be
adjustable from 100% to 2% of max required
4 4. Diffuser Should have both wireless and must run for100min with
battery rechargeable on lithium batteries with 2 extra batteries with
charger
5 5. Transformer runs with wide angle run.
6 6. Filters 4
0 a. Diffuse,
1 b. Yellow
2 c. Blue
3 d. Green
7 7. Barriers UV & IR barriers
8 8. Mirror Height Controllable
9 9. Hi Magnification Lens with flipped in & out facility.
10. Apertures Adjustable for large, intermediate & small pupil.
10 11. Independent image alignment control
11 12. Original case
12 13. Teaching Mirror
14. Illumination control from head band & also from step down
transformer
13 15. Scleral Indentor Large & small with +20D aspheric lens.

5. Auto Refractometer
a) Refraction Measurement : Sphere – 25 + 25D ( 0.01/0 0.25D cylinder 0~ ±
10D (0.01/0.12) 0.25D step Axis Angle 0~ 180° (1° step).
14 b) Vertex Distance : 0, 10, 12, 13.5, 15mm
15 c) Minimum Pupil Diameter : dia 2.3mm
16 d) Pupillary Distance : Measurement range 85m (1mm step)
17 e) Printer : should have the facility to take print outs .
18 f) Internal Monitor : 5.6 inch LCD display ( color)
19 g) Movable distance : Back/force ± 17mm right/left ± 43mm, up/down ±
17mm
20 h) Movable distance of chinrest : ± 30 mm

6. Tonometer- Non Contact

1 1. Air Puff non contact tonometer to measurer IOP without actual eye
contact.
2 2. Should have facility for Digital display of IOP ,
3 3. The minimum measuring range should be from 4 to 59 mmHg.
4 4. Displayed accuracy ± 1mmHg.

114
7. Applanation Tonometer
1 1. It can be use for the rapid and accurate intraocular pressure
measurements.
2 2. It should have micro strain guage Transducer
3 3. The range of measurements should be 5-80 mmHg
4 4. It should have rapid scan facility at the rate of 500 samples /second.
5 5. It should have battery operating facility

8. Keratometer
1 1. It should have facility for High accuracy measurements of corneal and
contact lens radii
2 2. The facility for determination of corneal astigmatism should be there.
3 3. It should have minimum Range from 4mm to 13mm radius with
0.01mm increments.
4. It should have Halogen lamp illumination and Steel balls standard
radius for calibration.

9. Motorized Table
1 1. Instrument table can able to operate with both push button and foot
pedal
2 2. It should ensure Upward and downward movements,
3 3. It should have powder coated body
4 4. It should mount on base with four castor wheels with lock.
5 5. Height adjustment up to 16 inches approx.
1 6. It should have well finished ,good quality top.

10. A – SCAN
1 1. A scan probe - 13 MHz transducer
2 2. Scan Depth - 40-60 mm
3 3. Gain- 30-110 dB
4 4. Measurement of volume area
5 5. Accessories
i. Motorized Table
0 ii. Video/Thermal printer
1 iii. LCD Monitor

11. B – SCAN
1 1. B scan probe - 10 MHz transducer
2 2. Scan Depth - 40-60 mm
3 3. Gain- 30-110 dB
4 4. Measurement of volume area
5 5. Accessories
i. Motorized Table

115
 0 ii. Video/Thermal printer
1 iii. LCD Monitor

12. Fundus Camera

1 1. Optical system Three Telescopic
2 2. Field angles 50 ◦, 30◦, 20◦
3 3. Viewing Magnification 11X, 19X, 30X
4 4. Photo graphic Magnification 1.77, 2.90,4.39
5 5. Observation Monocular, special 10X eyepiece with reticle
6 6. Working Distance 42mm(front lens of patient’s eye)
7 7. Ametropia compensation ± 30 diopter
8 8. Flash rate 1/sec.
9 9. Maximum flash energy 360W
10 10. (25 steps increment)
11 11. Illumination for observation 12V,50W;Halogen
12 12. Filters Green (red free),Blue ,Red, Fluorescein Angiography
(Motorized Change over)
13. Documentation port Automatic motorized change over
14. Image size on film 26 mm dia, Vertical 24 mm
15. Swivel Range ±45◦ Horizontally + 15◦/-10 ◦ vertically by hand wheel
16. Flash generator Table mounted
17. Instrument table Asymmetrical, motorized, suitable for patients in wheel
chair
Image Sensors:
1 18. Minimum resolution of 5.0 mega pixel for colour, Red free FFA
photography (DSLR camera not to quoted.)
2 19. Minimum 2 Mega pixel B/W camera for IGIC and Auto Fluorescene
photography.
3 20. Fundus camera must have the Auto Fluorescene filters.
4 21. 35mm still camera with Data Back.
22. Facility to mount colour camera, B/W camera,digital camera and 35
mm film camera simultaneously and switch between sensors via
software.
5 23. Software should have facility for automontage/auto panaroma
1 24. Software should have Diabetic grading feature.
Hardware for the work station.
1 25. Processor Pentium IV, 2.4 GHz or Higher
2 26. Operating system windows 2000 professional or higher
3 27. Hard disk 120 GB or Higher
4 28. Monitor 17 ” color (1280X1024)
5 29. Drive for Archiving Magneto Optical Disc
6 30. Floppy Drive/CD-RW drive 1.44MB/ CD-RW
7 31. The part y should supply the Printer
8 32. Network capability should be there

Software
1 33. Powerful SQL database for patient’s data and images
2 34. Retina Atlas

116
3 35. Image Post processing
4 36. Brightness
5 37. Contrast
6 38. Sharpness
7 39. Smoothing
8 40. Inversion
9 41. Anti flicker
10 42. Rotation 180◦
11 43. Global grey level stretching
12 44. Zoom
13 45. Drawing
14 46. Mapping
15 47. Overlay
16 48. User friendly searching
17 49. Measurement
18 50. Tone value correction
19 51. Slideshow
1 52. Data import/export DICOM
2 53. System should allow DICOM anonymous export of patient data
/images

13. Yag laser :

1 1. Full slit lamp function including 3 step magnification changer
2 2. Excellent Quality Optics
3 3. Microprocessor Control with built-in safety features
4 4. 8 Micron spot size.
5 5. Longer focal length
6 6. Anterior and posterior YAG Laser offset of + 500 microns
7 7. Output energy 10mJ
8 8. Pulse length 4 n Sec.
9 9. Frequency 1 Hz

14. Humphrey Visual Field Analyser

1 1. High quality Goldman standard automated perimeter with bowl size
30 cm
2 2. Maximum intensity 10,000 Asb, Bowl illumination 31.5 Asb
3 3. Stimulation duration 200 ms, testing distance – 30 cm, stimulus
wavelength - Broad band visible light.
4 4. Stimulus / Background color -White on White, with Blue on yellow
(SWAP) option also available
5 5. Stimulus Size I-V as per Goldman standards
6 6. Maximum temporal range 90 Deg.
7 7. Central field test patterns (30-2, 24-2, 10-2, Macula ) and Peripheral
field test pattern( 60-4, Nasal Step ) should be available
1 8. Threshold test strategies- full threshold, Fast Pac, SITA standard/SITA
fast , Glaucoma hemi field test, and Screening test strategies with
standard printout formats

117
2 9. Glaucoma progression analysis and Serial Analysis for patient follow
up
3 10. Custom Static Testing, Kinetic Testing options, upgradeable software
analysis(if any),Automatic Pupil Measurement should be available
4 11. Should have fixation monitoring with
0 i. Heijll- Krakau blind spot monitor
1 ii. Video eye monitoring,
2 iii. Trial Lens Holder,
1 iv. Gaze tracking System
2 v. Head tracking
0 vi. Vertex Monitoring
1 vii. Touch screen on CRT,
3 viii. Keyboard
4 ix. Floppy drive
5 x. internal hard disk with Magneto Optical Disk (MOD) drive
for data storage
1 12. Original Manufacturer Motorized table, with Laser jet Printer
should be available.

15. Diode Laser With Lio Facility & Slit Lamp Deliverysystem
1 1. Treatment Laser Infrared diode laser (810 mm)
2 2. Cooling No external air or water cooling required
3 3. Break Power Upto 3000 mW
4 4. Aiming Laser Red diode laser variable/Hene beam
5 5. Power 0< 1.0 mw
6 6. Delivery Devices Endo Probe
7 7. Exposure Variable from 0.01 secs to continuous
8 8. Repeat interval 0.2 to 1.0 secs
9 9. It should have slit lamp delivery system facility

16. Cryo Unit

1 1. Console diameter width 5 inch (13.3 cm)
2 2. Height 6.5 inch (16.5 cm)
3 3. Depth 11.0 inch (27.9 cm)
4 4. Weight 16 pounds (7.3 kg)
5 5. Front panel gauze indicates incoming cylinder gas pressure
6 6. Temp. Selection - 25deg, -55deg,-85deg, tolerance +/-5deg.
7 7. Front panel On/off switch turns console on/off
0 8. Foot switch controls freezing operation (Depress to freeze & release to
defrost)
8 9. Power source run on CO2 & N 2O gas (No electricity required)
9 10. Freezing & thawing should be fast (instant)
10 11. Probe handles should be durable & made of stainless steel
11 12. Tip & tach should have protective cover
0 13. Dual switch over valve should remain at comfortable temperature on 2
cylinders allowing continuous operation of cryo while on empty
cylinder is remove for refill

118
12 14. Cryo tube enhanced flexibility, 9 ft long, reduced coil memory
13 15. Probes
0 a) curved retinal probe 2.8 mm dia X17.3mm length
0 b) Curved glaucoma probe 3.4 mm dia*X19 mm length
1 c) Vitreous probe 1.5 mm dia X27 mmLength

17. Synaptophore .
Specifications:
1 1. Autoflashing device
2 2. After image test
3 3. Haidinger brushes
4 4. Slides including simultaneous macular perception
1 5. Simultaneous parafoveal perception
2 6. Simultaneous foveal perception
3 7. Set of slides for fusion
4 8. Set of slides for steropsis
5 9. Set of slides after image test
6 10. Set of slides for angle kappa
7 11. Set of slides for measurement of torsional deviation

18. Streak Retinoscope

1 1. External focusing sleeve that's easy to grip and easy to manipulate.
2 2. Crossed-linear polarizing filter.
3 3. Magnetic age-appropriate targets for dynamic retinoscopy.
4 4. Allows easy one-hand operation for streak focus and 360° streak
rotation.
5 5. Interchangeable – to plane mirror and concave mirror mode by sleeve
movement
6 6. Fiber optic illuminated red and green fixation points
7 7. 3.5v Halogen Streak Lamp
8 8. ParaStop Setting. .
9 9. 100% Dustproof Housing high quality, Multi-Coated Optics.
10 10. Should be battery operated
11 11. Good quality carrying case(original)
12 12. Standard Accessories & spare parts
0 a. Bulb holder
1 b. Bulb-cover
2 c. Detachable brow rest for spectacle-wearers
3 d. Fixation cards with holder for dynamic retinoscopy

19. Snellen’s Drum: -

1 1. To measure visual acuity for distant vision
2 2. Light fitted in the instrument.
3 3. Test type charts for English & Hindi alphabets.
4 4. C Type letters for illiterates.

119
20. Ophthalmic Refraction Unit
It should have the following
1 1. Motorized Up-Down Movement of the Chair.
2 2. Motorized back & forward Movement of the Chair.
3 3. Retinoscope/Opthalmoscope.
4 4. Near vision arm.
5 5. Over head reading lamp.
6 6. Indirect arm.
7 7. Sliding Table Top for Twin instrument.
8 8. The choice of either of the various colors.
9 9. Easy operation by foot control switch.
10 10. 360 degrees rotatable trial lens tray
0 11. The Smooth touch control panel to control the up/down movement as
well as 180 degree maximum to flat horizontal Inclination *
Automatically.
11 12. The 360 degrees rotable feature is for trial sets/Instruments.
12 13. The following instruments can be mounted on the table top.
0 i. Overhead lamp
1 ii. Slit lamp
0 iii. Auto-refractometer
1 iv. Ophthalmoscope/Retinoscope
2 v. Trial lens tray
3 vi. Near Vision Arm
4 vii. Chart Projector /Vision Drum
5 viii. Indirect ophthalmoscope
14. It should satisfy following
1 i. Seat minimum height- 550 mm
2 ii. Seat maximum height- 710 mm
3 iii. Up & Down stroke- 160 mm
4 iv. Seat Rotation- 0 to 180 degrees
5 v. Back & Forward movement- 95 to 175 degrees
6 vi. Power Supply- 220 V AC,50Hz
7 vii. Power consumption- 600 mA
8 viii. Load Lifting- 200 Kg
9 ix. Motor Available- 230V AC- 24 DC
10 x. Stabilizer- 0.5 KVA min
11 xi. Minimum area required- 8 feet 10 feet
12 xii. Voltage Range- 0,1.5,2.5,3.0,4.0,6.0,9.0,12.0V

120
21. Ocular Thorpe Four Mirror Gonio
1 1. Four 62 degree mirrors give a 360 degree view of the anterior chamber
angle with only slight lens rotation.
2 2. Posterior pole can be viewed through center of lens.
3 3. Lens height 32.2mm
4 4. Contact diameter 18mm.

Lens Image Laser spot Contact Static

Height magnification magnification Dia. FOV
32.2 mm .93X 1.08X 18mm 150
degree

22. Ocular Thorpe Surgical Gonioscope

1 1. Magnified view of anterior chamber angle.
0 2. Designed for Goniotomy or checking the placement of of an anterior
chamber intraocular lens
2 3. It can be used with operating microscope or loupe
3 4. Lens height 32.5mm
4 5. Contact diameter 10mm

23. Koeppe Gonio Lens Set

Image magnification Contact dia. Static FOV. Style
1.47 X 19 mm 160 degree Large
1.5X 18mm 160 degree Medium
1.55X 17mm 160 degree Small

24. Latina Slt Gonio Lens

1 1. It should have 1.0X magnification for maintaining laser spot size and 1
to 1 laser energy delivery.
2 2. It should have tilted anterior lens surface
3 3. It should be suitable for standard laser trabeculoplasty.
4 4. It should have 63 degree mirror

Lens Image Laser spot Contact Static

height magnification magnification dia. FOV.
24mm 1X 1X 14.6 mm 130
degree

25. Ocular Abraham Iridotomy Lens

It should have a 8mm dia,66 D magnifying lens for viewing iris. The Power
density of laser beam at iris should be able to increase 2.5X compared with a flat lens.

121
 It should have a 50 micron spot size setting that yields a 31 micron spot on the
iris. The lens should provide additional safety by reducing the power density at the
cornea and retina by 2.8 X.
Lens Image Laser spot Contact
height magnification magnification dia.
16.5mm 1.6X 0.63 X 15mm

26 Ocular Swan-Jacob Autoclavable Gonoprism

1 1. It should have anodized aluminium handle for easy manipulation.
2 2. The glass design should allow steam sterilization.
3 3. Contact diameter 10 mm
4 4. Handle 77.6mm

27. Goldman Perimeter

1 1. Original goldman spherical projection perimetry for staticand kinetic
perimetry with recording device.
2 2. It should have the facility of colour perimetry {red and green}

28. Ultrasonic Pachymeter

It should have following Specifications:
1 1. Measurement range: 0.2 - 1.3 mm
2 2. Resolution : 1 micron
3 3. Accuracy : +/-3 microns
4 4. Transducer frequency : 20 MHz focused
5 5. Battery powered : 4x 1.5V batteries

29. Phacoemulsifier
1 1. Peristaltic/Venturi pump technology
2 2. Four crystal piezo electric titanium hand piece
3 3. I/A – 2 hand pieces
4 4. Ultra sound tip frequency of 29 to 40 KHZ
5 5. Ultrasound power modulation with conventional, pulse and burst
mode.
6 6. Advanced fluidics with anti surge mechanism
7 7. User friendly software
8 8. LCD touch screen and automatic IV pole option
9 9. Foot pedal with multi program options and remote control availability
10 10. Disposable and reusable tubing set / unit facility
11 11. Variable designer tips for phaco power delivery.
12 12. Phaco vacuum level 0 to 500mm in 5mm increments,
13 13. Phaco power 0 to 100% in 5% increments,
14 14. I/A vacuum range 5 to500mmHg.
15 15. Aspiration flow rate 1 to 40 cc/min.

122
16 16. High speed anterior and posterior vitrectomy and wet field bipolar
coagulator.
17 17. Customized surgeon program with different sets of parameters.

30. Ophthalmic Operating Microscope

1 1. Main microscope 5 step magnification
2 2. Eye pieces 10X wide field (optional 12.5X wide field)
3 3. Diopter Adjustment from +6 to -6
4 4. Inclination to vertical 45◦ off vertical
5 5. Interpupilary distance from 55mm to 75 mm by knob
6 6. Working distance 175 mm or 200 mm
7 7. Magnification Manual step 0.4X, 0.6X,1.0X,1.6X,2.5X
8 8. Field of View (in mm) with 175 mm Objective 55,36,22,14,9 200 mm
Objective 63,42,25,16,10
9. Fine focusing Adjustable by motorized foot control
10. Intensity Minimum 8000lux
11. Brightness Continuously variable
12. Filters Built in heat absorbing filter and UV,Green and Blue filters with
Switcahable facility
13. Light source 12 V, 100 W ;Halogen Lamp
14. Light transmission Fiber optic cable
15. Arms Counter balanced spring arms
16. Rotation of arms 355◦ with lock
17. Floor stand Mobile floor stand and five caster wheels
18. Power supply AC 220-240 V.

31. Operating Microscope With Video Recording

6 1. Illumination
0 i. Coaxial
1 ii. Oblique for red reflex
2 iii. Retro Illumination
3 iv. Bright reflex preferable
7 2. Integrated slit illumination
0 i. Vertical 2.5 mm
1 ii. Horizontal 2.5mm wide and 5mm
8 3. Focal Length 175/200 mm
9 4. Focusing range 50 mm
10 5. Movement X-Y coupling. Key should be available for X-Y coupling and
focus
11 6. Foot Control for
0 i. Illumination
1 ii. X-Y Movement
2 iii. Zoom
3 iv. Focus
12 7. Assistant Microscope
13 8. 12v/Halogen/Xenon bulb
14 9. Automatic exchange following bulb failure.

123
 15 10. Apochromatic/Advance optics with anti reflex coating
16 11. Motorized zoom system
17 12. Eye piece 12.5X (10x Optional)
18 13. Beam splitter and TV adaptor
19 14. Video system
20 15. CCTV with camera attachment

32. Wet Field Bipolar Coagulator

1 1. It should incorporate with Solid State Circuitry.
2 2. It should have LED indicator for power output
3 3. It should be supplied with Disposable / Auto cleavable cords.
4 4. It must be Footswitch operated
0 5. It should be supplied with A wide selection of bipolar forceps and
haemostatic erasers to facilitate most ophthalmic surgical procedures
5 6. Power supply should be AC 220-240 Volts;50Hz.

33. Lensometer
1 1. Type : External Reading type
2 2. Target : Corona and cross, Rotable 360 degree
3 3. Vertex power range
0 i. (0,25 Diopter step) : 0 to +(or)- 10 Diopters
1 ii. (0,50 Diopter step) : +(or) – 10 to 25 Diopters
4 4. Cylindrical axis : 0 degree to 180 degree (1 degree steps
5 5. Prismatic power : 0 to 5 (1 step)
6 6. Acceptable Lense
1 i. Diameter : 20 to 80 mm dia.
2 ii. Tiltable angle : Continuously variable from 30 degree to 90
degree
7 7. Eyepiece focusing range : 0 to 5 Diopters

34. Surgeon’s Chair (Motorized)

21 1. It should have facility for Foot regulated height adjustment
22 2. It should have multi position arm support
23 3. Electric height level adjustment
24 4. The range of height adjustment should be apporx.150mm
25 5. It can be Easily movable with personal handle
26 6. It should have Back wheels lock.
27 7. It should have Hand height controls
28 8. It should be Operated with motor
29 9. It should have Position foot support
30 10. It should have Ergonomic seat foam
31 11. It should have motor driven Fixed or rotating seat
32 12. Dimension of seat should be minimum 550 mm approx. to maximum
700 mm approx.
33 13. It should have castor with lock
34 14. Power supply AC 110V/220V (50/60 Hz)

124
 35 15. Lifting Capacity: 200Kgs.
36 16. Stroke Value should be 150 mm approx.
37 17. It should have Hand support, back rest & wheels
38 18. It should ergonomically Adjustable

35 CHARTS AND CARDS

1. Teller Acuity Cards

Seventeen thick card boards gray colour base with black & white strips of
different size.

2. Contrast Sensitivity Charts

Contrast Sensitivity Charts-Pellirobson charts for use at 1 meter /
Cambridge low contrast Gratings / Functional Acuity Contrast Charts for
distance and near .

3. Etdrs Charts
One illuminated plastic sheets printed with different size alphabets

4. Ishihara Chat
Ishihara Pseudoisochromatic Charts should be in Original form and good
quality prints. 38 plates ( complete edition )

5. Iol Kit

1 1. Acrylic foldable IOL (hydrophobic) UV absorbing single piece,

biconvex 6.00 mm Optic with square edge, planar haptic. Overall
diameter of 13.00 mm.
2 2. Acrylic pseudo accommodative single piece acrylic foldable IOL, 6 mm
optics, overall diameter 13.0mm(-10 lenses)
1 3. All PMMA PC IOL : 6.50 mm Optic. Overall diameter of 13.50 mm with
modified C loop PMMA haptic.
2 4. All PMMA PC IOL : 5.25 mm – 5.50 mm Optic. Overall diameter of
12.00 – 12.50 mm with modified C loop PMMA haptic.
0 5. All PMMA Kelman Multiflex AC IOL : 5.00 mm – 5.50 mm Optic.
Overall diameter of 12.50 mm – 13.00 mm
1 6. Acrylic hydrophobic multipiece foldable IOL, 6.0mm optic with overall
diameter of 12-13mm.
2 7. Acrylic hydrophobic foldable IOL with yellow chromophores 6.0m
optics, 13.0mm overall diameter.
3 8. Micro Surgical Phaco Knife .
0 1. Crescent Knife for dissection of Phaco Tunnel
1 2. 3.2 mm slit knife.

125
2 3. 2.75 mm slit knife
3 4. 5.2 mm slit knife
4 5. Side Port Entry knife (20G)
5 6. 1.5 mm slit

6. Trial Lens Set

1 1. The lenses should be20mm in aluminum, amount of 38mm diameter,
anodized red for minus and black for plus. The Sphere lenses with
handle and cylinder without handle.
2 2. Trial lenses of good quality, the case made of melamine polished wood,
sturdy and attractive finish.
3 3. lenses--Spheres
1 a. Concave and convex-0.12
2 b. 0.25 to 4.0 in 0.25 steps
3 c. 4.5 to 6.0 in 0.5 steps
4 d. 7.0 to 14.0 in 1.0 steps
5 e. 16.0 to 20.0 in 2.0 steps
6 f. 0.25 to 3.5 in 0.25 steps
7 g. 4.0 to 6.0 in 0.5 steps
8 h. Prisms-1/2,1,2,3,4,5,6,8,10,12.
4 4. Accessories-Trial frames, one adult size and one for child, adjustable
with slots
1 i. -Red glass
2 ii. green glass
3 iii. -Pin hole
4 iv. -Slit
5 v. -Two blank discs
0 vi. two occluder
1 vii. -cross cylinder +/- 0.25 and +/- 0.5

7. Surgical Instruments

1 1. Lim’s Corneal forceps 1 x 2 teeth small.

2 2. Moorfield suture and conjunctval forceps
3 3. Troutman Superior rectus forceps
4 4. Pierse type Micro forceps No.15. 0.2mm tip
5 5. Pierse type Micro forceps curved No.24, 0.5mm tip
6 6. Barraquer tying forcep straight
7 7. Barraquer tying forcep curved.
8 8. Mc-pherson forceps 10mm straight
9 9. Mc-pherson forceps 10mm angled
10 10. Dodick nucleus cracker cross action
11 11. Clayman lens holding forceps delicate angled jaws without lock
12 12. De-weckers iris scissor sharp
13 13. Vannas scissors sharp tips straight 7mm blades.
14 14. Vannas scissors sharp tips straight 10mm blades

126
15 15. Vannas scissors sharp tips Curved 7mm blades
16 16. Vannas scissors sharp tips Curved 10mm blades
0 17. Mcpherson westcott conjunctival scissors curved blunt tips small
blades.
17 18. Micro Corneal scissors slighty curved blunt tips small blade
18 19. Micro Corneal scissors half curved blunt tips small blade
19 20. Weiss eye speculum
20 21. Barraquer’s wire speculum small
21 22. Barraquer’s wire speculum Medium
22 23. Barraquer’s wire speculum Large
23 24. Vectis
24 25. Sinskey lens hook & manipulator
25 26. Twist hook for scleral fixation
26 27. Dastoor pupil & Irish repositer
27 28. Lens expressor
28 29. Phaco Chopper
29 30. Rycroft Air injection cannula
30 31. Simcoe irrigating aspirating cannula with silicon tube
31 32. Jenson posterior capsule polisher sand blasted olive tip
32 33. Simco cannula I/A “U” shaped for 12’0 clock
33 34. Jaffe Needle Holder
34 35. Hydro- Dissection Cannula
35 36. Towel Clip
36 37. Colibri forcep
37 38. Bone Punch
38 39. Nasal Speculum
39 40. Bone rougeur
40 41. Hammer
41 42. Chunck handle
42 43. Muller Eye speculum
43 44. Lacrimal Cannula straight
44 45. Lacrimal Cannula curved
45 46. Pigtail probe
46 47. Lacrimal probe set
47 48. Bishop forceps
48 49. Suturing forceps
49 50. Utility forceps
50 51. Cat paw Retractor
51 52. Stevens Scissors
52 53. Ring Scissors
53 54. Needle Holder
54 55. Stitch Scissors.
55 56. Enucleation Scissor half curved
56 57. Enucleation Scissor full curved
57 58. Muscle Hook
58 59. Lester – Burch Eye Speculum
59 60. Wells enucleation spoon
60 61. Bunge evisceration spoon small large

127
61 62. Mule evisceration scoop
62 63. Boll point cautery
63 64. Desmarres lid retractor
64 65. Capsulorrehxis Forcep curved shaft Utrata 85mm
65 66. Capsulorrehxis Forcep curved shaft Castroviejo 109mm
66 67. Fixation Forcep Toothed 1x2 90mm
67 68. Superior rectus Forcep toothed 115mm
68 69. Lens holding Forcep Dalgit 85mm
69 70. Castroviejo Needle Holder curved without lock 113mm
70 71. Phaco Acrylic lens folder
71 72. Phaco acrylic lens inserter
72 73. Phaco acrylic lens injector
73 74. Iris repository round ended
74 75. Sinsky hook extra fine single ended 115mm
75 76. Phaco chop cum ‘Y’ rotator 145mm
76 77. Phaco chop blunt 1mm chopping edge single ended 115mm
77 78. Scissor curved 3” 4”
78 79. scissorstraight 3” 4”
79 80. Tooth forcep straight 3” 4”
80 81. plain forcep 3” 4”
81 82. Instrument lifter 200mm
82 83. Allis tissue forcep 2x3 tooth 155mm
83 84. sponge holding forcep 200mm
1 85. Bonn Iris scissor straight sharp pointed tips 90mm
2 86. Bonn Iris scissor curved
3 87. Eye scissors Straight 115mm
4 88. Eye scissors curved
5 89. Castroviejo caliper straight 20mm
6 90. Castroviejo caliper curved 20mm
7 91. Ball cautery copper ball 6mm
8 92. Dieffenbach Bull dog clamp straight
9 93. Dastoor iris retractor 3.5mm wide for cryo
10 94. Bowman Decision needle sharp cutting edge
11 95. Graefe Iris hook tip2mm round blunt
12 96. Castrviejo Synechia spatula
1 97. Conjunctival scissor straight
2 98. Conjunctival scissor curved

128
3 99. Stevens Tenotomy scissors straight round blunt tip
4 100. Stevens Tenotomy scissors Curved round blunt tip
5 101. Kalt needle holder 12mm jaw
6 102. Castroviejo Blade breaker and holder 12mm jaw
7 103. Knolle irrigating vectis angled blunt tip blunt tip
8 104. Irrigating vectis for SICS serrated tip pointed tip
9 105. Bishop- Harmon Anterior chamber wash cannula 20G
10 106. Lacrymal cannula half curved 20G
11 107. Lacrymal cannula full curved
12 108. Wildar lacrymal dilator
13 109. Nettle ship punctual dilator
14 110. Lacrymal sac Retractor Mueller
15 111. Knapp Sac Retractor 8mm wide four prongs
16 112. West bone chisel
17 113. West bone Gouge
18 114. Mallet for DCR
19 115. Kerrison bone nibbling Ronguer 1.5mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, wide
20 116. Lang lacrymal sac dissector and curette
21 117. Dastoor Lacrimal sac dissector double ended
22 118. West bone gauze
23 119. Tilley Nasal packing forcep
24 120. Ferris smith punch
25 121. Citelli’s punch 1.5mm 2mm 3mm 4mm
26 122. Barkan Goniotomy knife
27 123. Toooke cornel knife Blade 3x18mm
28 124. Cyclodialysis cannula spatula Elschnig angled shaft
29 125. Kelly glaucoma punch
30 126. Goniotomy knife
31 127. Nicati foreign Body spud 26x1.25mm
32 128. Beer cilia or epliation 4.5mm long roundd platform
33 129. lambert chalazion forcep 10mm
34 130. Lambert Chalazion forcep 15mm
35 131. Desmarres Chalazion forcep 20mm
36 132. Meyer Hoefer Chlalazion curette 1.5mm
37 133. Meyer Hoefer Chalazion curette 2mm
38 134. Meyer Hoefer Chalazion curette 3mm

129
 39 135. Wells enucleation Spoon
40 136. Evisceration Scissor Mule
41 137. Evisceration Scissors Bunge
42 138. Kennerdell Bayonet foecep
43 139. Orbit retractor with muscle hook
44 140. Jaeger Lid plate
45 141. Stallard Ptosis plate broad
46 142. stallard Ptosis plate narrow
47 143. Swiss advancement forcep Right
48 144. Swiss advancement foecep Left
49 145. Berke ptosis multi curved shaft 20mm
50 146. Berke ptosis multi curved shaft 27mm
51 147. Snellen Entropin forceps Right
52 148. Snellen Entropin forceps Left
53 149. Knapp Strabismus scissor Straight round blunt tip
54 150. Knapp Strabismus scissor Curved round blunt tip
55 151. Graefe Strabismus hook 10.5mm
56 152. Graefe Strabismus hook 8mm
57 153. Chavasse strabismus hook curved shaft

EQUIPMENT ENT-9

1. ENT HEAD LIGHT (For Optimum and Mobile illumination of

Medical Examination in ENT)
Specifications
1. Long life light source with power – white light LED
2. Focusing optics, infinitely variable
3. Light weight Lithium – Ionic Battery
4. Light weight head band with holder for batter on rear.
5. Brightness : 50 Lumen/60 KLUX
6. Batter operating time should be more than 2 hours
7. Total weight of the head light with battery should be less than
300gms(approximately)

2. Specifications for Cystoscope set

1. Telescope – 4mm, 0°, with enlarged image, autoclavable.
2. Cystoscope Sheath 25Fr, with Obturator.
3. Bridge with Two instrument channel

130
 4. Optical stone forceps for smaller stones
5. Cystoscope Biopsy forceps

3. Specifications for Stone Punch Set

1. Telescope, 4mm, 70°, autoclavable
2. Punch working element
3. Punch sheath, with central valve, including connecting tubes for in and
outflow, straight beak with Obturator.
4. Insert tube with channel for flexible instruments with atraumatic beak
for urethroscopy.
5. Cystoscope – urethroscope – sheath with obturator and lock adaptors,
colour code White 25F

4. Specifications for Resectoscope set

1. Telescope – 4mm, 30° with enlarged image, autoclavable.
2. Resectoscope Sheath – 26F, with outer and inner, Inner completely
rotatable (360°) with ceramic insulation.
3. Working element for Resectoscope – passive type, with spring action.
Fingers being rotationary with thumb action. Suitable for Bipolar cautry.
4. Standard obturator for Sheath

5. Technical Specification For Pure Tone Audiometer

1. Two channel audiometer
2. Pure tone channel 1 and 2
Frequency range
Air Conduction : 125Hz to 12000 Hz
Bone conduction : 125 Hz to 12000 Hz
3. Speech : Channels 1& 2
Microphone intensity range
masking intensity range
4. Signal format
5. Special test capabilities
6. Communications and monitoring
7. Automatic and manual tests
8. Print and store test automatically
9. Internal memory store up to 250 tests and above
10. Computer compatible with UPS
11. Large character LCD display
12. Large print out results (colour printer)
13. Calibration, date, test date, calibration.
14. Fast print (Less than 20 seconds)
15. Test head set, bone vibrator, subject response, hand switch, CD player,
colour printer, speaker, very good quality table with drawer to keep
audiometer and accessories,revolving chair for audiologist.

131
6. Impedence Audiometer
1. Tympanometry Mode:
Probe frequency : 226 Hz +/- 2% typical compliance : 0.3 ml
2. Reflux mode
3. Reflux Decay Mode
4. Eustachian tube function mode
5. Display
6. Accessories :Ear tip set, Thermal Paper, Probe.

7. Auto Refractometer
Measurement mode
R mode Continuous refractometry
Ref mode Refractometry
CLBC mode Contact lense base curve measurement
Refractometry
Vertex Distance (VD) 0,10,12,13.5,15mm
Sphere (SPH) -25.00+22.00d VD= 12mm (0.12, 0.25d)
Cylinder (CYL) 0.00~±10.00d (0.12, 0.25d)
Axies (AX) 0.00~±180°
Cylinder form -,+,±
Pupil Distance 10-85mm
Minimum pupil distance 2.00mm
Measurement time 0.07 sec
Others
Internal printer Thermal printer
Power saving Selectable 3,5,10 min
Power supply AC 10 240V,50/60 Hz/90 W
Dimension/ weight 248 (W)X476(D)X475(H)m/21 Kg.
Chinrest movement Max, 55mm
Data output RS – 232 Interface, Video Output

8. AUTO LENSOMETER WITH PRINTER

Measurement range
Sphere
(Spectacle lenses)
(Contact lenses)
Cylinder
Axis
ADD
Prism
-25.00 to + 25.00D
-25.00 to + 25.00D (BC= 6.00 to9.00) (0.01/0.06/0.12/0.25 D increments)
0.00 to ±10.00 D (-,Mix,+) (0.01/0.06/0.12/0.25 D increments)
0 to 180° (1 increments)
0.00 to + 10.00 D (Add and Adz) (0.01/0.06/0.12/0.25 D increments)
0.00 to 20.00Δ (horizontal, vertical) (0.01/0.06/0.12/0.25Δ increments)
Prism mode Δ,Ѳ, base in,/ out, base Up/ down

132
 PD measurement 20.0 to 49.5mm (monocular), single vision PD, progressive
lens far vision PD
Measuring time 0.09 sec ± 10% (minimum)
Measurable lens diameter
Spectacle lens
Contact lens
Ф20 to 100mm
Larger than the inner diameter of the nose piece (Ф5mm)
Measurable transmittance 10% and over (20% and over for ±15 to ±25 D )
Compensation function for high index lenses
The abbe number is changeable in the range of 20 to 60
Marking system Ink cartridge type
Wavelength/ measuring point
535nm (Green)/108 with in nose piece

Display 4.7 inch colour full graphic LCD, 320 X 240 dots with a back light
Printer Thermal line printer with auto cutter (paper width : 58mm)
interface Rs – 232c : 1 PORT usb : 1 Port

Power supply AC 100 (±10%) to 240 (± 10%)V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 40VA
Dimensions Weight 194(W)X210(D)X408(H)mm/4.0Kg
7.64(W)X8.27(D)X16.07(W)/8.82lbs

Standard accessories Power cord, Dust cover, nose piece for contact lenses,
printer paper 3 rolls, operators manual, measuring progressive power lenses
explanation sheet.
Optional Accessories Eye care card, RS-232C communication cable, USB cable
(with special USB driver), foot switch, Ink Cartridge (red, Blue), Ink pad type
marking unit

9. KERATOMETER WITH JOYSTICK MODEL

Type Sutcliff type Measuring range
Corneal radius of curvature Minimum reading
Corneal refractive power Minimum reading
Axis of corneal Astigmatism Minimum reading
power 15W
power consumption AC 100V, 115V,220V,240V
weight 15Kg
dimension 360(W)X505(H)XX445(D)mm
movement range: 30mm
vertical 110mm
horizontal 76mm
back and forth 78mm

133
10. Ophthalmic chair unit with auto chart projector
Features
One fully upholstered elegant ophthalmic chair with full motorized recline
facilities With full motorized up & down movements for 300mm
One stand and console
With illuminating soft light for examination
With controls for ophthalmic chair
For recline and up & down
Is also provided as an additional option
Back end forward by motorized system
Specifications
Base dimensions floor space required
Height 7.6”
Length after reclining 9.6”
Width 4”
Input voltage and power 110/230V
Output 3V, 6V, 12V
Net weight 194 Kgs.
Gross weight 225 Kg.
ADD – ONS:
1. Slit lamp
2. Binocular indirect ophthalmoscope
3. Keratometer or autorefractometer
4. Direct ophthalmoscope and streak retinoscope
5. Chart projector
6. Trial lens set
7. Sight tester (phoropter)

AUTO CHART PROJECTOR

Features: to test the patients visual acuity such as Myopia or Hyperopia
using 31 different opto types with provision to vary the projection distance from
2 6 mts.

SPECIAL FEATURES
1. Bright and clear images
2. Faster and silent operation
3. Remote operated
4. Decimal notation
5. Large choice of optotype for different diagnostic needs
6. Different masking (single, vertical and horrizontal)

TECHNICAL FEATURES
Chart : 31 Pcs
Projection Distance: 2 to 6 Meters
Supply voltage : 230V AC, 50Hz
Power consumption : 40 VA
Lamp : 6V, 20W
Net weight : 13 Kg.

134
11. Cateract Set
SL. No Cataract set Quantity
1. TITANIUM Vannas 11 MM 1 No
2. TITANIUM Mcpherson forcep 1 No
3. TITANIUM Corneal Scissor 1 No
4. TITANIUM colibri 1X2 1 No
5. Sinskey hook (dialor) 2 no
6. Muscle Hook - GRAEFE 1 No
7. Superior rectus forcep- DASTOOR 1 No
8. Mosquito forcep - CURVED 1 no
9. Mosquito forceps – straight 1 no
10. Vectis plain 1 no
11. Simcoe cannula 21/22 G 1 no
12. Chopper 1.25 mm 90 Degree sharp tip 1 no
13. Phaco speculum (wire type) 1 no

12. Combi Video Attachment For Tagaki Om 10 Zoom Microscope

General specifications
Image sensor : .” interline CCD
Picture Elements: 768(H)X494(V)
Digital processing : 10 bit DSP
Signal format : NTSC
Horizontal frequency : 15.734 KHz
Vertical Frequency: 59.54 KHz
Sync System: Internal
Horizontal resolution: 480 TV Lines
Min. Illumination: 1 Lux at F 1.2
S/N ratio: more than 48dB (AGC-OFF)
Gamma: 0.45
White balance: ATW/ manual
AGC: ON/OFF selectable OdB to 18dB range
Electronic shutter: 1/60 – 1/10000
Fixed shutter: low speed shutter: 2FLD – 16 FLD (8 steps)
High speed shutter: 1/60 – 1/ 10000 (8 steps)
Video Out: 1.0Vp-p 75 ohms
Y/C Out: Y/C Output 0.7Vp-p 75 Ohms
Power supply: DC5V±5%
Focal Length: f= 30mm (008-13)
F= 40mm (008-17)

13. Specification for High speed Electric Drill System

1. High speed electric drill system with hand pieces and accessories
2. Motor speed should be up to 75000rpm.
3. Saw should work with in a speed limit of 5000 – 30000cpm (Oscillating,
Sagital & Reciprocating type)
4. Straight and angled hand pieces should be less than 5.5mm diameter.

135
5. All attachments and hand pieces should be quick coupling & fast
interchangeable with mounted tools.
6. In built irrigation system should be available.
7. Moto should be light weight.
8. Straight and angled attachments of various lengths should available.
Sound level should be very low.
9. Quick coupling attachment should be available.
10. Single and reusableburrs should be available.
11. Sterilization through flash or regular steam autoclave.
12. Straight and angular quick coupling intra hand pieces with reduction
speed (10:1 or more), high torque should be available.
13. Power system should be supplied with
14. High speed (75000rpm or above) and slow speed motor(upto
30000rpm) motor
Irrigation unit & accessories
15. Short straight hand piece (95mm or less) high speed
16. Angular Hand piece (130mm & 160mm) high speed
17. Slow speed angular hand piece (120mm) with further reduction of 71 for
microsurgery.
18. Contra angle attachment (with inner diameter 0.8 to 1.4) for K-wire and
micro surgery.
19. Reciprocating, sagital & oscilating saw(micro and mini) hand piece and
spare saw blades.
20. Storage tray for autoclaving
21. Re-usable & single use tools
22. Diamond head (1.8mm,2.7mm,3.1mm)
23. Cylindrical Head(2.3mm)
24. Twisted drill point (1.5mm)
25. Pin point (1mm)
26. Rosen head(1.4mm,1.8mm,2.3mm,2.7mm,3mm.)

136
Accessories
Slow speed angular hand piece with further reduction speed 3:1 for micro
surgery,Straight slow speed hand piece with further reduction speed of 6:1 for
Micro surgery.

137
 EQUIPMENT OT-10
1) Technical Specifications for Modular OT
Pre-fabricated Modular Operation Theatres Specifications
a.Objectives
The Main Objectives of Planning should be:
Promote high standard of asepsis
Ensure maximum standard of safety
Optimize utilization of OT and staff time
Optimize working conditions
Patient & Staff comfort in terms of thermal, acoustic and lighting requirements
Allow flexibility
Facilitate coordinated services
Minimizes maintenance
Ensure functional separation of spaces
Provide soothing environment
Regulates flow of traffic

b.Specifications
a) Operation Theatre Department
Structural Steel shell with joint less sealed sterile coating
- Joint less prefabricated modular Operation Theatres
- Paneled Modular Wall & Ceiling System
- Ultra Clean Ventilation Through Ceiling (Vertical laminar flow system)
b) Integrated Air & Light Theatre Ceiling
- Hermetically sealing Hospital Doors
- Static Conductive Flooring
c) Medical Gases pipeline system:- Medical Gas pipeline Equipment
d) Multi-Movement Ceiling & Wall Pendant Systems
e) Suction & Oxygen Therapy products- Bed Head Trunking System
f) Ceilings – Integral LightingSsystem
- Uniform diffusion of air into theatres
- Air and light diffusers
- Consists of plenum with conditioned air though HEPA filters.
g) AGSS – Anesthesia gas scavenging system and outlets suck the waste anaesthetic
gases
h) Hermetically sealed doors
i) Flat X-ray imaging screens step less, flicker free and dimmer
j) To provide writing board
k) Surgical scrubs sinks – elbow action taps or knee operated or flow sensor operated
l) To provide cascade pressure stabilizers
m) To provide operation theatre control panel
n) Ceiling suspension systems for monitor, anesthesia equipment surgical equipment
a) Versatile pendent (double arm) swiveling
b) Vertically movable
c) Good maneuverability
o) OT control panels
p) It should be closed circuit TV facility.
q) Service maintenance warranty for 3 years and good service backup

Floors should be smooth, non slip, impervous material conductive enough to dissipate static
electricity but not conductive enough to endanger personnel from shock. The flooring should
either be inset mosaic with least possible joints and copper strips to carry away any static
electricity produced or of joint less conductive tiles. Conductive copper mesh and self levelling
epoxy flooring may be done.

138
 Ceiling should be painted with washable paint and corners of the rooms should be rounded off
to prevent collection of dirt and dust.

Power back up with provision of stand-by generating sets

In operating rooms anaesthetic room(s) recovery room, holding area, colour of walls and
ceilings should be such that they do not alter the observers perception of skin colour this will
facilitate patient monitoring and management.

OT should have facilities for high speed autoclaves/ sterilizers for immediate /emergency
requirements of sterilizing equipment (plate 9)

Essential pharmaceutical storage including refrigeration facilities should be available

There should be a waiting room with toilet facilities for patient attendants

Pass-through cabinets that circulate clean air through them while maintaining positive air
room pressure allow transfer of supplies from outside the OR to inside it.

They help ensure the rotation of supplies in storage or can be used only for passing supplies as
needed from a clean center core (Plate 12)

There should be emergency communication system that can be activated without the use of
hands.

2) Detailed Technical Specification for Modular Operation Theatre

a. WALLS & CEILING CONSTRUCTION:

The room wall will have two independent surfaces with a minimum opening in between. The external
walls of the room will be constructed with solid bricks with cement plastering. The inner surfaces walls
will be constructed with 1.60mm thick EGP steel panels backed by 12-mm gypsum board ( India gypsum
make) these panels will have flame resistance to BS1142 part 3 The inner surface walls will be fixed to
the bricks wall with essential supports. There should be minimum possible cavity/gap in between the
solid and steel walls. The total distance between the inside and outside surfaces of the operating room
will be variable to suit the architect’s layout, but will be sufficient for the flush mounting of equipments.
The individual wall panels will be spot welded together at equal intervals to render equal support to the
panels. Spot welding will be properly grinded to make the surface leveled. All joints will be filled with
metal filler and sanded flush on site ready to receive the plastic finish. Wall panel’s joints will be invisible
after the final wall coating is applied. The cavity between the inner and outer walls will be left with
minimum obstruction for the possible addition of equipment at a later date and to enable services, pipes,
conduits etc. to be run within the cavity. All wall mounted equipment will be flush mounted and sealed
into theatre.
The wall panels design and construction will allow for the installation and support of all equipment and
the provision of opening required for the installation, with out affecting rigidity and strength. Access
boxes will be fitted to the rear of all wall mounted equipment to enable maintenance to be carried out
from outside the operating room. All the sharp edges and corners will be in radius to avoid bacteria
contamination. The internal surfaces of the room walls will be sprayed with water based liquid plastic,
wall glaze or equivalent, approved by the architect to a minimum dry film thickness of 300 microns. The
plastic coating will overlap the floor covering, ceiling system and doorframes by 25 microns. The plastic
coating will overlap the floor covering ceiling system and doorframes by 25mm to provide a continuous
sealed surface. The plastic coating will be non- reflective and the colour will be submitted to the architect
for approval. All the four corners should have return air duct outlets, the grill of which should be made of
MS steel , duly powder coated with colour choice to suit the hospital.

139
b. CEILING FILTRATION SYSTEM (IMPORTED)
The ceiling filtration system should be designed to ensure unidirectional distribution of sterile air with
differential flow velocities decreasing from centre to perimeter of the surgical theatre to ensure the
cleanliness of all the area covered by the air flow. The ceiling system should be quipped with HEPA filters
with different performances according to their position in the ceiling to achieve different flow velocities.
The complete filtration ceiling system should be factory assembled its holding structure, Filter frames and
top plenum should be made of AISI 304 stainless steel. Filtration ceiling system should have HEPA filters,
H according to EN 1822 The filtration ceiling system should have flow equalizer to achieve uniform &
constant air distribution over the whole surface it should also have connection for surgical lamp to be
fitted in place of any filter. The air management system should be designed to achieved the following
parameters: F.S. 209 classification = 100 (100 particles/ft3) Bacteriological class =B (5 CFU/m3)* Particle
decontamination kinetics CP =5 min Biological decontamination kinetics CB = 5min ECG-GMP Annex 1
classification = Class A ISO 14644/1 classification = ISO 5

c. DOOR AND FRAMES (HERMETICALLY SEALED DOORS):

To maintain sterically and the correct air pressure in the room, all doors into and out
should be of the sliding, hermetically sealing type. The door should meet following specifications:
Meets international quality & safety requirements.
Doors should be wired to the current IEE regulations & BS7971 standard
Motor should be DC 24V 70 W brush less DC Motor
Noise level of movement should not be more then 60 decibel.
Controller should be microprocessor based and be CE marked.
Power efficiency should be .95 (in AC 100V full load).
The track should be made up of single piece extruded aluminum.
Environment temperature should be -20°C to +55°C.
Starting time should be able to regulate from .5second to 23 second & starting speed should
be 600 mm per second.
Electrical safety codes for high & low voltage system
Design should meet HTM 2020/2021 standards.
The doorframe should be made of high quality anodize aluminum and the door panel should be made of
compact laminate that can withstand high abrasion. To ensure efficient sealing of the doors frames should
be provided. They will consist of reinforced plasterboard panels faced with the same laminate as the
doors. The door should seal on all four edges in the closed position & should be surface installed type.
The track of the door should be constructed with high quality door lock with aluminum extrusion, fixed
firmly to the walls. Nylon runner guides should be fixed to the door in such a way they do not obstruct
trolley movement through the door. The doorframes should be edged with an aluminum extrusion & with
concealed fixings that are adjustable during installation to ensure a 100% hermetic seal is achieved.
Vision panels, 300mm X 300 mm should be provided in the doors. The door controller should be sensing
overload condition and in overload case the door will automatically stop & reverse the direction of travel.
The controller should be capable of either being operated by elbow switches/foot switches, radar switch
(touch less sensor). All doors should be able to be operated easily manually in the event of failure of the
power supply or the automation unit.

d. OPERATION THEATRE CONTROL PANEL:

The surgeon control panel should meet Electrical safety codes for high & low voltage system, wired to the
current IEE regulations. The room Surgeon’s control panel should be designed to cope with changing
technology & equipment in operating environments. Control Panel will be user friendly & ease of
operating & maintaining purpose. The panel should be “Membrane” type; configured to incorporate all
the services that operation room staff required. The fascia should be made with superior quality UV
resistance membrane with sterilization feature. The Panel should contain 6 or 9 service tiles as below:
1. Time Day Clock
2. Time Elapse Day Clock
3. General Lighting System
4. Medical Gas Alarm Panel
5. Hand Free Telephone set with memory
6. Temperature & humidity indicator with controller

140
7. HEPA Filter Status module
8. Room Pressure Indicator
9. Music control
Time day clock should be digital type & clocks having high brightness characters. Time Elapsed Day Clock
should be digital type & clocks having high brightness characters. Temperature indicator should indicate
the room temperature which should be connected to the local pressure switches of Air-Conditioning
System. Indicators should be digital type & clocks having high brightness characters, not less than 30 mm
in height. Central Lighting system should incorporate all the necessary controls of the lighting system
inside the theatre. The medical gas alarm should indicate High, Normal & Low gas Pressure for each gas
service present in the operating system & should have an audible buzzer with mute facility. Pressure
sensors should be connected to MGPS for monitoring the pressures. A hand free set Telephone System
should be incorporated in the panel with memory type card. The control panel should be designed for
front- access only. All internal wires should be marked with plastic Ferrule type cable markers for ease of
identification.

e. DISTRIBUTION BOARD:
All high voltage equipment should be installed in a separate enclosure. The remote cabinet should house
the operating lamp transformers, mains failure relays, electrical distribution equipment & circuit
protection equipment for all circuits within the operating theatre. All internal wiring should terminate in
connectors with screw & clamp spring connections of the clip- on type mounted, on a DIN rail & labeled
with indelible proprietary labels. Individual fees or miniature circuit breakers should protect all internal
circuits.

f. X RAY VIEWING SCREENS

The system should have electrical safety codes for high & low voltage system. The theatre is to be
equipped with a 2 plate X-ray viewing screen. It should be designed to provide flicker free luminance for
the film viewing purpose. It should be installed flushed with theatre wall for hygienic and ease of cleaning
purpose .The X-Ray viewing screen should be designed for the purpose of front access. The X-Ray viewing
screen should be illuminated by 4 pieces of high frequency fluorescent lamps and the dimming is
controlled by the usage of dimming ballast with the PCB that is mounted inside the box.
The diffuser should be able to diffuse the light evenly and to provide enough luminance for film viewing.
It should be made of high quality opaque acrylic sheet. The film should be held firmly by using spring –
loaded clips for ease of mounting and demounting. The body should be built by using electrolyzed steel
with powder coating. It should work on PCB button control system.

g. PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

Pressure relief dampers should be provided in each room to prevent contamination of air from clean and
dirty areas. Suitably sized air pressure relief damper should be strategically placed, enabling differential
room pressure to be maintained and ensure that when doors are opened between clean and dirty areas.
Counter- weight balancing system should be provided in the PRD to maintain positive pressure inside the
operation room. Air pressure stabilizers should have unique capability of controlling differential pressure
to close tolerance. The PRD should remain closed at pressure below the set pressure and should open
fully at pressure and should open fully at pressure only fractionally above the threshold pressure. The
body should be epoxy powder coated as per standard BS colors.
First class electrolyzed steel plate should be used for body and with high grade SS304 stainless steel for
blades.

h. OPERATION THEATRE FLOORING (ANTISTATIC CONDUCTIVE TILES):-

A floor screed should be provided, flat to within a tolerance of +/- 3mm over any 3 metre area. Onto this
sub-floor, a self –leveling compound should be laid prior to lying of the floor finish. Copper grounding
strips (0.05 mm thick , 50 mm width) should be laid flat on the floor in the conductive adhesive and
connect to copper wire of grounding . The floor finish in the operating room should be 2mm Conductive
PVC tiles, laid on a semi-conductive adhesive base. The floor finish should terminate at the room

141
perimeter passing over a concealed cove former and continuing up the wall for 100mm. All joints should
be welded with electrodes of the same compatible material to provide a continuous sealed surface. The
floor should have an electrical resistance of 2.5 * 10 to 106 Ohms, as per DIN 51953 ATM F-150 or NFPA
99, B1 class of fire resistance and should meet UL standard 779. Fulfils product requirements as per EN
649.

i. STORAGE UNIT:
The storage unit should be made with 1.50 mm thick EGP Zinc coated steel panels. The storage unit
should be divided 2 equal parts and each part should have individual glass doors with high quality locking
system. Each part will be provided with glass racks.
j. OPERATING LIST BOARD:
One operating list board should be provided in each operating theater. It should be made of ceramic
having Magnetic properties and should be flushed to the wall of the operating room.
k. HATCH BOX:
A Hatch should be provided in each operation theater to remove waste materials from the operation
theater to Dirty linen area just adjacent to Operation Theater. Each Hatch should be equipped with two
doors and the door should be operated electronically. The Hatch should be designed in such a way that
only one door should be opened at one time .The UV light should be so installed that it is kept on while
both the doors are closed, this UV light has to be automatically turned off in case of opening of either of
the doors. There shall be indicators on both side of the OT so that door open / close status can be
monitored from both ends.
l. SCRUB STATION
Compact surgical scrub sink should be designed for use in OT complex providing Surgeons with a
convenient sink for pre – OT scrub up. Each fixture should be fabricated from heavy gauge type 304
stainless steel and should be seamless welded construction, polished to a stain finish. The scrub sink
should be provided with a front access panel which should be easily removed for access to the water
controlled value, waste connections, stoppers and strainers. Hands free operation should include infra
red sensors with built-in range of adjustment. Thermostatic mixing, valve control should be located
behind the access panel and maintain constant water temperature. User defined setting of 1 to 3 min are
available. This timing should be adjustable to meet individual application requirements. Provided with
infrared sensors, thermostatic control taps with fail safe temperature controls. All units should have
reduced anti- splash fronts. Knee operated switch should be there.
m. VIEW WINDOW
The view window of specified size shall be providing consisting of: Double insulated fixed glazing with
not less than 5mm thick toughened glass. Window frame shall be powdered coated Aluminium of
approved shape flush mounted with wall paneling Motorized horizontal Venetian Blinds of powder
coated Aluminium strips of vista level or equivalent of approved shade including necessary accessories.
The motor shall be of reputed brand approved by Engineer – in – charge. The Venetian blinds should be
motorized for 90 degree rotational

3) Equipment Specifications for OPERATION TABLE HYDRAULIC

1 Description of Function
1.1 Hydraulic operating Tables are simple tables for performing surgical procedures
and it works without electrical power.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 OT Table is required for general surgery and should have X-Ray transluscent
tops.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 1. Four section table top with divided foot section
2. Table top should be constructed from a high-pressure laminate to permit x-ray
penetration and fluoroscopy
3. All table positioning, i.e., height, back section, lateral tilt,
trendelenburg, and anti-trendelenburg, except foot and head section should be
operated hydraulically

142
 4. Should have a manual position selector, whose location should be
interchangeable between foot and head end
5. The casings on the frame and centre supporting column should be made of
hygienic stainless steel
6. Mattress should be radio lucent and suitable for fluoroscopy
7. Measurements :( all dimensions are approximated to +/_ 10 % variations)
a. Height: 730-1040 mm
b. Side tilt: + 15 degrees
c. Back section adjustment: - 15 degrees to 70 degrees
d. Foot section adjustment: - 90 to 0 degree, detachable
e. Trendelenburg: 25 degree
f. Anti trendelenburg: 25 degree
g. Head section adjustment: -40 to -30 degree, detachable
h. Maximum width: 555 mm
i. Length: 1950 mm 2.
8. Table top should be completely detachable compatible with transfer trolley
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 Accessories should include
a. Padded arm rest with straps - pair with damps
b. Anesthesia screen with clamps
c. Side supports: pair with clamps
d. Shoulder supports: pair with clamps
e. Knee crutches: pair with damps
f. X-ray cassette tray
g. Kidney bridge
h. SS bowl with clamps
i. Infusion rod with clamp
5 Environmental factors
6 Power Supply
None
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer should be ISO certfied for quality standards.
7.3 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have the
necessary equipments recommended by the manufacturer to carry out
preventive maintenance test as per guidelines provided in the
service/maintenance manual.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after warranty
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

4) Equipment Specifications for Operation Theatre Light

1 Description of Function
1.1 Surgical lights illuminate the surgical site for optimal visualization of small, low-
contrast objects at varying depths in incisions and body cavities.
2 Operational Requirements

143
 2.1 The light should comprise of 2 units, one major(diameter around 90 cm) and
one minor (diameter around 55 cm). Each unit should have a central light bulb.
Should have a facility of continuous brightness adjustment.Should be shadow
free
2.2 Should have provision of direct recording & display of operating field via an
autofocus, motor driven zoom lens, with digital video camera with high
definition resolution recordable on hard drive/ DVD/ Mini DV tapes. All cables
should be through the central supporting pillar of light.Each should have a single
bulb with reserve.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 The light should be easily maneuverable and should have a swivel radius of at
least 150 cms and height adjustment of at least 100 cms
3.2 Each unit should provide more than 250000 lux light at 4200 k colour
temperature
3.3 The optimum colour temperature of the light should be between 42000 – 47000
kelvin, with colour rendering index of atleast 90.;
3.4 Each unit should provide a prefocussed beam of light with atleast 50 cms depth
of field.
3.5 It should be a cool light and should not interfere with the laminar air flow
system. The absorption of infrared radiation should be more than 99% and
infrared radiation to feet at 100000 lux should be less than 35 w per sq metre
3.6 Each unit should have halogen lamp of average life of 1000 hours – 25 spare
bulbs should be included
3.7 There should be reserve light source (halogen) with automatic activation in case
of a fuse bulb
3.8 Should have option of electro magnetic brakes to maintain the light in a steady
position
3.9 The light should have 360 degree turning radius with unbreakable head Glass.
3.10 Light should automatically switch on in case of resumption of electricity after
power failure. The handle should be Auto clavable & detachable.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified-
5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General Requirements of
Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or should comply with 89/366/EEC;
EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input :220-240V/ 50 Hz AC Single phase or 380-400V AC 50 Hz
Three phase fitted with appropriate Indian plugs and sockets.
6.2 Suitable Servo controlled Stabilizer/CVT
7 Standards, Safety and Training
7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-60601-1
General Requirements
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.4 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

144
 8.5 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. As per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.

5) O T Light with LED Technology Surgical light system based on

LED technology
Extremely flat, compact and aerodynamically surgical light based on innovative LED
technology.The light head consists of several, systematically arranged light emitting modules, using
multitudinous LEDs to form a multi-lens matrix for a shadow free and homogeneous illumination of the
surgical field. Surgical light consisting of: Central axis, horizontal extension arm, height adjustable spring
arm, vertical and horizontal bow and the one-point suspended light head consisting of 5 or 3 light
emitting modules.

Suspension system:
Main light on lowermost axis position: Extension arm: 850mm (if 1 or 2 extension arms per axis)
or 700mm (if 3 extension arms per axis) respectively Length of spring arm: 930mm (iLED 5), 910mm
(iLED 3) Operating distance: 70-150cm Operating range: 2272mm (iLED 5), 2050mm (iLED 3) All arms
are freely rotatable (without stops) at all vertical joints. Number of stops: 1 (2 at iLED 3) At which joint:
connection between horizontal bow and light head (and connection between vertical and horizontal bow
with iLED 3) Rotation range joints with stop : > 400°C

Light system:
Surgical light with cold and shadow-free light, high lighting intensity and very homogeneous
large- area and in-depth illumination of the surgical field through unique multi lens matrix technology.
The colour temperature is adjustable in 4 steps from 3500K to 5000K. Within a light combination, in
order to avoid an undesirable mix of light colour from two separate light heads, when adjusting the colour
temperature on one light head, it is, as a standard setting, automatically synchronized with the other light
heads. This synchronization can be switched off and on as needed at the touch of a button. Light field
adjustment from 22cm to 30cm and focusing via steriliseable handle in the center of the light head. It is
operated by turning clock-wise in an ergonomic angle of not bigger than 45°C to reach the respective
maximum or minimum setting. All light heads can be dimmed in a range of 10% to 100%. The colour
temperature of the light remains constant in all dimming levels and is not subject to unwanted changes.
Activation and deactivation of the endo-light level (10% remaining lighting intensity) via the dimmer
control on one light head is, as a standard setting, synchronized for all other light heads within the light
combination. It can, if the need arises, be adjusted separately for each light head at the touch of a button.
Exceptional in-depth illumination and avoiding of cast shadows by means of an adjustable shadow
correction for 4 pre-defined Situation through switching on and off and adjusting the lighting intensity of
different parts of the light emitting surface respectively. (Only iLED5!)
Switching the light head on and off is possible in a sterile manner directly at the light head as well as on
the optional wall control panel. From one single control panel either only the respective light head or the
complete light combination can be switched on and off simultaneously. Switching on and off is without
any restriction in terms of holding time after switching off or with regard to the nominal light values after
switching on. No heat emission through IR radiation. High fail-safely through optical light system
consisting of 184 (iLED5) or respectively 111 (iLED3) single LEDs each with its own lens. In case of
failure of one source (LED), the illumination of the light field is not affected. Even in case of failure of a
second or more light sources, negative effects on the illumination of the surgical fields remain limited to a
minimum. Gaps and spaces between the single light emitting modules of the light head support the effect
of laminar air flow systems. Sterilizeable knob at the lower side of the light head for control of all light
function (dimming, endo-light colour temperature adjustment shadow control, switching on\off and if
applicable, camera zoom and picture rotation) by the surgical team itself (LED5!) Ligting intensity at 1 m
distance: 160,000 Lux (LED5) 130,000 Lux (LED 3) Size of light field at 1 m distance: 22-30 CM
Homogeneous light cylinder : 75 cm Colour temperature : 3500- 5000K
Colour rendering index : RA 95 Residual illumination with one shadower: 156.800 Lux (iLED 5) 94.120
Lux (iLED 3) Residual illumination with two shadower: 102.400 Lux (iLED 5) 67.600 Lux (ILED 3)
Residual illumination with tube : 147.200 lux (i LED 5) 113.100 lux (I LED 3) Resiudal illum with tube and
1 shadowder : 132.800 lux (iLEd 5) 76.700 lux (iLED3) Resiudal illum with tube and 1 shadowder: 75.000
lux (iLED5) 55.900 lux (I LED 3) Luminosity factor : 280 im/W Temperature increase at surgical site :

145
max. 1o degree C Life span of main light source : > 20.000h Nominal lamp power : 184 x 1W (I LED 5) 111
X 1w (iLED 3) Power input (per light head) : 200 W (I LED 5) 120 W (iLED 3) Supply Voltage : 90- 240 V
AC, 24 V DC, 24 V AC Protection class : 1.

Light Head:
Made of powder coated aluminum diecast with smooth and clean surfaces that are easy and safely to
clean. Dust and Splash – proof One – point suspended Diamer : 823 mm (Iled 5) or 690 mm (iLED3)
respectivey Temperature at working conditions above : approx 45 degree C Underneath < 1 degree C
The light head can be pre-equipped with preparation and the respective cabling for the camera system.

Camera :
1CCD chip camera for installation either in the central handle of the light head ao at a separate carrying
arm. Control of the camera functions via external control unit . In addition , picture rotation and camera
zoom can be adjusted via the sterelisable knob at the respective light head (only iLED 5 ! )
Signal transmission and power supply via inlaying cabling with slip rings in all vertical joints.
Chip 1/6 “ CCD Standard PAL / NTSC Pixels 800,000 PAL, 680,000 NTSC Zoom 25 * optical , 12 * digital
Lens f+2.4mm(far) bis 60 mm (tele), F1.6 bis F2.7 Signal/ Noise ratio 49 dB Shuter ¼ bsi1/10000s , 20
steps(NTSC) 1/3 bis 1/10000s, 20 steps (PAL) Horizontal resolution 470 TV lines ( NTSC), 460 TV lines
( PAL) Min illumination 3.0 lux (50 IRE)
White balance automatic/ manually
Gain automatic / manually ( -3 bis 28 dB , 16 steps)
Yn-/ Outputs at the control unit :
1. 2 * Y/C (S- Video)
2. 2* FBAS(Composite)
3. Optional 1* SDI
4. Optional MPEG 2/4 via LAN connector, Further connectors
5 1* LAN connector ( RJ 45)
6 1* Serial interface (RS 232 or 485-)
7 Optional 1* USB
8 Optional 1* Audio in/out

6) Equipment Specifications for Operating Microscope

1 Description of Function-None
2 Operational Requirements-None
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 (1) Motorized zoom magnification, 6:1 ratio
(2) Magnification from 1.8x to 15.8x or more with 10x eyepiece
(3) Variable working distance from 207 mm (+/- 25 mm) to 470 mm (+/-
25 mm) through motorized multi focal lens.
(4) Pair of wide-field eyepieces for spectacle wearers 10x, dioptric setting
+ 5D to - 5D
(5) Ergonomic handles with buttons for motorized control of focus and
zoom both hand & foot.
(6) Facility for adjusting speed of the focusing motor to adapt for different
magnifications.
(7) 300W xenon illumination and 12V/150W same independent Xenon
back up lamp through fiber optic cable.
(8) Inclinable binocular tube, inclinable over range of minimum 0-180 Deg.
(9) Facility for spot illumination
(10) Floor stand with electromagnetic brakes with freedom of movement in
all 6 axis.
(11) Floor stand should have adjustable carrying capacity, not less than 13
kgs.
(12) system should be upgradable for neuronavigation& flouroscence.
(13) Tool tracking facility
(14) It should have a graphic display LCD with background illumination with
at least 6 user defined settings.

146
 (15) It should stabilize less than 3 sec. & should rebooted less than 1 min.
(16) Camera should be independent of microscope.
(17) there should be a facility of a manual balance.
3.2 Essential Accessories:
(1) Stereoscopic coobservation attachment for second observer with
tiltable eyepieces, minimum 0-160 Deg.
(2) Integrated Beam Splitter
(3) 3-Chip CCD HD (high definition) output camera with c-mount for
connecting with the microscope & recording on a hard drive on mini DV
disks.
(4) Digital video recording facility with appropriate video editing software.
3.3 Optional Accessories:
(1) Diploscope (face to face attachment)
(2) 12-function footswitch
(3) Digital still camera for attachment with microscope

4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables-None

5 Environmental factors
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature of 0-
50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature of 20-30 deg C and
relative humidity of less than 70%

6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Resettable overcurrent breaker shall be fitted for protection
6.3 Voltage corrector /stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI Specifications. (Input
160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)
6.4 Suitable UPS with maintenance free batteries for minimum one-hour backup should be
supplied with the system.

7 Standards, Safety and Training

7.1 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality Standard.
7.2 Should be compliant with IEC 61010-1:(or any international equivalent eg EN/UL
61010) covering safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control
and laboratory use
7.3 Should be FDA, CE, UL or BIS approved product
7.4 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till familiarity with the
system.

8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine maintenance support
as per manufacturer documentation in service / technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service engineer
should be clearly spelt out.
8.6 Compliance Report to be submitted in a tabulated and point wise manner clearly
mentioning the page/para number of original catalogue/data sheet. Any point, if not
substantiated with authenticated catalogue/manual, will not be considered.

7. O.T .TABLE
It should satisfy following Specifications
1. Suitable for ophthalmic surgery

147
 2. Motorized
3. It should have Head rest and wrist support.
4. Maximum height : 900 mm approx.
5. Minimum Height : 580 mm approx.
6. It should have height adjustment facility. The approximate range for Height adjustment
should be 300 mm.
7. Length : 1900 mm approx.
8. Width : 700 mm approx.
9. Trendelenberg : 28 degree approx.
10. Reverse Trendelenberg : 15 degree approx.
11. It should have facility for instrument tray.

8. O.T .LIGHT
1 The light should comprise of 2 units,
i. one major which should have output between 120 k lux and 160 k lux
ii. One minor which should have output between 80 k lux and 100 k lux.
2 Each unit should have a central light bulb.
3 Should have a facility of continuous brightness adjustment.
4 Should be shadow free.
5 It should be multiple or single reflector Prismatic or Optical Block based system.
6 Should have provision of direct recording & display of operating field via an auto focus,
motor driven zoom lens, with digital video camera with high definition resolution
recordable on hard drive/ DVD/ Mini DV tapes. Preferably mounted into the sterilizeable
handle.
7 All cables should be through the central supporting pillar/column of light.
8 Should have dichroic mirrors and KG type glass filter for better thermal filtration so that
the light on the incident area is free from thermal properties and cold.
9 Bulbs should should be of standard Quartz Halogen 12/24 V ;50,75,100,150 Watts 2 pin
base. Nonstandard bulb with special f product which is using proprietary items such as
bulbs with special pins or wings with clips or base should not be considered because of
non-availability of such items in the market.
10 Changing of bulbs should be easy with no tools or with very simple tools like screw
drivers only and bulb base mounting should be independent of the sterilizable handles.
11 Changing of bulbs should not take more than 3-5 minutes.
12 The increase in the ambient temp of the room with the lights on should not be more than
3-5 degrees centigrade.
13 The light should be easily maneuverable and should have a swivel radius of at least 150
cms and height adjustment of at least 100 cms
14 The optimum colour temperature of the light should be between 3400-4200 Kelvin, with
colour rendering index of at least 90%
15 Each unit should provide a pre-focused beam of light with at least 50 cms depth of
field.
16 It should be a cool light and should not interfere with the laminar air flow system. The
absorption of infrared radiation should be more than 95% and infrared radiation to feet
at 100000 lux should be less than 35 w /sq meter
17 Each unit should have quartz halogen lamp of average life of 1000 hours
18 25 numbers of spare bulbs should be included
19 The light should have 360 degree turning radius with unbreakable head Glass.
20 Light should have battery back up automatic switch over facility
21 The handle should be Autoclavable & detachable.
22 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General Requirements of Safety for
Electromagnetic Compatibility. Or should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC-directive.
23 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature of 0
-50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
24 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of 10 -40deg
C and relative humidity of 15-90%

148
 25 It should be fitted with appropriate Indian plugs and sockets.
26 It should have Suitable Servo controlled Stabilizer
27 It should conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-60601-1 General
Requirements
28 It should supply with User/Technical/Maintenance manuals in English.
29 It should be supplied with Certificate of calibration and inspection.
30 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing should
beattached.
31 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist should be attached. The job description of the hospital technician and company
service engineer should be clearly spelt out.
32 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support should be attached, as per manufacturer documentation in
service/technical manual.

9. BOYLE’S APPARATUS
1. Boyle’s Apparatus should have rigid steel structure with four antistatic castors wheels
having front with brakes.
2. It should have Appro. (10”) long rotating bobbin flow meters, (rotameters) with colour
coded control knobs, calibrated in multiple scales for accurate reading.
3. It should have Oxygen (1st tube)-10 cc/mm to 3.5 liter/min
4. It should have Oxygen (2nd tube)- 3.5 liter/min to 10 liter/min
5. It should have Nitrous oxide (1st tube)- 200 cc/ min to 5 liter/min
6. It should have Nitrous oxide (2nd tube)- 5 liter / min to 12 liter/min
7. It should have Air-100 cc/min to 12 liter/min
8. It should have It should be Gas specific, gas blocks pin indexed yokes, two each for
oxygen & nitrous oxide & one for air suitable for pin- indexed cylinder. The equipment
shall also have attachment for connection of compressed air.
9. It should be Fitted with pressure gauges 100 mm diameter mounted on O2 and N2O
cylinder (2 each) for clear visibility.
10. It should have Vaporizer for ether, penlon type with graduated jar with mounted
selectatec. There should be Temperature compensated vaporizer for
halothane/isoflourine {optional}
11. It should be Fitted with regulators and non return cum pressure release valves for gases.
12. It should have Two Numbers oxygen pneumatic power outlets operating at 50 psi to
operate ventilator.
13. It should have Extended rear platform for mounting two nos additional 10 litre water
capacity cylinders.
14. It should have Patient circuit to include elephantine tubing reservoirs bag, connections
for changeover from open to closed circuit and vice versa.
15. It should have Top tray for monitoring equipment
16. It should have Drawer for keeping instruments.
17. In other respects the equipment shall comply with IS-11378-1985.
18. It should have adjustable pressure limiting valve, breathing circuit pressure measuring
device.
19. It should have a bag/ventilator selecting valve integrated onto the absorber.
20. It should be suitable to use low flow techniques - Facility to attach oxygen sensor.
21. It should have CO2 absorbent Dual chamber canister
22. It should have Automatic cutoff of nitrous oxide in case of oxygen supply {nitro lock
system}falls.
23. It should have Pneumatic device with audible alarm mechanical (not electrical) when
oxygen supply falls to 10-15 psi.
24. It should have Hypoxic safety device to ensure that the patient is never subjected to pure
N2O in flow out doses (shall ensure protection against singular flow of N2O) until a
minimum flow of 1 liter-1.5 liter oxygen released.
25. Unit shall incorporate optional oxygen analyzer (oxygen concentration level indicator).
26. The Regulator and Yoke should force with S.S fittings.

149
 27. The machine should have 3 inlets for O2 and N2O
28. It should have 2 oxygen outlets{optional}
29. There should at least one operating pressure gauge for O2 and N2O separately.
30. The operating pressure should be 4.22 kgf/sq.cm +/-0.5%
31. There shall be provision of adequate supply of oxygen to the patient even if the flow
meter knobs are fully turned off.
32. Unit shall conform to relevant safety standards and general safety standards as per IS-
8607.

10. Operation Theater Light Halogen (Seven Bulb)

Ceiling model With Spring Arm
Dome head: 715mm dia
Halogen Bulb: 7nos. 12x50watt
Light intensity at 1mt. 1,20,000 Lux
Intensity control 4 stage
Height adjustment 500mm
Action radius 1850mm
Possible movements radial angular & axial
Color temperature 4200k +- 300k
Temp. Rise in field 3’ – 6’c from amb. Temp.
Low voltage unit with CVT: 1nos
Input Supply voltage: 220volt A.C+-10% 50Hz+-2%

11. Operation Theater Light Halogen Twin (Seven Bulb + Four bulb)

Dome a (seven bulb)

Ceiling model With Spring Arm
Dome head: 715mm dia
Halogen Bulb: 7nos. 12x50watt
Light intensity at 1mt. 1,20,000 Lux
Intensity control 4 stage
Height adjustment 500mm
Action radius 1850mm
Possible movements radial angular & axial
Color temperature 4200k +- 300k
Temp. Rise in field 4’ – 8’c from amb. Temp.
Low voltage unit with CVT: 1nos
Input Supply voltage: 220volt A.C+-10% 50Hz+-2%

150
Dome B (Four Bulb)
Ceiling model With Spring Arm
Dome head: 515mm dia
Halogen Bulb: 4nos. 12x50watt
Light intensity at 1mt. 70,000 Lux
Intensity control 4 stage
Height adjustment 550mm
Action radius 1550mm
Possible movements radial angular & axial
Color temperature 4200k +- 300k
Temp. Rise in field 3’ – 6’c from amb. Temp.
Low voltage unit with CVT: 1nos
Input Supply voltage: 220volt A.C+-10% 50Hz+-2%

12. Universal Halogen Spot light

Non drift unit with 360’ degree rotation, with universal mounting bracket, convenient to

dismantle & reassemble, shock-proof energy saving halogen bulbs with minimum 500-1000

hours life, light intensity of 1250 foot candles at 16inch dia small spot for more accurate

diagnosis lamp head is compact and detachable lamp light temperature is kept at 3400 Kelvin

(K) to further enable identification of true tissue Color.

151
 EQUIPMENT PAEDTRACIS -11

1. Equipment Specifications for INFANT INCUBATOR SERVO

CONTROL
1 Description of Function
1.1 An infant incubator provides a closed, controlled environment that warms an
infant by circulating heated air over the skin. The heat is then absorbed into the
body by tissue conduction and blood convection. Ideally, both the skin and core
temperatures should be maintained with only minor variations.

2 Operational Requirements
2.1 High quality with humidity and servo controlled double walled with cabinet
incubator.
2.2 Microprocessor controlled, easy access control panel with feather touch
switches
2.3 With a facility to elevate base to offer adjustable range
2.4 Facility with both servo control as well as air temperature control and servo
humidifier
2.5 Accommodates shelves and IV poles.
2.6 The quality of the material used should very high and crystal transparent
2.7 Super quality microprocessor based control system - self test functions are
performed
2.8 System required complete with Oxygen port with tubing and Gel Mattress.

3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Continuous bed tilt up to 8° on either sides
3.2 Head end raise facility with auto lock.
3.3 Both visual and audible alarms for
(i) Patient and control and high / low temperature alarm.
(ii) Air circulation / probe / system / power failure alarm.
(iii) Humidity control alarm.
3.4 Facility to take x-ray and weight without removing baby.
3.5 Facility to display and trends of temperature information on compatible
monitors with other physiological parameter.
3.6 Height 140 cm + 5 cm, depth at least 60 mm , width at least 90 mm. Mattress to
hood distance 40 cm working level – 90 to 100 cm. Iris port for tubing, probes,
leads. 4cm thick gel mattress, easily cleanable. With at least 4” diameter caster
wheel with swivel in all directions and with front lockable wheels. Two shelves
cabinet with door. Weight 90-100 kg.
3.7 Patient control (Servo) mode – 35 deg-37 deg C. and Air Control (Manual mode)-
20 deg C to 39 deg C
3.9 Air velocity less than 10 cm/sec with inner wall.
3.10 Temperature variability less than +/-0.2 deg C and Temperature resolution +/-
1 deg C
3.11 Humidification. Standard: 10-75% dependent on nursery environment and
incubator temperature setting. Servo: 40-80% regardless of nursery
environment.
3.12 Double wall canopy with Four hand ports with elbow operated flaps.
3.13 C02 flushing, according to lEC 601-2-19 / 105.1
Maximum C02 concentration inside incubator 0.2%
3.14 Servo control for Oxygen with integrated monitoring
3.15 Noise level < 49 dB

152
 4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 System as specified
4.2 Two sets of extra non disposable sensors.

5 Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2:2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General Requirements of
Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility or should comply with 89/366/EEC;
EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 -40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI Specifications.
( Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)

7 Standards, Safety and Training

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality Standard.
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-60601-2-19:
Medical Electrical Equipment part 2 Particular Requirements of Safety of Baby
Incubator.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and provision of AMC for next 5 years.
Warranty and CMC should include circuit boards, canopy , mattress, knobs,
Hinges, doors, heating assembly, air filters, castor wheels.CMC should provide 2
non disposable temperature sensors every year per incubator.

8 Documentation to be provided.
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spares and accessories with their part number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

2. Equipment Specifications for Neonatal Intensive Care Incubator

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 An infant incubator provides a closed, controlled environment that warms an
infant by circulating heated air over the skin. The heat is then absorbed into the
body by tissue conduction and blood convection. Ideally, both the skin and core
temperatures should be maintained with only minor variations.

153
2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 High quality with humidity and servo controlled double walled with cabinet
incubator.
2.2 Microprocessor controlled, easy access control panel with feather touch
switches
2.3 With a facility to elevate base to offer adjustable range
2.4 Facility with both servo control as well as air temperature control and servo
humidifier
2.5 Accommodates shelves and IV poles.
2.6 The quality of the material used should very high and crystal transparent
2.7 Super quality microprocessor based control system - self test functions are
performed
2.8 System required complete with Oxygen port with tubing and Gel Mattress.

3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Continuous bed tilt up to 8° on either sides
3.2 Head end raise facility with auto lock.
3.3 Both visual and audible alarms for
(i) Patient and control and high / low temperature alarm.
(ii) Air circulation / probe / system / power failure alarm.
(iii) Humidity control alarm.
3.4 Facility to take x-ray and weight without removing baby.
3.5 Facility to display and trends of temperature information on compatible
monitors with other physiological parameter
3. 6 Height 140 cm + 5 cm, depth at least 60 mm , width at least 90 mm. Mattress to
hood distance 40 cm working level – 90 to 100 cm.
Iris port for tubing, probes, leads.
4cm thick gel mattress, easily cleanable.
With at least 4” diameter caster wheel with swivel in all directions and with
front lockable wheels. Two shelves cabinet with door.
Weight 90-100 kg.
3.7 Patient control (Servo) mode – 35 deg-37 deg C. and Air Control (Manual mode)-
20 deg C to 39 deg C
3.8 Air velocity less than 10 cm/sec with inner wall.
3.9 Temperature variability less than +/-0.2 deg C. and Temperature resolution
0.1 deg C
3.10 Average oxygen input concentration range 5-15 liters/min or 25-70%.
3.11 Humidification adjustable electronically with digital display . Standard: 10-80%
dependent on nursery environment and incubator temperature setting.
3.12 Double wall canopy with Six hand ports with elbow operated flaps with separate
ports for tubing.
3.13 CO2 flushing, according to lEC 601-2-19 / 105.1 Maximum C02 concentration
inside incubator 0.2%
3.14 Servo control for Oxygen with integrated monitoring
3.15 Noise level < 49 dB
3.16 Air filter :- 0.3 micron
3.17 Built in weighing scale with sensitivity of + 1 gm
3.18 Mattress should be radiolucent
3.19 Provision for X ray cassette holders
3.20 2 drawer storage facility and two platforms for keeping monitors , able to bear
at least 5 kg weight each.

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND

CONSUMABLES
4.1 System as specified

154
 4.2 Two sets of extra non disposable temperature sensors and humidification
sensors.

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General Requirements of
Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility or should comply with 89/366/EEC;
EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 -40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI Specifications.
( Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality Standard.
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-60601-2-
19:Medical Electrical Equipment part 2 Particular Requirements of Safety of
Baby Incubator.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and provision of AMC for next 5 years.
Warranty and CMC should include circuit boards, canopy , mattress,
humidification assembly, air filters , knobs, Hinges, doors, heating assembly,
castor wheels. CMC should provide 2 non disposable temperature sensors and
sensors for humidity control every year per incubator.

8 DOCUMENTATIONS TO BE PROVIDED
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spares and accessories with their part number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

3. Equipment Specifications for Transport Incubator with

Ventilator:

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 Required for transportation of premature babies and neonates and it can be
used for long distance transportation.

155
2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 It should be mobile intensive care station including transport ventilator,
monitors, incubator, rechargeable power supply unit and infusion stand

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 It should be mounted on collapsible trolley having lockable rust free castors of
the size 4 inches or more and with facility to mount two A type Aluminum
oxygen cylinders on rack under the Incubator .
3.2 Single walled incubator with at least two large port holes for access. Iris ports
for ventilator & other tubings. Bed level at least 80 cms. above ground level. Two
shelves cabinet with door.
3-3 Width: app 80 cm+ 5 cms. , Depth 30 cm + 5 cm, height 115 + 5 cms,
Mattress to hood distance at least 30 cms.
3.2 Air Mode: adjustable set temperatures between 20 – 39 C. Display of set
temperatures with resolution of 0.1 C. Skin mode adjustable set temperatures
between 34 – 38 C. Display of set temperatures with resolution of 0.1 C. 3.3
Alarms of High , Low and Probe failure for the set air mode up to +2.5 C and skin
mode of + 0.5 C of temperatures
3.4 Oxygen monitor in incubator hood with display of 21 – 100% Oxygen alarms for
high, low and probe failure.
3.5 Heart and Oxygen saturation monitor: Fixed, built monitors, dual wavelength
probe for Oxygen saturation with Digital LED display for Heart rate and Oxygen
saturation. Alarms for high and low for Heart Rate, Oxygen saturation and probe
failure
3.6 The system should have an internal rechargeable maintainence free battery to
ensure continued functioning of the unit for at least 4 hours during transport. It
should have automatic switch circuit for change over from battery to AC and
vice versa.
3.7 One suction apparatus with negative suction pressure of 5- 120 mm Hg should
be provided. IV fluid stand should support two infusion bottles
3.8 One Syringe infusion pump with stand compatible with 10, 20, and 50 ml
syringes compatible with locally available brand of syringes. Range of infusion
rate 1 – 99 ml / hr.in steps of 0.1ml. Display infusion rates, Alarms for
occlusions, end of infusion with internal rechargeable battery should be
provided along with the quoted price
3.9 Height less than 60”, depth less than 30”, width 33”-36”. Weight 90-100 kg.
With wheel mounted. (All dimensions in approximation of +/-10%)
3.9 VENTILLATOR SPECIFICATIONS:
a. The ventilator should provide IPPV, IMV, CPAP, SIMV and PEEP
modes.
b. It should be time cycled, pressure limited transport ventilator. It should
be capable of setting the parameters of PIP, PEEP, VR, Ti, FiO2 and flow.
c. There should build in oxygen/air mixer with monitoring facility.
d. It should have facility for integrated airway monitoring.
e. There should be battery back up for 4 hours
g. Alarm function should include audio visual alarm for high pressure, low
pressure, fall- to-cycle, low battery and gas mixture failure.
h. There should be choice to select frequency up to 100 bpm.
i. There should be built in noise free air compressor with filters for
appropriate medical usage.
j. There should be provision for continuous flow in IMV and CPAP modes
and should have reduced flow during expiration in IPPV mode
k. It should have automatic reciprocal gas-supply compensation of air
supplementation from environment in case of oxygen supply failure.
l. There should be digital display of PIP, PEEP, MAP and BPM.
m.A resuscitator to provide manual ventilation with mask should be
supplied along with the quoted price.

156
 3.10 There should be provision for bronchial suction with adjustable negative
pressure 0-5 bars and gas consumption should not be more than app 7 liters per
minute
3.11 The unit should have built in shock absorbers to cut off ay vibration and should
be fitted with safety device

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND

CONSUMABLES
4.1 System as specified. The incubator should be supplied with non-disposable 4
patient circuits for neonates, 10 saturation monitoring probes (2 non-disposable
and 8 diposable), 5 non-disposable skin probes for temperature monitoring,

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General Requirements of
Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.or should comply with
89/366/EEC;EMC-directive.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 -40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz
6.2 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI Specifications.
(Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality Standard.
7.3 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after warranty
7.4 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-60601 / IS-
13450

8 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. As per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service
engineer should be clearly spelt out

157
4. Equipment Specifications for Ventilators Neonatal

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 For ventilating neonates, pre mature and infants babies.

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 System with battery back up is required.

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1
1. Essentials Ventilator Air Compressor Reusable Circuit with online bacterial filter
Humidifier
Stand for circuit
Operator manual
Service manual
2. Type of ventilator Continuous flow, time cycled, pressure limited
3. Modes available CPAP, IMV, SIMV, Assist/Control, PSV, Volume Guarantee,
Triggers, Flow & Volume triggers
4. Range of set parameters
Peak inspiratory pressure 0-50 cms
Positive end expiratory pressure 0-20 cms
Fraction of inspired oxygen 21-100%
Inspiratory time 0.1- 3 secs
Rate 0-150 bpm
Gas flow 5-15 Lpm
5. Display Both digital and analog All set parameters as mentioned above
Measured parameters
PIP, PEEP, Mean airway pressure
FiO2
Ventilator rate
Derived parameters
Te, I:E ratio
Leak percentage
Tidal volume
Minute ventilation
Pressure & flow waveforms and loops
Alarm message
Calibration
Silenced alarm
6. Alarms Both audio & visual
Low & high pressure – PIP , PEEP separate
Compressor failure
Failure of sensor/s
Tube obstructed
Power failure
Alarm ventilator failure
7. Humidifier Heater with Flow resistance upto 1 cm H2O/L/Sec
Temperature up to 39 degrees C
Temperature control + 2C Warm
Digital display of temperature- range of display 5-40C
Water level indicator
Warm up time less than 15 minutes
Alarms
Heater wire on:

158
 Airway temp: Tracking + 2C from set temp
Chamber temp: If chamber temp varies +4C from set temp for 20 minutes or
alarms immediately if set chamber is exceeded by 1C
Heater wire off:
Airway temp: Fixed at 41C high & 29.5 C Low
Chamber temp: limited to 60C max
Should be compatible with both reusable & disposable chambers and reusable &
disposable circuits
Flow / pressure sensor- 20 each

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND

CONSUMABLES
4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.
4.3 Spares with each ventilator
Reusable circuit with Y piece, heater wire, temp probe & adapter - 5 each
Bacterial filter- 5 each
Reusable humidifier chamber - 5 each
Sensor cable- 5 each
Oxygen cells - 2 each

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 - 40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection for 60
minutes back up.

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.3 Shall comply with electrical safety requirements as per IEC or BIS regulations.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years CMC after warranty.
Comprehensive maintenance contract for 5 years after warranty
CMC should include all the parts of the ventilator including circuit boards, O2
blender, air compressor, knobs, flow meters etc.
CMC should provide every year per ventilator of following
Humidifier chamber-5
Bacterial filter- 5
Flow/pressure sensors- 20 and
Oxygen cells - 2
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till familiarity with
the system.

8 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.

159
 8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service
engineer should be clearly spelt out

5. Equipment Specifications for Open Care System for Neonates

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 Required for care of new born and infants

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Complete system with cart and oxygenation facility is required.

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Essential parts : Cart & bassinet
Warming system with controls & alarms
Examination light
Storage space- 2 sliding drawers below
bassinet 2 platforms of the size 9” x 12” capable of holding up to 5 Kgms of
equipments
Cart: Should swivel on 4 wheels of at least 5” dia- with foot operated., 2 front
lockable wheels.
Dimensions
Height : 180-200 cms
Width : 60-70 cms
Depth : 100-120 cms
Working level : 95-110 cms and adjustable
Bassinet : 1 fixed and 3 movable transparent side walls:Portion above X-Ray
cassette holder radiolucent Mattress
Width : 55 – 60 cms
Length : 65- 70 cms
Thickness : Minimum 4 cms
Material : Soft, Comfortable, easy to clean, radiolucent
Bassinet tilt in steps of 6 – 8 degrees, Trendelenburg or reverse Trendelenburg
Warmer module swivel : 45-65 degrees on either side
Warming systems
Modes :Manual & skin
Manual mode :Adjustable in steps from zero to 100
Skin mode
Method : Flexible, unbreakable skin temperature probe Set
point range : 34 – 38 degrees C
Skin temp variability at Temperature equilibrium :+ 0.2 degrees C
Skin temperature display
Accuracy : + 0.2 degrees C
Type : digital LED with 0.1 degree resolution
Correlation of displayed And actual skin temp : difference 0.2 degrees C
Silence/ Reset switch : To silence the alarm & reset set point
Alarms: Probe failure

160
 Heat failure
High and low temperature
Power failure
System failure
Examination light : Illuminance 100 foot candles at mattress center
Storage space : 2 drawers, preferably covered and sliding
Pulse oximeter : to measure oxygen saturation and heart rate resistant to
motion artifact. Able to pick up signals in low perfusion states.
CPAP system : Flow driven With air oxygen blender and FiO2 control, with
heated humidifier, airway pressure display 0-15 cm H2O, With bonnet, cap and
nasal prongs (10 of each size) for babies 600 gm-4000 gms, with reusable
circuits, with 1 reusable flow generator
Power requirements : 220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz,
Accessories
I.V. line pole with pivot bracket : should be able to accommodate 2 fluid bottles
Monitor shelves : 2 in number
: Should support upto approx. 20 kgs per shelf or upto 25 kgs total on single side
Standard X- Ray cassette holder : sliding holder located just below
undersurface of Bassinet, with markings to help placement of cassette
Patient Probes : 4 reusable temperature probes
4 reusable oxygen saturation probes
2 patient extension cables for the saturation probes

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND

CONSUMABLES
4.1 System as specified
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 - 40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection for 60
minutes back up.

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years CMC after warranty.
CMC would include all electronic and mechanical items including PCBs and
heater elements. It should provide every year per unit four re usable
temperature probes, four oxygen saturation monitor probes, 20 Flow generator,
and CPAP circuit.
Prices for all consumables – temperature probes ,saturation probes , extension
cable, heater element, halogen bulb, nasal prongs, bonnet, cap. Flow generator,
and CPAP circuit should also be quoted separately and should be valid for 7
years
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till familiarity with the
system.

161
 8 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service
engineer should be clearly spelt out

6. Equipment Specifications for NEONATAL PHOTOTHERAPY

UNIT – CFL

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 Phototherapy units are used to treat hyperbilirubinemia, a condition
characterized by high bilirubin concentrations in the blood.These units are also
called: bilirubin lamps, bilirubin lights, fiberoptic phototherapy blankets,
neonatal phototherapy units

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Should be Compact Florescent Lamp (CFL) based Phototherapy unit used for
clinical management of neonatal hyperbilirubinemia
2.2 Lamp unit should be made with plastic lamp module with metallic top cover for
efficient heat dissipation to reduce radiant heat on infant.
2.3 Should occupy very little bedside space, offer convenience in observation and
procedures
2.4 The unit should be mobile with 3 swivel castors of 2” diameter fixed to a
Tshaped base to be accommodated beneath trolley/bed with adjustable height.

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
3.1 Irradiance at 430 – 480 nm- effective to the baby of at least 18 mw/cm/nm at
45cm from the lamp.
3.2 Lamps: compact florescent lamps
3.3 Height adjustable:(app+/-5 cm): 138cm (minimum) – 190 cm (maximum)
3.4 Lamp tiltability :- horizontal to vertical at any angle.
3.5 Time totaliser : Mechanical / Electronic
3.6 Therapy duration timer: Resettable – optional
3.7 Height of the base app: 6-8 cm (at the front)
3.8 Size of the lamp unit (LxBxH) 47 x 40 x 9 cm +/- 5 cm
3.9 Coating: Epoxy / Powder coated body for scratch and rust prevention

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

4.1 System as specified
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.
4.3 100 bulbs should be supplied along with each unit
4.4 Phototherapy eye pads 100 each for preterm and term babies to be provided
free.

162
 5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection for 60
minutes back up.

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Shall CERTIFIED to be meeting Electrical Safety requirements as per IEC 60601-
2-50 Medical Electrical Equipment part-2-50 Particular requirements for the
safety of Infant Phototherapy Equipments
7.3 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years CMC after warranty and it
includes checking flux as per specification every month. CMC would include all
electrical, electronic and mechanical items. The CMC should provide at least 100
CFL lamps every year per unit.

8 DOCUMENTATIONS TO BE PROVIDED
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

7. Equipment Specifications for NEONATAL PHOTOTHERAPY UNIT

–TUBE LIGHTS

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 Phototherapy units are used to treat hyperbilirubinemia, a condition
characterized by high bilirubin concentrations in the blood.These units are also
called: bilirubin lamps, bilirubin lights, fiberoptic phototherapy blankets,
neonatal phototherapy units

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Should be Tube light based Phototherapy unit used for clinical management of
neonatal hyperbilirubinemia
2.2 Lamp unit should be made with metallic lamp module with metallic top cover
for efficient heat dissipation to reduce radiant heat on infant.

163
 2.3 Should occupy very little bedside space, offers convenience in observation and
procedures
2.4 The unit should be mobile with 3 swivel castors of 2” diameter fixed to a
Tshaped base to be accommodated beneath trolley/bed with adjustable light.

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Dimensions
Height :- adjustable with upper limit at least going up to 1570 mm
Width :- 730 mm +10 mm
Length :- 500 + 10 mm
3.2 Irradiance at 430 – 480 nm-- effective to the baby of atleast 18 mw/cm/nm at
45cm from the lamp.
3.3 Lamps: (6 Blue) compact florescent lamps ( of 20 wt. Each) of TL 52 (Philips) or
equivalent.
3.4 Lamp tiltability :- horizontal to vertical at any angle
3.5 Time totaliser : Mechanical / Electronic
3.6 Therapy duration timer: Resettable – optional
3.7 Height of the base app: 6-8 cm (at the front)
3.8 Coating: Epoxy / Power coated body for scratch and rust prevention
3.9 Ballastic chocks should be located at the base to decrease the heat and increase
the stability of the unit.

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND

CONSUMABLES
4.1 System as specified
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.
4.3 25 tube lights should be supplied along with each unit

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection for 60
minutes back up.

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Shall CERTIFIED to be meeting Electrical Safety requirements as per IEC 60601-
2-50 Medical Electrical Equipment part-2-50 Particular requirements for the safety of
Infant Phoototherapy Equipments
7.3 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after warranty and it
includes checking flux as per specification every month.

164
 8 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

8. Equipment Specifications for FIBRE OPTIC PHOTOTHERAPY

LAMP

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 Phototherapy units are used to treat hyperbilirubinemia, a condition
characterized by high bilirubin concentrations in the blood.These units are also called:
bilirubin lamps, bilirubin lights, fiberoptic phototherapy blankets, neonatal
phototherapy units

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Fibreoptic phototherapy for greater uniformity of radiation
2.2 Compact and smaller sized equipment than conventional phototherapy.

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Bili light lamp with fibre optic cable and optic fibre pad of size 22 x 10.5 cms +/-
10%
3.2 Halogen lamp optic assembly.
3.3 Special group of filters to screen heat and filter ultra violet rays
3.4 Emitted radiation to have wave length between 425-475 nm.
3.5 Light beam to be conveyed to patient through optic fibre cable and a pad.
3.6 The pad to be sealed, waterproof and hygienic.

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND

CONSUMABLES
4.1 System as specified
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.
4.3 10 Extra halogen bulb with each phototherapy
4.4 Bili light lamp should be with a trolley with pivoting casters and basket for
storing disposable and optic fibre pad

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 to 40 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

165
 6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection for 60
minutes back up.

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Shall CERTIFIED to be meeting Electrical Safety requirements as per IEC 60601-
2-50 Medical Electrical Equipment part-2-50 Particular requirements for the
safety of Infant Phototherapy Equipments
7.3 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality Standard.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years CMC after warranty and it
includes checking flux as per specification every month. CMC would include all
fibre optic cable and blanket, and electrical, electronic and mechanical items.

8 DOCUMENTATIONS TO BE PROVIDED
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

9. Equipment Specifications for DOUBLE SURFACE PHOTOTHERAPY

UNIT – TUBE LIGHTS

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 Phototherapy units are used to treat hyperbilirubinemia, a condition
characterized by high bilirubin concentrations in the blood.These units are also called:
bilirubin lamps, bilirubin lights, fiberoptic phototherapy blankets, neonatal
phototherapy units

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Should be Tube light based Phototherapy unit used for clinical management of
neonatal hyperbilirubinemia
2.2 Lamp unit should be made with metallic lamp module with metallic top cover
for efficient heat dissipation to reduce radiant heat on infant.
2.3 Should occupy very little bedside space, offers convenience in observation and
procedures
2.4 The unit should be mobile with 3 swivel castors of 2” diameter fixed to a
Tshaped base to be accommodated beneath trolley/bed with adjustable height.
The bassinet unit should be mounted on four swivel castor of four inch dia. And
should be able to move independently of the top unit.

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Dimensions

166
 Height :- adjustable with upper limit at least going up to 1570 mm
Width :- 730 mm +10 mm
Length :- 500 + 10 mm
Bassinet unit
Height :- 1015 mm + 10 mm
Width :- 750 mm +10 mm
Length :- 525 + 10 mm
Transparent cabinet with two collapsible walls.
3.2 Irradiance at 430 – 480 nm-- effective to the baby of at least 18 mw/cm/nm at
45cm from the lamp.
3.3 Lamps: (6 Blue) tube lights of 20 watts. Each of TL 52 (Philips) or equivalent for
each unit.
3.5 Time totaliser : Electronic
3.6 Therapy duration timer: Resettable
3.7 base unit approx.: 6-8 cm from the mattress unit.
3.8 Coating: Epoxy / Powder coated body for scratch and rust prevention
3.9 Ballastic chocks should be located at the base to decrease the heat and increase
the stability of the unit.

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND

CONSUMABLES
4.1 System as specified
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.
4.3 25 tube lights should be supplied along with each unit
4.4 Phototherapy eye pads 100 each for preterm and term babies to be provided
free.

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50 deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 to 40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection for 60
minutes back up.

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Shall CERTIFIED to be meeting Electrical Safety requirements as per IEC 60601-
2-50 Medical Electrical Equipment part-2-50 Particular requirements for the
safety of Infant Phototherapy Equipments
7.3 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years CMC after warranty and it
includes checking flux as per specification every month. CMC would include all
electrical, electronic and mechanical items. The CMC should provide at least 25
blue light tubes every year per unit.

167
 8 DOCUMENTATIONS TO BE PROVIDED.
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

10. Equipment Specifications for Electronic weighing balance for

newborns:

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 Electronic weighing balances are required to weigh the baby weight accurately.

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Accurate and rugged system is required

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1
Digital weighing scale
Range 0-10 kg
Accuracy : + 5 grams
Display : Bright up to 3 decimal points
Units : in grams/kg
Baby pan/platform : 50 cm x 30 cm +/– 10 %
Easily cleaned and disinfected Tare facility
Should be able to stabilize the readings in spite of baby movements
Memory : Up to 10 readings
Mounting : On a lightweight compact mobile trolley

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 -40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

168
 6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power supply : 220/240V 50/60 Hz with DC adaptor. Capable of running on
battery

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.3 Shall comply with electrical safety requirements as per IEC or BIS regulations.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years CMC after warranty

8 DOCUMENTATIONS TO BE PROVIDED
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service
engineer should be clearly spelt out

11. Equipment Specifications for Paediatric Laproscope set with

Accessories

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 Laproscopic surgery in Paediatrics

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 3 Chip Camera
2.2 Video processor
2.3 Insufflator
2.4 Telescope
2.5 Instruments
2.6 Accessories

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 - 3 Chip Camera
1. Integrated zoom lens
2. F25- 50 mm
3. Beam splitter
4. Digital zoom
5. Freeze frame facilities
6. With digital video
7. With DV cable
3.2 Video processor
1. Hi definition Video 1289 x 1024 native resolution
2. Control of the two peripheral accessories at camera head
3. One standard RGB output

169
 4. S VHS output - 2 Nos
5. S VHS (Video composits) output – 2 Nos
3.3 Insufflator
1. 20 litres advance continuous electronic CO2, flow technology (not
intermittent flow) should not have any disruption between gas flow and
pressure reading.
2. Digital decimal (0.1 Resolution) display of flow and pressure
parameters.
3. User selectable safely blow off pressure settings
4. Pressure releasing mechanism should be controlled by in built software
5. Measurement of pressure up to 50 mm of mercury
6. Desirable – Thermal Insufflator system
3.4 Telescope
1. Rod – lens technology 5 mm 0o , length 24 cm ( 1No)
2. Rod lens technology 5 mm 30o length 24 cm(1 No)
3. Autoclavable and wide angled.
3.5 Instruments
1. 3 mm dissecting and grasping forceps, double action jaws, length 20 cm
–1
2. 3 mm dissecting and grasping forceps heavy, double action jaws, length
20 cm – 1
3. 3 mm dissecting and grasping forceps with ratchet single action jaws
with atraumatic fine serration – 2
4. 5 mm size tracar with conical tip, cannula with LUER lock connection
forinsufflation length 5 cm, silicon leaflet valves – 2
5. 3 mm size tracar with conical tip, cannula with LUER lock connection
for insufflation length 5 cm, silicon leaflet valves – 2
6. 10 mm size tracar with conical tip, cannula with LUER lock connection
for insufflation length 5 cm, silicon leaflet valves – 2
7. 3 mm scissors length 20 cm with serrated jaws curved conical double
action jaws. - 1
8. 3 mm scissors length 20 cm single action jaws- 1
9. 3 mm coagulation and dissection electrode length 20 cm L shaped
insulated with connector pin for unipolar coagulation - 1
10. 3 mm palpation probe distendable length 20 cm – 1
11. 3 mm micro needle holder handle with rachet length 20 cm – 1
12. Irriagation and suction cannula with 2 way stop cock – 1
13. 2 way stop cock -1
14. 3 mm pylorotome length 20 cm distendable – 1
15. knot guide with eyelet – 1
16. Clip applicator

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND

CONSUMABLES
4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.
4.3 Accessories
1. Electro Surgical Unit (Cautery)
Electro Surgical Unit (Cautery) with bipolar cut and coagulation, under water
operation, spray coagulation, 300 watts, units should have cut control , with
minimum neorosis. High cut with specialized are regulation for under water
cuts or in fatty structures. Soft coagulation for precisely controlled coagulation,
no carbonization, less adhesions,. Bi polar coagulation for greater safety. PPS for
intelligent support or initial incisions and cutting should include HF cables both
bipolar and unipolar. Foot switch, patient plate 1 set
2. Light source

170
 1. 220 volts, 300 watt, Xenon/ Halogen (twin Bulb) with elliptical Bulb
design
2. Bulb working life 500 hrs
3. Bulb life counter on light source
4. Automatic light Adjustment
5. Stand by button
6. universal jaw assembly to adapt any make of Fiber optic
7. cable without adapter with single hand operation
8. Automatic shutter
9. Spare bulbs – 2
10. Spare light cable 2
3. Medical grade LCD Monitor 20” – 1
4. Endoscopic/ laproscopic Trolly -1
5. Gas Cylinder (CO2) 9 kg – 1
6. High pressure tubing - 1
7. Cidex Trya – 1
8. Formaline chamver 26” – 1
9. Servo stabilizer 1.0 KVA – 1

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 - 40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection for 60
minutes back up.

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.3 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of medical electric
equipment part2- particular requirements for the safety of Haemodialysis
equipment.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after warranty
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till familiarity with the
system.

8 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service
engineer should be clearly spelt out

171
12. Equipment Specifications for Video Endoscope system upper GI
Pediatric Surgery

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 System required for upper GI endoscopy for children

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 _ Videoprocessor with light source -- 1 no.
_ Gastro intestinal videoscope -- 2nos.
_ Duodenovideoscope -- 1 No.
_ Endoscope washer -- 1 No.
_ Accessories
_ Hardware for recording & archiving

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 1. PAL type video signal.
2. Controls for color adjustment, to enhancement and balance settings.
3. Controls to freeze images, enhance a portion of frozen image (zoom &
post-processing).
4. Patient and physician data input key board..
5. Operates on Halogen lamp/Xenon Lamp .
6. Emergency lamp.
7. Compatibility with the gastro scope, colonoscope and duodenoscope.
8. 15/17/19” LCD colour monitor with XGA resolution.
B. Forward Viewing Gastro Duodenoscope
1. Direction of view should be zero degree.
2. Minimum of 140 degree field view.
3. Range of observation at least from 5 mm to 90 mm.
4. Angulations of tip up and down of at least 180/180 degrees with right
and left movement of at least100/100 degrees.
5. Insertion tube diameter of less than 10 mm.
6. Distal end diameter of not more than 10.5 mm
7. Instrument channel of more than 2.5 mm
8. Working length of not less than 1000mm
Should be compatible with the video system specified.
9. PAL type video signal.
10. Controls for color adjustment, to enhancement and balance settings.
11. Controls to freeze images, enhance a portion of frozen image (zoom &
post-processing).
12. Patient and physician data input key board..
13. Operates on Halogen lamp/Xenon Lamp .
14. Emergency lamp.
15. Compatibility with the gastro scope, colonoscope and duodenoscope.
16. 15” LCD colour monitor with XGA resolution.
B. Forward Viewing Gastro Duodenoscope
9. Direction of view should be zero degree.
10. Minimum of 140 degree field view.
C. Three Chip Camera
1) High Definition Camera control unit
2) High definition Camera Head with 24 mm Coupler, 3.5 mtr cable
Specification and features
1. Only medical grade camera with the true digital output
2. High definition digital circuitry 3 chip camera

172
 3. With 8 steps built-in digital enhancer
4. Electronic zooming
5. High definition features DIGITAL PROGRESSIVE SCANNING
TECHNOLOGY
6. Digital : Hi Definition (HD) Video 1289 x 1024 native resolution.
7. Small and ergonomic camera head for superior control.
8. Standard aspect ratio – To allow maximum exiting video equipment
9. Four button camera head design – control of six functions from the
camera head.
10. Multi specialty settings – user selectable specialty settings which
customize video output for the unique needs of different cases.
11. Signal to noise ratio > 70 db
12. Minimum illumination < 0.5 lux without gain enhancement
13. Control of the two peripheral accessories at camera head
14. One standard RGB output
15. 2 S VHS output
16. 2 S VHS (Video Composits) output
17. 2 Remote Output
18. Digital Image Capturing and Processing device should be able directly
record the images, take high resolution still snap shots, process the
videos, edit and should burn DVDs in high resolution.

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 - 40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection for 60
minutes back up.

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.3 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of medical electric
equipment part2- particular requirements for the safety of Haemodialysis
equipment.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after warranty
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till familiarity with the
system.

8 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.

173
 8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service
engineer should be clearly spelt out

13. Equipment Specifications for PEDIATRIC SURGERY OT TABLE

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 For use in operation theater for neonates, infants and children

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Electrically operated hydraulic operating Table for standard procedures of
surgeries

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Length – 1800 mm Width – 400-600 mm
Hydraulic movements: -
1. Raising and lowering
Minimum height 650 mm
Maximum height 1100 mm
2. Lateral tilt – Left/right 28 degrees
3. Trendelenburg and reverse – 30 degree
4. Backrest section – 70 degrees up right, 30 degree down
5. Leg section – completely flat to right angle and detachable (for perineal
procedures)
6. Headrest - +25 0 / -45 0 (Detachable)
7. Kidney Bridge
8. Longitudinal displacement of the tabletop - 250 mm
Table should be C-Arm compatable
Tabletop should be X-Ray compatable
Mounted on Castor Wheels – so movement is smooth
Mechanical pedal brake – for firm and rigid locking
Brake release – Free to move
Radiolucent top and cassette carrier
Stainless steel base, body and accessories
For specialized procedures-Hand surgery, Femoral Tibial,and
interlock surgery
Lightweight and excellent manoeuvrability
Electro hydraulic pump in addition to the hydraulic foot pump
Five part, radiolucent tabletop
Remote hand control to activate the electro hydraulic pump
Table adjustments–High/ Low, Trendelenberg & lateral tilt
position,lithotomy position

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

4.1 System as specified-
4.2 All consumables required for installation and standardization of system to be
given free of cost.

174
 4.3 Accessories : -
Anaesthetic frame
Padded side support
Intravenous arm board
Padded Shoulder Support
Wristlets
A pair of knee crutches
Foot rest with stainless top
Armrest
Body restraint strap
Wrist strap
Infusion rod
Attachment clamp
Head ring
Rack for accessories
Cassette carriers (X- ray)
Padded Lithotomy crutches with adjustable height (Two nos)
Additional Accessories one each

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0 -50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of
10 - 40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Rechargeable batteries and Battery charger 230V

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.2 Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.3 Shall comply with IEC 60601-2-16 SAFETY requirements of medical electric
equipment part2- particular requirements for the safety of Haemodialysis
equipment.
7.4 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after warranty
7.5 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till familiarity with the
system.

8 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine Preventive
Maintenance Support. as per manufacturer documentation in service/technical
manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service
engineer should be clearly spelt out

175
14. Equipment Specifications for ULTRASONIC ASPIRATOR FOR
PEDIATRIC SURGERY

1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
1.1 Ultrasonic aspirators use mechanical ultrasonic vibration and an
irrigation/suction system to fragment and remove soft tissue and high-watercontent
growths from various parts of the body.

2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 The system should be quoted with the paediatric as well as adult hand pieces.

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Surgical aspirator should be based on magneto-restriction or piezoelectric
technology.
3.2 The hand piece must be cooled if required to prevent overheating by coaxial
flow of water.
3.3 The hand pieces should be autoclavable and without need to dismantle for
autoclaving.
3.4 The vacuum pump should provide preferably the suction up to 700mm of Hg.
3.5 It should incorporate an Electro-surgical unit fitted on ultrasonic hand piece for
coagulation and cutting function.
3.6 The console unit should house control panel storage for foot switch, electrical
cords and self-contained suction apparatus.
3.7 The unit should include all necessary control preferably color-coded, which may
include amplitude, irrigation, aspiration and tissue select mode.
3.8 It should have safety features like optical signal for failed hand pieces and signal
for failed unit.
3.9 It should have on and off button.
3.10 It should have integral suction with vacuum pressure of-20 to -90 Kpa or 0.9 bar
in continuous low noise and digital display.
3.11 It should preferably have 2 liter capacity container of unbreakable material with
level sensor and anti-overflow system.
3.12 Hand piece should be light, preferable 20 -35 KHz and amplitude should be
>130 micrometers
3.13 The hand piece should be able to accommodate selection of tips for wide range
of applications.
3.14 The internal diameter of tips should range form 1.0 to 3.0mm.
3.15 The irrigation pump should be inbuilt in the unit, the irrigation output 0-
65ml/min.
3.16 All hand pieces/ instruments should be detachable.

4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ACCESSORIES, SPARES AND

CONSUMABLES
4.1 ACCESSORIES:
1. Trolley.
2. Ultrasonic probe-curved, 2 each of variable length for 23 KHz and 35
KHz.
3. Assembly kit for aspirator- 1
4. Aspirator with 2 liters suction bottle with disposable secretion bag-1
5. Infusion bottle holder-1
6. Double foot switch-1
7. Cleaning brush for instrument lumen-2

176
 8. Instrument connection cables- 2
9. Suction / irrigation tubing (5meter each), silicon twin tube-2.
10. Double set of cable and tubing clips- 10sets.
11. Metal puncture tube - 2
12. Sterilizing cassette with silicon mat and textile filter-2.
4.2 CONSUMABLES:
1. Textile filters for sterilizing cassette-10 pieces.
2. Suction/ Irrigation tubing (5 meter each) - 10 pieces.
3. Cable and tube clips - 5X 10 pieces.
4. Suction and Irrigation tubing, silicon twin tube (4.5 meters each) - 5
pieces
5. Disposable secretion bags 2 liters- 2 pieces.
6. Connection nipple, suction tube / secretion reservoir - 5 pieces.
7. Internal flushing tube - 5 pieces.
8. Protective cover-4 pieces.

5 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature
of 0-50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 Thu unit shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature of 20-30 deg C
and relative humidity of less than 70%
5.3 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General Requirements of
Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility or should comply with 89/366/EEC;
EMC-directive.

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power input to be 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Resettable over current breaker shall be fitted for protection
6.3 Voltage corrector/stabilizer of appropriate ratings meeting ISI Specifications.
(Input 160-260 V and output 220-240 V and 50 Hz)
6.4 Suitable UPS with maintenance free batteries for minimum one-hour back-up
should be supplied with the system.

7 STANDARDS, SAFETY AND TRAINING

7.1 Manufactures/Supplier should have ISO certificate to Quality Standard.
7.2 Should be compliant with IEC 61010-1:(or any international equivalent eg
EN/UL 61010) covering safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement control and laboratory use
7.3 Should be FDA , CE,UL or BIS approved product
7.4 Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till familiarity with the
system.
7.5 Comprehensive warranty for 2 years and 5 years AMC after warranty

8 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine maintenance
support as per manufacturer documentation in service / technical manual.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and
costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly
maintenance checklist. The job descriptin of the hospital technician and
company service engineer should be clearly spelt out.

177
 8.6 Compliance Report to be submitted in a tabulated and point wise manner clearly
mentioning the page/para number of original catalogue/data sheet. Any point, if
not substantiated with authenticated catalogue/manual, will not be considered.

15. PEDIATRIC CYSTOSCOPE / RESECTOSCOPE 8-10F

1. CYSTOURETHROSCOPE FOR NEONATES AND CHILDREN

A). Telescopes:
1. Telescope ( one each ) Autoclavable 134 ° C / 273°F with enlarged
image & brightness size 1.9 mm, 00
2. Telescope ( one each) Autoclavable 134 °C , 273oF With enlarged image
and brightness , size 1.9 mm , 25°
B). Sheath with obturator with fixed irrigation channel with stop cock
1. Size 7.5 Fr. ( one each) for diagnostic use with 0 ° telescope
2. Size 8.5 Fr. (one each) with instrument port capacity 3Fr.
3. Size 9.5 Fr.(one each) with instrument port capacity 4Fr.
a) Electrode : ( one each)
1. Button electrode, flexible , uniploar , 580 mm length and 3 Fr. Size
2. Button electrode, flexible , uniploar , 580 mm length and 4 Fr. Size

2. CYSTORESECTOSCOPE - FOR NEONATES AND CHILDREN

A. Sheath with obturator with fixed irrigation channel with stopcock with distal
end insulated
Size 9 Fr. ( one each) with instrument port capacity 3Fr.
B. Adaptor (bridge) – one each for examination and probing with one instrument
port of 3Fr.capacity
C. Working element with passive cutting action – (one each)
D. Accessories:
a) Electrodes
1. Coagulating electrodes for resectoscope with telescope of 1.9 mm
angled 90 ° retrograde. Sickle shaped with distal ball - ( Two each)
2. Cutting electrode for resectoscope with telescope of 1.9 mm ( 2 each)
b) Rigid grasping forceps: for Stent Removal Length 580 mm , size – 3Fr.(one)
Rigid grasping forceps: for Stent Removal . Length 580mm , size – 5Fr.(one)
c) Biopsy forceps: Length 260 mm, size 3 Fr. (one)
Biopsy forceps: Length 260 mm, size 5 Fr. (one)
3). Fibre optic cable : ( one)
1.6 mm diameter, 1.8 m long
4). Light Source (one),
15 V. 150 Watt, Twin bulb, halogen

3. Cystouretheroscope for children

A Telescope
Telescope - (one each) - Autoclavable 134 °C/ 273 °F, with enlarged image and
brightness Size 2.7 mm , 0° Telescope - (one each) - Autoclavable 134 °C/ 273 °F,
with enlarged image and brightness Size 2.7 mm , 25°
B Sheath with obturator with fixed irrigation channel with stop cock
1. Size 11 Fr. (One each ) - for diagnostic use with 0° telescope
2. Size 12 Fr. ( One each) - with one instrument port capacity
3. Size 13 Fr. ( One each) - with two instrument ports capacity
C. Electrodes – ( Two)
Button electrode , flexible unipolar , 580 mm length and 5 Fr. Size

178
 4. CYSTORESECTOSCOPE - FOR CHILDREN
A. Sheath with obturater with fixed irrigation channel with stopcock with
distal end insulated Size 11.5 Fr. ( One each) With instrument port capacity 5
Fr.
B. Adaptor (Bridge) ( one)
For examination with out instrument port
C. Working element with passive cutting action ( one)
D. Accessories
a. Electrodes
1. Coagulating electrode for resectoscope with telescope of 2.7 mm, angled
90 ° retrograde, Sickle shaped with distal ball – 6 No.s
2. Cutting electrode for resectoscope with telescope of 2.7mm.- 3 No.s
NOTE
1) The supplied instruments should have warranty period of 3 years
2) Annual Maintenance Contract facility to be provided after completion of
warranty period of 3 years
3). Supplier company will have to give training to doctors and staff of
Operation Theatre , regarding the handling and maintenance of the
instrument.
4) Supplier should have local service station to provide immediate repairs
of any Break down of the instruments and to provide the spare parts
and disposables articles, as and when required by the users of supplied
instruments.
5). The instrument should not be refurbished one and it should be fresh
supply from original manufacturer of the instruments
6) All the above instruments and equipments must be having relevant CE
certification as well as IEC certification., applicable to medical
instruments and
7). All eligible companies should be OEM and should have ISO 9001
certification or en 46001 certification. Additionally instruments should
have been tested in accordance with IEC 601-1 international. Apart
from this, companies having their own service centers in India will be
highly preferred.

16. PEDIATRIC BRONCHOSCOPE

1. Digital Single Chip Endovision Camera : one ( compatible with telescopes of
Brobchoscope, Oesophagoscope , and Cystoscope)
Color system PAL / NTSC , power supply: 100 – 240 VAC , 50/60 Hz , compatible with
Pal, NTSC , automatic white balance with control ob base unit and also on camera .
Integrated zoom lens for manual and automatic control for exposure of fog. Compatible
with VHS and Comp and DVI. Minimum sensitivity 3 lux. Instrument coupling for all rigid
endoscope . Long camera cable 300 cm.Two pre set function keys on camera for control
of camera function , printer, computer , VCR and other peripherals
Consisting of :
Mains cord, with per focal zoom lens, camera head, camera control unit ( CCU) , BNC
connec ting cable , length 180 cms, 2 conn3ecting cables for connecting video printer or
recorders, DV cable, length 500 cm , 6 to 4 pin, keyboard US English character generator.
2. Medical Color Monitor 19”( fully flat screen ) : one
Special 19 “ monitor , medical grade , Trintron colour tube, PAL , NTSC & SECAM color
system. For Bronchoscopy, Oesophagoscopy and cystoscopy
3. Telescope
A Sraight forward telescope , 0 degree , diameter 2.9 mm , length 36 cm , autoclavable,
fiber optic light transmission incorporated( one)
B Straight forward telescope 0 degree , diameter 2.9 mm , length 30 cm ,
autoclavable, fiber optic light transmission incorporated ( one)
C. Straight forward telescope 0 degree , diameter 2.7mm , length 18cm
autoclavable, fiber optic light transmission incorporated ( one)

179
4. Bronchoscope Sheath
Should have attachment (Channels) for anaesthesia ( Ventilation) and instruments and
optical prism light.
A. Bronchoscope sheath , size 6 , outer diameter 8.2 mm , inner diameter 7.5 mm ,
length :30 cm ( one )
B Bronchoscope sheath , size 5 , outer diameter 7.8 mm , inner diameter 7.1 mm ,
length :30 cm ( one )
C. Bronchoscope sheath , size 4.5 outer diameter 7.3 mm , inner diameter 6.6 mm ,
length :30 cm ( one )
D. Bronchoscope sheath , size 4 outer diameter 6.7mm ,inner diameter 6mm ,
length :30 cm ( one )
E. Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.7 outer diameter 6.4 mm , inner diameter 5.7 mm ,
length :30 cm ( one )
F. Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.5 outer diameter 6.4 mm , inner diameter 5.7 mm ,
length :30 cm ( one )
G. Bronchoscope sheath , size 4.0 outer diameter 6.7 mm , inner diameter 6.4 mm ,
length :26 cm ( one )
H. Bronchoscope sheath, size 3.7outer diameter 6.4 mm ,inner diameter 6.4 mm ,
length :26 cm (one)
I Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.5 outer diameter 5.7 mm , inner diameter 5.0 mm ,
length :26 cm (one)
J. Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.0 outer diameter 5.0 mm , inner diameter 4.3 mm ,
length :26 cm ( one )
K Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.5 outer diameter 5.7 mm ,inner diameter 5.0 mm ,
length :18.5cm( one )
L Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.0outer diameter 5.0 mm ,inner diameter 4.3 mm ,
length :18.5m (one)
M. Bronchoscope sheath , size 2.5 outer diameter 4.2 mm ,inner diameter 3.5 mm ,
length :18.5m ( one )
5. Optical forceps ( compatible with above mentioned telescopes and bronchoscope
sheaths)
A. Optical alligator forceps , 2x2 teeth , with spring action handle , for controlled
removal of flat foreign bodies ( such as coins) ;(two)
B. Optical forceps, with spring action handle for controlled removal of soft foreign
bodies ( such as peanuts) : ( two)
C. Optical alligator forceps, with forced controlled handle , for removal of hard
foreign bodies ( two)
6. Forceps( one each)
A. Forceps alligator, grasping , double action jaw , sheath diameter 1.5 mm ,
working length: 35 cm
B. Forceps alligator, grasping , double action jaw , sheath diameter 1.5 mm ,
working length: 35 cm , pointed serrated for coins and foreign bodies.
C. Forceps alligator , grasping double action jaw, sheath diasmeter 1.5 mm ,
working length 35 cm , pointed for peanuts and soft foreign bodies.
D. Biopsy Forceps 35 Cm
7. Sponge holder:
Spring handle, working length 35 cm ( one)
8. Rigid suction tube with rubber tip( one each)
A Rigid suction tube, straight length 35 cm, diameter: 3 mm
B Rigid suction tube, straight length 25 cm. diameter: 3 mm
9. Foreign body basket with rigid handle, working length 35 cm
10. Telescope bridge for fixed position between telescope and bronchoscope.
Compatible with above mentioned telescopes and bronchoscope sheaths ( Three)
11. Prosmatic light deflection with connection for fiber optic light cable, autoclave( Two)
12. Glass Window Plug ( Two)
13. Rubber Telescope Guide for use with telescopes or optical forceps (Two)
14. FLUVOG Adaptor with sliding glass window plug, sealing cap, notched lens and keyhole
opening , moveable ( two)

180
 15. Injection canula only. Leur lock outer diameter – 3.5 mm , for use with bronchoscope
tubes ( for positive pressure assisted ventilation ( (two) Injection canula only. Leur lock
outer diameter – 2.7 mm , for use with bronchoscope tubes ( for positive pressure
assisted ventilation ( (Two)
16. Instrument guide for suction catheter (Two)
17. Adaptor from bronchoscope to any type of pediatric respiration equipment ( Two)
18. Sealing plig for venti;ation attachment of bronchoscopes( Two)
19. Adjustable magnifier, swing – away type, autoclave (One)
20. Fiber optic light cable size 3.5mm, length 180 cm (Two)
21. Cold light fountain twin bulb Halogen 150 watts Power supply
220 VAC, 50 Hz. ( One)
Note
1. The supplied instruments should have warranty period of 3 years.
2. Annual maintenance contract (AMC) facility to be provided after completion of warranty
period of 3 years.
3. Supplier company will have to give training to the doctors and the staff of operation
theatre, regarding the handling and maintenance of the instrument on site.
4. Supplier should have local service station to provide immediate repairs of any
breakdown of the instruments and to provide the spare parts and disposables articles ,
as and when required by the users of the supplied instruments.
5. All theabove instruments and equipments must be having relevant CE certification as
well as IEC certification , applicable to Medical Instruments and equipments.
6. All eligible companies should be an OEM ANS SHOULD ALSO HAVE iso 9001 certification
or EN 46001 certification . Additionally instruments should have been tested in
accordance with IEC 601 -1 international.
Apart from the companies having their own service centers in India will be highly
preferred.

17. PEDIATRIC OESOPHAGOSCOPE

1. Oesophagoscope sheath: Should have side cheenel for instruments
A. Oesophagoscope sheath, size 6, outer diameter 8.2 mm , inner diameter 7.5 mm ,
length 30 cm ( One)
B. Oesophagoscope sheath, size 5, outer diameter 7.7 mm ,inner diameter 7.2 mm ,
length 30 cm ( One)
C. Oesophagoscope sheath, size 4 outer diameter 6.7 mm , inner diameter 6.2 mm ,
length 30 cm ( One)
D. Oesophagoscope sheath, size 3.5outer diameter 5.6 mm ,inner diameter 5.2
mm , length 18.5cm( One)
E. Oesophagoscope sheath, size 3, outer diameter 4.8 mm ,inner diameter 4.3 mm ,
length 18.5cm (One)
( Telescope and other accessories are not mentioned separately here ( Mentioned with
specifications), as they can be used along with both bronchoscope and Oesophagoscope
sheaths .)
NOTE
1. The suppled instruments should have warranty period of THREE years
2. Annual maintenance contract (AMC) facility to be provided after completion of
warranty period of 3 years
3. Suplier company will have to give training to doctors and staff of operation
theatre, regarding the handling and maintenance of the instrument.
4. Supplier should have local service station to provide immediate repairs of any
breakdown of the instruments and to provide the spare parts and disposables
articles, as and when required by the users of supplied instruments.
5. The instrument should not be refurbished one and it should be fresh supply
from original manufacturer of the instruments
6. All the above instruments and equipments must be having relevant CE
certification as well as IEC certification., applicable to medical instruments and

181
 7. All eligible companies should be OEM and should have ISO 9001 certification or
en 46001 certification. Additionally instruments should have been tested in
accordance with IEC 601-1 international. Apart from this, companies having
their own service centers in India will be highly preferred.

18. PATIENT WARMING DEVICE FOR O.Ts (Adults & Paed.) THERMAL
MATTRESS
Should be suitable for intra operative applications
Should consists of active warming arm-cum shoulder section pair of leg segments and
1 double segments to cover the entire body
Size double segment : (60-62)cm X(80-85) cm Arm & shoulder section : (35-40) cm X
(175-180) cm
Leg segment : (80-85) cm
Each double segment & arm cum shoulder segment should have two temperature
sensors each for precise temperature control
Double segment & arm cum shoulder segment should be divided in two sections
capable of being switched ON and OFF independently depending upon the nature of
surgery and condition of patient
Should have a control unit to regulate warmth to every area precisely by use of
carbon fibers
Control unit should be capable of warming at least three segments at a time
Should offer precise digital temperature control with selectable temperature range of
30 to 42 degree C in steps of 0.5 degree C
Control panel should display intended and actual temperature
Should have safety features such as automatic check. Precise temperature control
between warming system and patient, auto stop on detecting any problem
Should have non latex anti-bacterially coated , blood and fluid resistant covers
Covers should be washable and replaceable
The control unit should be light weight not more than 2.5 kg, small in size
(200X120X230mm approx) and easily attachable to IV rod/OT table with fixing claw
Should have low energy consumption and noiseless operation

19. RESUSCITATION CART / CRASH CART TROLLEY

The cart should be provided fully loaded with resuscitation equipment and the cart
should have the following
Easy manurability
Flat top
6 smooth channeled drawers of AB of various sizes
Provision to fix I.V polls
Concealed auxiliary working boards
Side baskets
Should be anti-bacterium and corrosion resistant
Should be easy to clean
Should have space to hold emergency medicine
Should be supplied with resuscitation bags (Adults & pediatrics) cardio pump ,
manual suction pump of 600ml capacity at least, laryngoscope (one standard handle
with four blades of sizes 1,2,3&4) disposable endotracheal tube of all sizes, disposable
LMA of all sizes, oropharangeal & nosopharynseal airways of all sizes
Should have space for keeping I.V bottles

20. Neonatal resuscitation unit

1. MAJOR PARAMETERS
NEONATAL RESUSCITATION UNIT with CPAP slow suction, the accurate and
controlled radiant body warming with O2 flow control facilities for Neonatal

182
 Resuscitation. This unit fulfils basic need of resuscitation and hence life-saving
action can be taken without delay

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Should be available of :-
Power Source230 +/- 10% volts, 50Hz. Control Method Proportionate Power Control
Light Source
60Watts bulb to Examine babies. Power Consumption 850 Watts minimum.
Acrylic Tray with Foam mattress. Trays & structure fabrication in Stainless steel. IV pole
& Facility to take X-ray. Head up / down facility (continuous variable). 2 Drawer storage
cabinets mounted on heavy duty castors

3. STOP WATCH
Additional facility provided to note down timings during monitoring various vital signs
of baby e.g. Temp, Heart Rate and Respiration Rate.

4. ALARMS :
Skin + 1 C HI Air + 1.5 CHI Skin - 1 C LO Air - 3 CLO Skin > 38 C OVER Air > 39 COVER
Skin / Air Sensor Failure FAIL Heating Failure POWER FAILURE Audio-visual HEAT OFF
Resolution : 0.1 C SAFETY CUTOFF Accuracy : 0.1 C Skin > 38 C Skin > 39 C

5. RESUSCITATION FACILITY
To monitor pressure of Oxygen delivered to baby through Manual Resuscitator bag.
OXYGEN ADMINISTRATION: Oxygen Flow Control facility with Flow meter (0 to 15 Lt /
min), Oxygen Pressure adjustment valve, Humidifier Bottle, Facility to keep Oxygen
Cylinder, Connecting Hose for wall outlet. Silicon Autoclavable Resuscitation Bag with 00
and 01 size of masks. SLOW SUCTION: This is a specially designed electrically operated
slow suction. Apart from others, it is non-motorized slow suction. The Suction pressure
can be adjusted as per requirement ( 0 - 110 mm Hg ) . LARYNGOSCOPE: with Penlight
Handle & 0 and 1 Miller Blades.

6. PRECISE CRADLE TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Should have intelligent circuit to prevent overshoot and maintains the cradle
temperature within +/- 0.2OC of the present level, thereby the stress on the infant due to
variations in the cradle environmental temperature minimizes. Air over temperature
Cutoff system should be available.

7. SERVO CONTROL SYSTEM

To maintain an optimum skin temperature Should be available.

8. RESUSCITATION CRIB
Should be Provides the Mobile aid needed for airway management and mounted on
mobile crib for easy manoevouring and fast access during resuscitation and also
available following functions:- Slow Suction ,Oxygen Flow control with Humidication
,Inline Manometer to monitor pressure delivered to baby during Bag-n-Mask
resuscitation. The mobility allows use of the Resuscitation Crib on multiple warmers or
incubators for use in Labour, Delivery or Neonatal Intensive Care areas.

183
9. SERVO CONTROL SYSTEM TO MAINTAIN AN OPTIMUM SKIN
TEMPERATURE
Should be available this system to detects minute variation in skin temperature with a
precision temperature with a precision temperature probe attached to the infant’s
abdomen and maintains an optimum environmental temperature by calculating an
accurate balance between the infant’s skin temperature and cradle temperature.

10. REMINDER TIMER

The Timer can be set for fixed intervals to remind the nursing staff to attend the
neonates for feeding, drug schedules, and examination.
11. APGAR TIMER
Should be provides an acoustic alarm with digital display after 1,5 and 10 minutes with
short beep at every 30 second to examine the newborn according to the APGAR
scheme.The entire unit module on a 4 wheel trolley with ample shelf with undersurface
Phototherapy and Storage cabinet with two Drawers.
Stainless Steel parabolic reflector for Uniform temperature in Baby cradle. Stainless Steel
rod for mounting Syringe Pump etc. Examination Light with good illumination

Heating box is swivel type to take X-ray. Full cradle length Heaters to avoid cold and hot
zone in cradle, and this system provides uniform heat over entire mattress. Spark proof
Quartz or Ceramic Heating System. 600watt Quartz infrared Radiant Heater provides
optimal environment.

12. CPAP
Complete solution to all difficulties faced in Bag - n - mask type resuscitation. Peak
Inspiratory Pressure (PIP) control valve to adjust the maximum Inspiratory pressure delivered to
baby. Positive End Expiratory Pressure ( PEEP ) control valve to maintain minimum positive
pressure at the end of expiration to keep the lungs inflated. Overall control over system by
setting Maximum Pressure Relief to the system.

13.Minor parameters nil

14.Terms & conditions nil

(i) Annual maintenance contract Firm may be asked to submit comprehensive AMC cost of
machine for FIVE years after warranty period.
(ii) Inspection

Inspection by consignee.

184
 EQUIPMENT RADIOLOGY -13
1. IITV system
with image memory 9” triple field full wave rectified x-ray generator electronically
operated control unit with touch control below mentioned specification fluoroscopy MA
0.3 to 5ma KV 40 to 100KV auto dose rate control 40 to 100kv fluoroscopy timer digital
fluoroscopic timer with auto exposure cut off after pulsed fluoroscopic is provided
Radiography KV 40 to 100KV MAs 01 to 200 mAs digital display fluoroscopy KV, mA, timer
& radiography mAs, image orientation horizontal and vertical image reversal is performed
both from control panel and monitor image rotation +/- 270 deg image rotation is also
performed both from control panel and monitor tube used imported fully lead linked
double focus stationary anode x-ray tube small focus 0.6mm x 0.6mm for fluoroscopy large
focus 1.8mm x 1.8mm for radiography sleek designed tube head power input single phase
230 volts, 15 Amps specification of IITV latest series 9” image intensifier with high
resolution input phosphor screen with thin metal input high gain more than 180 center
resolution 52 lines/cm TV camera CCD camera single unit type with low input high
resolution CCD specially designed to operate with image Monitor 17” monitor high
resolution type 15 MHZ frequency response with image reversal capabilities Trolley mobile
trolley height 130cm swivel type with lock C-Arm stand the C-arm stand in ruggedly
designed with all movements self balanced easy maneuverability manual locking wheels are
connected through chain prote tive cable guard for floor wheels focus II distance 900mm
motorized up-down travel 430mm horizontal travel 220mm orbital range 125deg. Panning
+12.05deg detachable cassette holder for 8”x10” of 10”x12” film Image memory system
resolution 512x512 pixel, pixels depth 250 grey levels (8bit) sampling rate 12.5MHz video
bandwidth (-3db) 4.5MHz video in/out CCIR standard (625 lines / 50 Hz) acquisition time
real time (1/25th of a second) averaging facility 2/4/8/16 frames real time (1/25 th of a 1)
sweep reversal black & white Power input 230v ac, 50Hz +/- 10% FS-10-PC memory 32
image memory with In built computer transfer facility to store the image hence very high
numbers of images can be stored the dual monitor is supplied along with the system 1 st
monitor display last image hold and 2 monitor display memory images 4/8/16/32/64/256
nd

an selected image can be zoom

2. SPECIFICATIONS FOR USG MACHINE (01 Number)

185
 Requirement for a sturdy, fully digital ultrasound system for
whole body scanning with latest state of art technology and
softwares for fast, accurate and wide ranging applications in a multi
specialty 250 bedded hospital with 100-150 patients work load per
day.

UNIT SHOULD HAVE:

1. Minimum 3 active ports operated by single touch from
console.
2. 1000 or more channel platform with 100% digital beam
forming and processing technology With latest software for
excellent constrast, high spatial and temporal resolution;
E.g. - along azimuth.
TRANSDUCERS SHOULD BE:
The unit should be quoted with one broadband convex array
transducer
Other transducers should be quoted in options with price i.e.
1. TVS/TR widest angle (not less than 120 R) 5-12 MHz.
2. Highest freq linear small parts/ musculoskeletal probe 10-18
MHz.
3. Phased array 2-6 MHz pediatric/neonatal intracranial, chest
and additional musculoskeletal work.
4. All probes should be broad band multi frequency and biopsy
ready with clamp and needle guides with 3 pieces of each
needle length.

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/FEATURES SHOULD HAVE:

1. 19 Inch flicker free TFT monitor with 256 shades of Gray,
contrast and brightness adjustments with tilt and rotation and
350 or more line density per frame.
2. Power Doppler, pulsed wave Doppler, directional power
Doppler, with triplex display mode on all probes and real time
Doppler analysis.
3. Display modes: B, B/B, B/M, QUAD, SPLIT Functioning,
thumbnail display, with multiple loop representation.
4. On screen icons body parts, annotation and icon library, with
additional conveniences for e.g. LCD display for touch
selection of parameters.
5. Variable frame rate from 30 – 120 with real time display of
triplex mode.
6. Ergonomic swiveled keyboard with touch pad rather than
track ball.
7. Variable frame rate input for e.g. 30-120 in triplex mode.
8. High system dynamic range 150 db or more and gain settings
upto 180 db.
9. High PRF above 10 Khz.
10. High cine loop memory of at least half minute runs in B mode,
color and triplex mode.

186
 11. Large image storage facility through 80 GB (or expandable)
for raw data storage in main machine or in additional PC for
recall and reanalysis, non perishable on switching off.
12. Extensive raw and post processing application softwares for
measurements /calculations/trend/graph/for general radiology/
abdominal/ vascular/ chest/obg/ortho/ msk/small parts/fetal
echo Cardiography etc. to provide details. (Full details should
be provided.)

SOFTWARES FOR PRE AND POST PROCESSING IMAGES:

1. Trapezoid field of view. Tissue harmonics.
2. Tissue and ultrasound contrast harmonics.
3. Panoramic view imaging.
4. Real time 3-D reconstruction softwares with surface rendering.
5. Compound resolution imaging.
6. Echo density, histogram, graphs etc.
7. Image optimization with single button( For e.g. aperture
control, auto focus auto DGC)
8. Programmable user defined presets.
9. Raw data manipulation such as angle correction, sweep speed
change, base line shift and Doppler inversion.
10. Noise suppression.
11. 4D provision/upgradability.
12. Directional power Doppler
13. High resolution imaging (e.g. image smoothening/granularity
in magnification)
14. Real time zoom-ROI freely sizable/pan zoom at least 4 times
with reentry algorithm, scroll, and tilt, B/W → W/B.
15. Basic cardiovascular parameters for fetal heart and
retroplacental vasculatures.
16. Yearly upgradability for at least 4-5 years after installation as
new programs develops.

PERIPHERALS:
1. Inbuilt CD read/write.
2. Compatible laser (toner based) printer-scanner-copier.
3. DICOM/Teleradiology/Pacs compatible image management
software including PNDT and system (PC based work station)
4. Proper user manual, text books and references for software
applications.

FOLLOWING ESSENTIAL ACCESSORIES TO BE QUOTED AS OPTIONS

WITH COST:
1. TRANSDUCERS: 1.TV/TR 2.HF LINEAR 3. PHASED ARRAY 2-5
MHZ
2. STURDY LARGE VOLUME PRINTER
3. PC FOR REPORTING/ARCHIVING/REVIEWING ETC.
4. SUITABLE ON LINE UPS (1.5-2 KV)
5. 4D UPGRADABILITY COST (IF NOT IN MAIN MACHINE)
6. QUALITY CONTROL KIT FOR DAILY USE.

187
 Final image quality, ergonomics of the machine usage , fast
performance matrix, highest frequency achievable, 2D /3D/4D, reporting
softwares, pre and post prog will have to be demonstrated on TEC on
phantoms and patients before final purchase.

188
3.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR COLOR DOPPLER
ECHOCARDIOGRAPHY SYSTEM

S.N Description of function

.
1.1   Color Doppler Echocardiography System is required to study the
   anatomical abnormalities and blood flow in the heart and associated
vessels.

S.N Operational requirements

.
2.1   Latest generation Electronic Phased array Color Doppler system with
   Minimum 512
Electronic independent channels.
System should be DICOM ready and capable of being interfaced with
HIS/RIS/PACS..
2.2   Should be field up gradable to next generation system on site.
  
2.3   Frequency compounding  or better technology for better resolution and
   penetration.
 
S.N Technical Specifications
.
3.1   Latest generation Electronic Phased array Color Doppler system with
   Minimum 512
Electronic independent channels.
3.2   256 gray shades for sharp contrast resolutions
  
3.3   Multi dimensional Beam former for generating two images simultaneously-
   one at low end of bandwidth and one at high end-then selectively
retrieves and mixes the components together for finely textured 2-D or B
mode image with superior contrast resolution
3.4   Adult Cardiac and Vascular Probes to be supplied which should be latest
   generation wide band transducers without frequency selection for higher
sensitivity of response over a broader frequency range of operation. All
probes to be phased array  OPTIONAL Probes for paediatric application
and Trans esophageal Echo  for future requirement.
 
3.1   Harmonic Imaging- System should have following modes in harmonic with
   separate setting for:
a. Tissue Harmonic.
b. Contrast Harmonic - both triggered and real time
c. Harmonic Angio .
d. Quantification of harmonics imaging*
3.2   Harmonic imaging capability in Adult Cardiac, Pediatric Cardiac and linear
   Probe
3.3   Gain control in two dimensions for additional level of flexibility to image
   quality control.
 
3.4   Real time high frequency 2D for higher resolution and low frequency
   Doppler for higher sensitivity in all probes
3.5   Frame rate should be 300 FPS or more

189
    
3.6   Steerable PW/CW in all Phased Array probes.
  
3.7   High definition acoustic zoom for enlarging sections of 2D and Color flow
   images with
more acoustic information for greater clarity and detail while maintaining
an optimal frame rate.
3.8   Modes - 2D, M-Mode, Steerable PW/CW Doppler, Color Doppler, and High
   Definition Color flow with capability of automatically picking up color flow
as a function of focal depth
3.9   Monitor should be 15" or more, high resolution color Monitor.
   Tilt and Swivel monitor should be able to view in all angles and all light
conditions.
3.1 Color Flow Imaging for
0   a) Increased lateral & spatial resolution.
b) Detection of even subtle areas of turbulence, displaying a more
physiological blood flow appearance without loss of frame rate.
c) Color flow with capability of automatically picking up color flow as a
function of
focal depth
3.1 Tissue Colorization (B-Color) for improved contrast resolution
1 
3.1 Application software for Adult, Pediatric, Fetal and Peripheral Vascular and
2   Transesophageal applications. (All application package should be built into
the system)
 
3.1 Cine loop memory- more than 120MB of memory.
3   a. High Frame rate review for better clarity of playback images study in
slow motion.
b. Quad loop with memory for pre and post image comparison of any
procedure.
c. Memory- 256 frames or more in quad loop. M Mode & Doppler Scroll
Memory-40 seconds or more.
d. Frame grabber facility for post analysis.
3.1 Various maps for pre and post processing.
4 
3.1 ECG trigger facility.
5 
3.1 User defined system and application presets for multi-user department.
6 
3.1 Minimum 4.8 GB optical disc drive for image storage and retrieval.
7   (standard with system)
3.1 Dedicated integrated dynamic stress echo package for flexible user
8   defined protocols with stacked sub loops facility and contrast stress
protocol.

3.1 Tissue movement colorization with quantification possibility for IHD/CAD

9  patients. 
3.2 Three transducer ports will be preferred.
0 
3.2 Color Map resolution up to 128 levels.
1 
3.2 Study Manager (> 1.5 GB) for on-cart digital acquisition, review and

190
2  editing of complete patient studies.
3.2 Facility of Real time perfusion studies
3 
3.2 SYSTEM PERIPHERALS should include
4  a. CD Writer with calculation facility on playback.
b. Color Video Printer.
c. B/W Thermal Printer.
3.2 Colour M-Mode
5 
 
* Acoustic densitometry is unique nomenclature of Philips Medical System and
hence is not being used.
 
S.N System  Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
.
4.1   Color Doppler System with all application packages
   Quad loop for serial studies with High frame rate review.
Harmonic imaging capability in all modes. (Tissue, Contrast, Anglo)
Integrated Stress Echo Package Digital Storage and Retrieval- 01
4.2   1.0-3.0 MHz Adult Cardiac probe Electronics Phased Array probe.- 01 ea
  
4.3   3.0-11.0 MHz Electronics Phased Array Probe for Vascular applications- 01
   ea
4.4   Multiplane TEE Probe- (Optional)
   4-8 MHz for Adult as well as Paediatric echocardiography.
4.5   5.0-10 MHz Electronic phased array probe for Paediatric cardiology.
   (OPTIONAL
4.6   DVD/CD Recorder with 100 CDs and 100 DVDs
  
4.7   Color Printer.                          -01
  
4.8   B/W Video Thermal Printer -01
  
4.9   Colour Print Paper-      500 sheets
  
4.1 B/W Thermal Paper      - 10 rolls
0 
4.1 ECG Cable                   - 02
1 
4.1 MO Disc                       - 10
2 
 
The system should contains all the above accessories in Integrated or as
separate accessories..
S.N Environmental factors
.
5.1   The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient
   temperature of 300 C and relative humidity of 80%
5.2   Pre Requsites should be clearly spelt out in terms of  room requirements..
  
 
S.N Power supply

191
.
6.1   Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
  
6.2   Resettable overcurrent breaker shall be fitted for protection
  
6.3   Suitable  Servo controlled Stabilizer/CVT
  
6.4    UPS of suitable rating conforming to IS-302 shall be supplied . Servo
   stabilizer is not required if the UPS has voltage correction facility.
 
S.N Standards and safety
.
7.1   Should be FDA or CE approaved product
  
7.2   Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-60601 / IS-
   13450
7.3   The product shall comply to IEC 60601-2-37 ed1: Medical Electrical
   Equipment - Part 2-37: Particular Requirements for the Safety of Ultrasonic
Medical Diagnostic and Monitoring Equipment
7.4   Type of protection againstelectric shocks                     -- Class I
   Degree of protection against
electric shocks for ultrasound probes Type "BF"
For ECG electrodes Type 'CF"
7.5   The manufacturer should have  ISO certification for quality standards.
  
 
S.N Documentation
.
8.1   User manual in English
  
8.2   Service manual in English
  
8.3   List of important spare parts and accessories  with their part number and
   costing.
8.4   Certificate of calibration and inspection from factory.
  
8.5   Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly
   maintenance checklist.
The job description of the hospital technician  and company service
engineer should be clearly spelt out
8.6   List of equipments available for calibration and preventive maintenance as
   laid down in the Technical/Service Manual.
 
 

192
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GENERAL) FOR THE PROCUREMENT
OF 500 MA DIAGNOSTIC X-RAY MACHINE.

Sr.No. Parameters Requirements

1. Equipment 500 MA floor to ceiling diagnostic x ray machine with single
tube and manual multi position table.
2. Generator 500 MA high tension high powered multi pulse preferably
(a) output microprocessor controlled generator.
(b) MA range 40-50 KW
(c) KVP range Small focus 50 MA,100 MA,200 MA, Big focus 200 MA, 300
(d) Exposure ime MA, 400 MA,500 MA,
(e) Exposure factor 40/45 to 125 KVP in step of 1 KVP
0.01 sec to 5.0 sec or better and wider exposure
Exact reproduction of 3 %
3. Power supply 3 phase power supply with 4/5 v 10-15% 50/60 HZ three phase
to single phase transformer.
4. H.T. Transformer Heavy duty high voltage trans former having solid state
standard rectifiers with full wave rectification, preferably
silicon rectifiers switches, HT trans former oil filled earthed
HT steal tank and excellent rating in term of highest KV,
maximum current on continuous running for / see.
5. Control panel - On off push buttons.
- LED indication of in coming line voltage.
- Main line voltage compensation switch.
- Voltmeter.
- Indicator to denote line voltage in normal.
- Radiographic KV selector switch to select KV from 40- 45 to
125 KV in steps of 1-2 KUP.
- MA meter.
- MA selector niter locked switch.
- Digital display of MA.
- Focal spot selection switch & digital display of selected Spot.
- LED indicators for ready.
- For exposure and during exposure period.
- Tube overload indicator.
- Line resistance adjuster.
- Tube filament current sterilization space charge
Compensation.
6. X-ray tube Sharp focus rotating anode tube with focal spot of 1.2 mm to 2
mm or smaller sizes, very high radiographic ratings to take
high electrical loads & high exposure times.
7. H.T. cables High voltage shock proof pair HT cables of 6-8 meters

 
 
 

193
5.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 300MA X-RAY MACHINE

X-RAY MACHINE 300mA. 125 KVP Full Wave Solid State Silicon Rectified X-
ray Generator for Radiography suitable for single Tube
Operation as per IS:7620 with latest amendments.
TIMER The exposure timer should be digital & from 0.02 sec to 5
sec.
CONTROL Consisting of On & Off Switches, with Voltmeter, MA meter,
Quick trip-overload circuit breaker (Automatic safety system
to block unwanted exposure factors beyond Tube Rating),
Voltage Compensator, Major & Minor KV selector, Tube
overload indicator provided, Space charge compensator,
technique selector. Digital Display of KVP, & mAs, Anode
braking Device. Electronic overload for protection of tube
H.V. Cables & H.T. Tank. Ready & X-Ray Switch on
Control.
Static balancer 30 KVA capable of converting 3-phase in range 365-400
VAC with 0.2 ohms resistance at 50-60Hz to single phase
230 VAC/50Hz
HV TRANSFORMER Compact Heavy Duty Transformer comprising HV Silicon
Rectifiers, HT Transformer, Filament Transformer, bushings
all immersed in oil.
ACCESSORIES Hand Switch with Flexible long cord enables the operator to
keep away from the Radiation area during exposure.
-  Aluminum Filter.
-  Light Beam Diaphragm.
POWER SUPPLY 440V +  10% V AC, 50 Hz, Three Phase -
REQUIREMENT
TUBE UNIT One No. 20/40 Rotating Anode Tube (BEL / TOSHIBA or
equivalent) with Dual Focus (Large & Small).
HV CABLE One Pair of 10 meter High Voltage Cables :
Sleevings - Straight.
STAND Floor to Ceiling Stand & with Counter Balanced Tube Head
(Rotatable+180 Degree), 360 Degree Rotatable; mounted on
Floor Ceiling Rails for convenient movements.
It should have all necessary locks.
The column should be light in weight.
Protection for the rope failure should be provided with the
column stand.
TABLE 5 Position Table Hand tilt; 15 Degree trendelenburg to
vertical, Motorised Bucky consisting of 8:1, 103 lines/inch
Imported Grid Size 17 1/4" X 18 7/8"; Stainless Steel Cassette
Tray; Compression Band and Foot Rest.
VERTICAL BUCKY Vertical Bucky Stand with moving Grid of Ratio 8:1, 103
lines/inch. The Bucky moves up & down & are equipped
with stainless steel cassette. This stand is floor-mounted type
& can accommodate cassettes up to 14" X 17".

194
6.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 100MA X-RAY MACHINE
X – RAY GENERATOR 100mA – 125 KV High frequencies X- Ray Generator with
Rotating Anode X-Ray Tube & 10 KW X-ray Generator.
FREQUENCY 20 kHz & Above
MAX. MA OUTPUT 100 mA
mAs RANGE 1 to 200mAs.
KV RANGE 40 to 125 KVP

COLLIMATOR MANUAL COLLIMATOR

X–RAY TUBE HEAD Suitable rotating anode tube with cable & HT terminals 11/21 KW
fine focus.
CONTROL X-ray ON/OFF
(MICROPROCESSOR KV ±
BASED) Extended exposures switch to be provided.
Power Indicator.
Single phase 230 V AC, 50 Hz
Battery backup module & batteries. (Minimum 10 exposures at
maximum KV & mAs.)
FIX STAND Vertical column stand for rotating anode Tube &
cable attached to the table.
HORIZONTAL TABLE Table with Bucky
Motorized reciprocating Bucky with Grid of appropriate size,
having Grid Ratio of 6 : 1 with minimum 60 lines / inch
Stainless steel cassette Tray to be provided.
The Bucky should travel the entire length of the table, with
locking facility.
The tabletop should be of low radiation absorption and
waterproof material.
Compression Band (Immobilizing device) to be provided.
POWER REQUIREMENT 230 Volt AC, 50 Hz, Single Phase. 15 Amps. Max.
OPTIONAL Vertical Bucky stand with Bucky & grid as above.
AERB Approval is a must.
Warranty: 2 years.
AMC: for 5 years to be quoted.
Lead Apron - 2 nos.
Lead Partition of Standard size.
MOBILE STAND Mobile stand with castor wheels to ensure easy mobility and
steering.
Spring Balanced Mobile Stand for smooth movements of the
tube head in vertical plane.
The Entire Tube Arm should swivel ± 90º(180º) for taking
shoot-thro' exposure.

195
7.Main Technical Parameter:-

Specification 60- mA Self

Output 60mA-100kV

Radiographic kv 30 to 100 kV

Radiographic mA 20,40 & 60

Tube DSA -3 /imported

Fluoro mA 0 - 3 mA

Timer 0.06 to 10 Sec.

Time Steps 24 Step

High Tension Self rectified

Over Load Protection Inherent

Power Requirement 220 V / 50 Hz

  6 KVA 1 Phase

Line Resistance 1.5 ohms

 mA meter
 Line voltmeter 
 ON –OFF switch (push button)
 In built voltage stabilizer to compensate the voltage between 170 to 300 Volts.
 Timer (solid state) 0.6 to 10 second .in 24 steps.
 KVp Selector switch 15 way 5V each step.
 LED indicators for X - Ray, line and O/L
Specification features:-
 Single phase, full wave rectified (silicon rectifiers) medium powered x ray unit.
 Independent KV mA and time techniques for better radiographic results.
 Booster transformer for constant ma output.
 Instantaneous electronic tubes overload protection for longer tube life.
 Voltage compensation with coarse and fine voltage compensation switch.
(stabilizer)
 Fitted with voltmeter and ma meter.
 6 led indicator for line, X - Ray, O/L, bucky, standby and fuse.
 Precision solid state electronic timer.
 Automatic calculation of mAS   with digital display.
 Digital displays of KVP.

196
Special/optional features:- 

 Counter – balances tube arm for increased reach better positioning.

 Integrated casseste box-for easier easy to use control.
 Elegant digital display and extremely easy to use controls
 Ma meter & voltmeter & for line and exposure monitoring
 Automatic calculation of mAS with digital display
 Digital display of KVP
 6 LED indicator for line, O/L,X-Ray ,stand by bucky & fuse .

197
 EQUIPMENT VENTILLATOR-14
1. Equipment Specifications for Ventilator-High End (I.C.U)
1 Description of Function
Serial Name
no
1.1 ICU ventilators provide artificial respiratory support to the critical patients in the
Intensive Care Units.
2 Operational Requirements
Serial Name
no
2.1 Microprocessor Controlled ventilator with integrated facility for
Ventilation monitoring suitable for New born to adult ventilation.
2.2 Demonstration of the equipment is a must.
3. Recomendde for health facilty like distric hospital and medical colleges.
4 Technical Specifications
Serial Name
No
3.1 Standard hinged arm holder for holding the circuit
3.2 Colored TFT screen, 12 Inch or more
3.3 Facility to measure and display
a) End tidal CO2 with capnography.
b) 3 waves- Pressure and Time, Volume and Time and Flow and Time.
c) 3 loops- P-V, F-V, P-F with facility of saving of 3 Loops for reference.
d) Graphic display to have automatic scaling facility for waves
e) Status indicator for Ventilator mode, Battery life, patient data, alarm settings,
clock etc
Trending facility for 72 hours with minimum 5 minutes resolution
for recent 24 hours
3.4 Automatic compliance & Leakage compensation for circuit and ET tube
Following settings for all age groups.
a) Tidal Volume
b) Pressure (insp)
c) Pressure Ramp
d) Respiratory Rate
e) SIMV Respiratory Rate
f) CPAP/PEEP
g) Pressure support
h) FIO2
i) Pause Time
3.5 j) Pressure & Flow Trigger
Monitoring of the following parameters
a) Airway Pressure (Peak & Mean)
b) Tidal volume (Inspired & Expired)
c) Minute volume (Inspired and Expired)
d) Spontaneous Minute Volume
e) Total Frequency
f) FIO2 dynamic
g) Intrinsic PEEP and PEEPi Volume
h) Plateau Pressure
i) Resistance & Compliance
j) Use selector Alarms for all measured & monitored parameters
3.6 Modes of ventilation
a) Volume controlled
b) Pressure Controlled
c) Pressure Support
d) SIMV (Pressure Control and volume control) with pressure support
e) CPAP/PEEP

198
 f) Inverse Ratio Ventilation
g) Advanced mode like pressure controlled volume guaranteed
h) Non Invasive ventilation
i) APRV
Apnea /backup ventilation
3.7 Expiratory block should be autoclavable and no routine calibration required
Should have the ability to calculate / Procedure
a. Intrinsic Peep & Intrinsic PEEP Volume
b. Occlusion Pressure
c. Spontaneous Breathing trial
d. Facility to calculate lower and upper inflection point
Nebuliser with capability to deliver particle size of < 3 micron & to
be used in both Off and On line
Automatic Patient Detection facility preferable
3.8 Medical Air Compressor. (Optional)
a) Stand-alone Medical Air compressor
b) Snap fit with the Ventilator module to provide an oil free Medical air.
c) Peak output flow should be minimum 160 LPM.
d) Air quality should comply with ISO compressed air purity class.
e) Medical Air Compressor should automatically activate in the
event of wall air supply loss.
f) Replacement of internal filters should be performed without
removing the compressor
g) Should have washable air filter.
3.9 Technical Specifications for reusable face mask & nasal mask.
3.10 Reusable face & nasal mask with textured dual flap silicone cushion flap for easy fit.
Removable forehead support and pad to match the angle of patient’s forehead
3.11 Stability Selector for easy fit and angle.
Ball & Socket headgear attachments.
Should be autoclavable.
Battery back up for minimum 1 hour
3.12 RS 323C interface for communications with networked devices.
3.13 Automatic patient detection facility preferable.
3.14
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
Serial Name
no
6 Power Supply
Serial Name
no
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz
6.2 Suitable Servo controlled Stabilizer/CVT
6.3 Resettable overcurrent breaker shall be fitted for protection
Suitable UPS with maintenance free batteries for minimum onehour
6.4 back up should be supplied with the system.

7 Standards, Safety and Training

Serial Name
no
7.1 Certified to be compliant with ANS/IEC60601.2.12-01 Medical Electrical Equipment
—Part 2-12; Particular Requirements for the Safety of Lung Ventilators—Critical
7.2 Care Ventilators
7.3 Should be FDA or CE approved product
7.4 Certified to be compliant with ISO-7767 for Oxygen monitoring.
7.5 Should meet IEC 529 Level 3 (IP3X)(spraying water) for enclosure protection, water
7.6 ingress.
Demonstration of quoted equipment model is a must.

199
 Should have local service facility .The service provider should have the necessary
7.7 equipments recommended by the manufacturer to carry out preventive
7.8 maintenance test as per guidelines provided in the service/maintenance manual.
Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and provision of AMC for next 5 years.
Back to back warranty to be taken by the supplier from the principal to supply
spares for a minimum period 10 years.
8 Documentation
Serial Name
no
8.1 Certificate of calibration and inspection from factory.
8.2 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine maintenance
support as per manufacturer documentation in service / technical manual.
8.3 User Manual in English
8.4 Service manual in English
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service
8.6 engineer should be clearly spelt out.
8.7 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing.
Compliance Report to be submitted in a tabulated and point wise manner clearly
mentioning the page/para number of original catalogue/data sheet.Any point ,if not
8.8 substantiated with authenticated catalogue/manual, will not be considered.
8.9 Must submit user list and performance report within last 5 years from major
hospitals.
Back to back comprehensive warranty to be taken by the supplier from the principal
to supply spares for minimum 10 years.
2. Equipment Specifications for Transport Monitor
1 Description of Function
Serial Name
no
1.1 Transport Monitor is required to monitor vital parameters of patients during
transportation to and from OT; Emergency;Trauma ambulances etc.
2 Operational Requirements
Serial Name
no
2.1 Transport monitor should be portable and lightweight and should monitor vital
parameters of patients.
2.2 Capability of storage of patient data and printing of patient reports.
2.3 Capability to integrate with the HIS and transfer the data through LAN / Wireless
LAN to any other monitoring room / doctors desk. Should be HL-7 compatible for
transmitting and receiving datato/fro LAN/HIS (OPTIONAL)
2.4 Demonstration of the quoted equipment is a must
3 Technical Specifications
Serial Name
no
3.1 Portable and Light weight preferably <10kg
3.2 12 inch multi color TFT display
3.3 Monitoring parameters: - ECG, respiration, NIBP, SaO2 and temperature
3.4 Digital and 4 waves / traces display
3.5 Monitor should have audible and visual alarms capability. Alarms should have three
distinct audible alarm tones to distinguish alarm levels. Also monitor should permit
automatic viewing of alarming parameter waveform and numeric from any bedside
in alarm as and when connected in a network.
3.6 Trends should be automatically stored for at least 24 hours in at least one-minute
3.7 intervals. Numeric monitored data trend shall be viewable and recordable in a
patient chart type format in at least 1, 5, 15, 60 minutes intervals.
3.8 Convenient handle for carrying the same
3.9 Able to fix with bed/trolley.

200
 NETWORKING AND REMOTE ACCESS (Optional)
1.Remote access of patient data -should have facility of accessing patient data
including waveforms and numeric remotely in Hospital or at Consultants residence
through hardwired LAN connection or through modem.
2.Should also offer viewing station for viewing this data as optional item.
3.Should be upgradeable.
4.Should be able to review DICOM images from PACS. On the bedside or the central
station.
5. Web browsing facility to review each networked monitors data through hospital
LAN via office PC in Hospital LAN network and/or through dial up facility from
remote location.
6. To provide HL 7 compatible server for sending information from the monitoring
network to Hospital Information System, Laboratory information etc for integration
of various information

4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables

Serial Name
no
4.1 Transport Monitor-01
4.2 Patient cables (5 lead) –01
4.3 Adult Cuff – 01
4.4 Paediatric Cuff –01
4.5 Adult Probe SPO2 –02
4.6 Paediatric Probe SPO2 –02
4.7 Skin Temp Probe –02
4.8 Dual channel recorder –01
4.9 Paper Recorder- 100 cases.
4.10 Networking and remote access- (OPTIONAL)- 01
5 Environmental factors
Serial Name
no
5.1 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of 10
-400 C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature of 0
-500 C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2: 2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General Requirements of Safety
for Electromagnetic Compatibility.
6 Power Supply
Serial Name
no
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Resettable over current breaker shall be fitted for protection
6.3 Suitable UPS with maintenance free batteries for minimum onehour back up should
be supplied with the system.
7 Standards, Safety and Training
Serial Name
no
7.1 Should be FDA or CE approved or ISI marked product
7.2 Shall meet the safety requirements as per IEC 60601-2- 27:1994—Medical electrical
equipment—Part 2: Particular requirements for the safety of electrocardiographic
7.3 monitoring
7.4 Manufacturer should have ISO certification for quality standards.
Comprehensive warranty for 5 years and provision of AMC for next 5 years
8 Documentation
Serial name
no
8.1 User Manual in English

201
 8.2 Service manual in English
8.3 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing.
8.4 Certificate of Calibration and inspection from the factory
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist.
8.6 The job description of the hospital technician and company service engineer should
be clearly spelt out
8.7 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine maintenance
support as per manufacturer documentation in service / technical manual.
Must submit user list and performance report within last 5 years from major
hospitals.

3. Anesthesia Machine trolley

Test & safest technology with tubular structure facilitating integration with other
equipment & accessories AURA’S capacity lightness & modularity allows it to be
configured according to customize requirement five tube Rota meter with backlight
pneumatic hypoxia guard two numbers of detachable mounting system for vaporizers
movable patient outlet auxiliary oxygen flow meter in-built suction system apart from
regular vacuum system with ward vacuum unit Fio2 monitor with hypoxia alarm
adaptability to customer specific ventilator, vaporizer & monitor circle absorber with
APL wall and back to ventilator selector switch with manometer electric spike guard
four swivel drawers sphygmomanometer aneroid or mercurial non return valve fitted
to back bar protects vaporizer from back pressure, emergency reservoir with pneumatic
alarm Construction: ergonomically design complete in MS structure with four antistatic
castors front castors with brakes HxWxD 150x67x67 Cylinder Yokes: Gas specific gas
name mentioned (pin index) yokes with sliding clamping bars, two each for oxygen &
nitrous oxide Gas inlet system & pressure gauges maximum number of three gases with
attachment for four pin type cylinder four number of color coded pipeline inlets display
of eight large diameter pressure gauges high pressure two oxygen + two nitrous oxide
low pressure one oxygen + one nitrous oxide, one air & one vacuum port for driving
ventilator and oxygen therapy flow meter provided as standard Regulators two stage
regulators ensuring pressure control of gases in two stages before entry into Rota
meter. Rota meter five tube Rotameter (230mm) bank two oxygen two nitrous oxide
and one air with color coded assembly for easy identification and with backlight screen
Electrical Panel consist three numbers of socket of 5.0 amp load Pneumatic Anti
Hypoxia system this enhanced safety device ensure minimum 25% of oxygen in mixture
at all times Oxygen Failure Warning Device Battery operated 30 seconds audio – visual
alarm in case of oxygen supply drops below 205KPA with Patient monitor facility
14.2cm (5.6”) color TFT display ECG, Spo2 & NIBP 200 set vital sign data storage and
recall graphic & tabular trend information applications from neonate to adult auto
measurement of blood pressure programmable cycle 1 minuet on screen display of
setting built in rechargeable battery central monitoring interface viewing angle 160’
resolution 320x240 pixels trend display 12 hours data weight 3kg ECG heart rate range
20-300 lead selection 3 lead mode (1,2,3) of 5 lead mode 1,2,3, aVR, aVL, aVF, V) NIBP
method automatic oscillometic displayparameter SYS/DIA/MEAN arterial pressure
accuracy +- 3mm hg operating modes manual / auto / stat pressure unit mmHg/ kPa
Pulse Oximeter Spo2 cuff pressure range adult/child (0-280 mmhg) neonate (0-140
mmhg) range resolution 0-100% / 1% accuracy +- 2@ pulse rate range 30-250bpm
pulse rate accuracy +-2% standard accessories AC adapter 1no, power cord 1no, ECG

202
patient cable assembly 1no, spo2 sensor 1no, adult NIBP cuff 1mo, disposable
electrodes 30pcs, user manual 1no

4. Ventilator Technical Specification Adult –Paediatric –Infatn

Ventilators
GENERAL
Power :100-
240 VAC 50-60hz
Electrical consumption :75VA
Electrical isolation class :1-B
Ventilator weight :14kg
Stand weight :24kg
Ventilator size (HXWXP):230x430x440mm
Size on Stand:1300x585x610mm
Peak flow :2501/min
Operating temperature/relative Humidity:10a40degree c/30a75%
Gas Supply Air/02 :2.8-6.0 bar
Ventilation modes
1. Controlled/assisted controlledmechanical ventilation – volume targeted
(CMV/ ACMV )
2. Controlled/assisted controlledmechanical ventilation – pressure targeted
(PCMV/ PACMV)
3. Synchronized intermittent mechanicalventilation (SIMV)
4. Spontaneous ventilation – pressure support, CPAP
5. Spontaneous ventilation – pressuresupport, minimum tidal volume (PS-
Vtmin)
6. Mandatory rate ventilation (MRV)
7. Airway pressure release ventilation (APRV)
8. Non-Invasive ventilation
9. Combination Modes
10. Inverse Ratio Ventilation Settings
 Tidal volume :20 to 2000 ml
 Flow pattern :Square,
 decelerating, sinusoidal
 Breath rate :5 to 80cycles/min
 Inspiratory time :20 to 80 ( I+E)
 Inspiratory plateau :0 to 60%
 Inspiratory time
 SIMV rate :1 to 40 cycles/min
 PEEP :0 to 25 cm H20
 Pressure support/Inspiratory
 Pressure :0 to 35/0 to 60 cm H20
 Pressure support slope :50 to 150 cm H20/sec
 FIO2 :21 to 100%
 Inspiratory trigger sensitivity :flow(0.1 to 51/min.) & pressure (0.1 to 5
cmH20)
 Expiratory trigger threshold :0 to 30 1/min, T1 max 0.5 to 3secs
 Sigh :1 to x VT or PI-1 to 10cycles/1-200 cycle manual cycle,
 Inspiratory pause, expiratory pause,prolonged expiration

203
MESUREMENTS
Peak airway pressure, means airwaypressure, and peep Pplateau by tele-
inspiratory pause
Auto – peep by tele expiratory pause Static compliance Inspiratory resistance
Proximal pressure and flow (in addition toventilator based measurements)
Tidal volume – expiratory
Minute volume – expiratory
Breathing rate – Ti/Ttot FIO2
Trends for 72 hours
Vt, Vmin, RR, pPeak, pMean, peep Pplateau auto peep Cstat, Rinsp
Alarms
Pmin, Pmax, Fio2 min. Fio2 max, Vtmin, max, vminute min, vminute max Patient
disconnect, gas supply power supply, Apnea ventilation, Automatic alarms settings,
Alarms memory, Alarms history
Graphics
Reel time pressure curves with adjustable time scales
Real time flow curves with adjustable time scales
Special Graphics
Pressure/volume loops with adjustable curves scales and freezing and calculation
facilities, flow/volume loops with adjustable curves scales and freezing and
calculation facilities, pressure flow loops with adjustable curves scales and freezing
and calculation facilities
OTHERS
Nebulization / Suction Control / Automatic control and calibration Back-up
ventilation / User’s configuration menu Optional
MDV Screen
Two configuration screens both ventilation and monitoring dedicated screens are
designed to offer a more rational approach of settings. Designed to offer a more rational
approach of settings Further more, to provide an acute analysis, HOURS 4 is easily
equipped with its special ventilation monitor “MDV”
 Air Supply Unit for Respirator Horus 4
 Humidifier MR 810 with Adult Chamber
 Peadiatric chamber
 EC humidifier with adult chamber

5. Anaesthesia Ventilator
 Power Input : 220V 50Hz
 Tidal Volume : 100 to 1200ml
 Sigh : 1.5 times Tidal Volume
 Type : Volume, time cycled Ventilator electrically operated,
 Pneumatic engine I/E Ratio : Variable from 1:1 to 1:3
 Safety Pressure : Fixed (60m Bar)
 Frequency : 8 to 40 cycles per min.
 Pressure indicator : LED bar graph display
 Pneumatic requirement : 3-bar pressure

6. Transport Ventilator.
 Peak flow rate in CMV-ACMV – 100 L/min

204
  Peak flow rate in PS-PEEP - 130 L/min
 Gas consumption - 1 L/min
 Pneumatic supply - 2.8 to 6 bar
 Internal electrical power supply – NiCd batteries pack
 Battery life - 10 h
 Charging time - 10 h
 Mains power supply Input - 230V / 50 Hz
 Output - 15V / 6 W
 Dimensions (L X H X D) - 250 X 210 X170 mm
 Weight - 5.0kgs.

7. portable ICU ventilator ICU

 Peak flow rate in CMV-ACMV: 100L/MIN,
 Peak flow rate in PS-PEEP: 130L/min,
 Gas consumption : 1L/min
 Pneumatic supply- 2.8to6bar,
 Internal electrical power supply-niCd batteries pack , Battery life: 10h
 Charging time: 10h
 Mains power supply input:230v/50hz
 Output: 15v/6w,
 Dimension LxHxD:250x210x170mm,
 Wight: 5.0kgs.

205